Checkweigher SSV Series B Type For Type Approval With Metal Detector

Operation Manual
Checkweigher
SSV Series
B Type For Type Approval
with Metal Detector
10th Edition
This manual covers the software versions V5.02 or later.
* Actual products may differ from photographs / pictures / illustrations in this manual.
* Content current as of November 2019.
* All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced without the prior written permission of
Anritsu Infivis Co., Ltd..
* The contents of this manual may be changed without prior notice.
For safety and warning information, please read this manual before attempting to use the equipment.
Keep this manual with the equipment.
Models Covered by This Manual
This manual is for use with the following models. Please check the model number printed on
the nameplate.
Product Models
SSV-h Series SSV-i Series SSV-f Series
KWS6003BF3D/5D/6D, KWS6265BW3D/5D/6D, KWS5203BF3D/5D/6D,
KWS6003BP3D/5D/6D, KWS6265BW2E/3E/4E, KWS5203BP3D/5D/6D,
KWS6003BF2E/3E/4E, KWS6366BW3D/5D/6D, KWS5203BF2E/3E/4E,
KWS6003BP2E/3E/4E, KWS6366BW2E/3E/5E, KWS5203BP2E/3E/4E,
KWS6203BP2E/3E/4E, KWS5577BW2E/4E/5E KWS5411BP2E/3E/5E,
KWS6205BF3D/5D/6D, KWS5412BF3D/5D/6D,
KWS6205BP3D/5D/6D, KWS5412BP3D/5D/6D,
KWS6205BF2E/3E/4E, KWS5412BF2E/3E/5E,
KWS6205BP2E/3E/4E, KWS5412BP2E/3E/5E,
KWS6416BP2E/4E/5E, KWS5524BP2E/4E/5E
KWS6417BF4D/5D/6D,
KWS6417BP4D/5D/6D,
KWS6417BF2E/4E/5E,
KWS6417BP2E/4E/5E
* The suffixes D and E indicate the type of metal detector. D indicates the SSV series with duw type metal
detector, while E indicates SSV series with duw-h type metal detector.
2
Product Models
SSV-h Series SSV-i Series SSV-f Series
KWS6003BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS6265BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5203BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6414BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS6265BW2G/3G/4G, KWS5522BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6416BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS6366BW2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5524BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6417BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS6472BW2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5203BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6003BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5265BW2G/3G/4G, KWS5205BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6005BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5366BW2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5206BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6006BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5472BW2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5411BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6203BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5476BW2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, KWS5412BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6205BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5577BW2G/4G/6G/7G/8G KWS5414BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6206BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5416BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6416BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5203BF2G/3G/4G,
KWS6417BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, KWS5205BF2G/3G/4G,
KWS6003BF2G/3G/4G, KWS5206BF2G/3G/4G,
KWS6005BF2G/3G/4G, KWS5411BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS6205BF2G/3G/4G, KWS5416BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS6206BF2G/3G/4G, KWS5417BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS6411BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5522BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS6412BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5524BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS6414BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5203BP2G/3G/4G,
KWS6416BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, KWS5205BP2G/3G/4G,
KWS6417BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, KWS5206BP2G/3G/4G,
KWS6003BP2G/3G/4G, KWS5411BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS6203BP2G/3G/4G, KWS5416BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS6411BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, KWS5524BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G
KWS6412BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS6416BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS6417BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G
* The R at the end indicates the type of metal detector. R is the M5 series with a metal detector, G is the
M6-h series with a metal detector.
3
Introduction
Read the operation manual thoroughly before using the product. Keep the operation manual with the product for
easy reference.
(1) Structure of the operation manual

Title of document Description To be read by
・ Safety information common to all
products
Operation Manual - Manager and equipment
・ Operation information common to
Before Use maintenance personnel
all products
・ Warranty terms
・ Installation
Manager and equipment
Operation Manual (this document) ・ Details on how to operate
maintenance personnel
・ Maintenance
Manager: Personnel who supervises and manages the operators.

Equipment maintenance personnel: Personnel who manages installation, connection, equipment inspection, and
maintenance.
Operator: Personnel who regularly uses this machine.
4
(2) Symbols used in the text
In this document, the following symbols are used.
Symbol Description
 Indicates another page for reference.
Indicates supplementary notes and related information.
Indicates the items for KWSXXXXBXXD(SSV series with duw type metal detector).
Indicates the items for KWSXXXXBXXE (SSV series with duw-h type metal detector).
Indicates the items for KWSXXXXBXXR（M5 series).
Indicates the items for KWSXXXXBXXG (M6-h type metal detector).
Indicates the type of spanner for the work

7: 7-mm spanner for M4 hexagonal bolts
Phillips head screwdriver
Flat-bladed screwdriver
Hammer and punch
Indicates the type of hex key for the work

5: 5-mm hex key for a hexagonal set screw
Indicates the works that use a precision screwdriver.
5
Contents
■ Models Covered by This Manual ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 2 ● Fine Adjustment ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 98
■ Introduction ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 4 ● Timing Adjustment ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ100
■ Contents ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 6 ● Adjusting the RJ timingꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ101
■ Safety Symbolsꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 8 ● Auto Settings
■ SSV Series Checkweighers (Readjusting registered products) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ102
with Metal Detector ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 9 ■ Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 104
■ Checking the Package Contents ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 10 ● Saving Data to the USB Memory ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ104
■ Names and Functions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ11 ● Setting External I/O Signals ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ127
■ Description of Operation Screen ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 16 ● Adjusting I/O Timing ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ153
● Connecting Ethernet (LAN) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ154
1 Basic Operations ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 28 ■ Other Settings and Adjustments ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 160
■ Turning on the System for the First Time ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 29 ● Performing an installation check ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ160
■ Basic Usage ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 32 ● Adjusting Touch Screen ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ160
● Turning On/Off Power ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 32 ● Checking Version Info ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ161
● Warming Up ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 32 ● Changing and Initializing Password ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ161
● Changing Access Levelꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 33 ● Setting the Date and Time ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ164
● Operating and Stopping ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 35 ● Setting the Language ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ165
● Registering a New Product ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 36 ● Changing the Display Language ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ165
● Checking Operations ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 52 ● Setting Conveyor Speed ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ168
● Adjusting Registered Products ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 57 ● Statistics Control ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ169
● Handling Errors and Alarms ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 73 ● Setting Weighcell ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ171
● If NG frequently occurs ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 75 ● Security and Rules ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ173
● Investigating the cause of ● Specifying the installation check settings ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ177
incorrect detections ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 76 ● Other Functions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ178
■ Daily Operation Procedure ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 80 ● User Information ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ186
● Setting Screen Brightness and
2 Advanced Operations ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 86 Key Touch Operation ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ186
■ Screen Hierarchy ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 87 ● Entering Device Information ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ187
■ Viewing Measurement Data ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 90 ■ Options and Peripheral Devices ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 188
● Basic display ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 90 ● Setting Signal Tower and Buzzer ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ188
● General ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 90 ● Setting a Printer ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ193
● Statistics ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 91 ● Using Smart Measurement Function (SMF) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ204
● Histogram ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 92 ● Setting Rejector ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ206
● X-bar R/s ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 92 ■ Other Useful Functions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 211
● Enlarged barꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 93 ● Using Smart Guide ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 211
● Zoom Weight Disp. ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 94 ● Displaying Product List ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ215
● Custom Disp. ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 94 ● Copying and Deleting Registered Product ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ216
● Individual Disp. ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 95 ● Clearing Statistics ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ217
■ Calibrating/Adjusting Equipment ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 96 ● Setting All Products ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ218
● Sensitivity Correctionꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 96 ● Customizing the Items Displayed in Submenu ꞏꞏꞏ 219
6
● Using Conveyor Mode ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 222 ■ Installing/Removing Components
● Using Multi-Range Function ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 223 (SSV-h/f series) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 287
● Viewing History ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 224 ● Removing the Weigh Conveyor Unitꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ287
1 Basic Operations
● Setting Access Level By Function ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 227 ● Installing the Weigh Conveyor Unit ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ289
● Using Check Mode ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 229 ● Removing the Infeed Conveyor Unitꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ291
● Registering Products Using Another Auto Setting ● Installing the Infeed Conveyor Unit ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ293
Method ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 230 ● Removing the Conveyor Belt/Roller ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ295
● Correcting the Phase based on Characteristic ● Installing the Conveyor Belt/Roller ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ296
Change (Product check function) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 235 ● Adjusting Belt Alignment ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ298
● Changing the Metal Detection Sensitivity ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 237 ■ Installing/Removing Components
● Chronologically Viewing the Effect Value of the (SSV-i series) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 300
2 Advanced Operations
Product (Product effect monitor) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 247 ● Removing the Weigh Conveyor Unitꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ300
● Checking the Effects such as External Noise ● Installing the Weigh Conveyor Unit ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ301
(Noise monitor) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 251 ● Removing the Infeed Conveyor Unitꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ303
● Using HIS Setting Function ● Installing the Infeed Conveyor Unit ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ304
ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 254
● Removing the Conveyor Belt ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ306
● Using Auto-Limit-Setting Function ꞏꞏꞏ 259
● Installing the Conveyor Belt ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ307
● Using FOCUS Setting Function ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 262
● Adjusting Belt Alignment ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ308
■ Check Items for Failureꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 309
3 Installation and Connection

3 Installation and Connection ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 268 ● Troubleshooting ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ309
■ Selecting Installation Location and
● Outputting support data ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ319
Transportation ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 269
● Forced Operation ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ322
■ Installation ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 270
■ Error Messages and Solutions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 325
■ Connecting External Equipment ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 273
■ Adjusting Photocell ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 356
● SSV-h/f Series ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 273
● SSV-i Series ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 274

5 Appendix ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 360
■ How to Seal ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 276
■ Consumables ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 361
● Apply a Seal ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 276
■ Spare Parts ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 368
● Sealing the Machineꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 277
■ Connecting the Terminal Block Connector and
4 Maintenance
■ Connecting Power Supply and Grounding,
Push-Type Terminal Block ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 380
Turning On the Power ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 279
■ External I/O Specifications ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 381
■ RJ Output Specification ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 385
4 Maintenance ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 280
■ RJ-I/F Unit (Optional)
■ Daily Maintenanceꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 281
RJ I/O Specifications ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 386
● Daily Maintenance ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 281
■ Ethernet Connection ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 389
● Weekly Maintenance ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 282
■ Timing Chart ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 391
■ Cleaning ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 283
■ Specifications ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 392
● SSV-h/f Series ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 283
■ Copyright, etc. ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 566
5 Appendix
● SSV-i Series ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 283

■ CE Conformity Markingꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 567
● Maintenance of Stainless Steel ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 286
7
Safety Symbols
To prevent the risk of personal injury or loss related to equipment malfunction, Anritsu Infivis Co., Ltd. (Anritsu
Infivis) uses the following safety symbols to indicate safety-related information. Insure that you clearly understand
the meanings of the symbols BEFORE using the equipment. Some or all of the symbols may not be used on this
equipment. In addition, when drawings are included in this manual, labels on the equipment may not be shown on
them.
Safety Symbols Used in Manual
This indicates a very dangerous procedure that could result in death or serious
DANGER injury if not performed properly.
This indicates a hazardous procedure that could result in death or serious injury
WARNING if not performed properly.
This indicates a hazardous procedure or danger that could result in light-to-severe

CAUTION injury, or loss related to equipment malfunction, if proper precautions are not taken.
Safety Symbols Used on Equipment and/or in Manual
The following safety symbols are used inside or on the equipment near operation locations, and/or in manual to
provide information about safety items and operation precautions. Insure that you clearly understand the meanings
of the symbols and take the necessary precautions BEFORE using the equipment.
This indicates a prohibited operation. The prohibited operation is indicated in or

near the barred circle.
This indicates an obligatory safety precaution. The obligatory operation is

indicated in or near the circle.
This indicates a warning or caution. The contents are indicated in or near the
triangle.
This indicates a note. The contents are described in the box.
These indicate that the marked part should be recycled, or be disposed in

accordance with local laws.
8
SSV Series Checkweighers with Metal Detector
Checkweighers are automated weighing devices commonly used

to verify each product meets its stated label weight or piece count
(based on package weight). Checkweighers can also be used to
dynamically adjust filling systems or provide weight trending
information to operators and can provide valuable production line
data. They provide benefits including the ability to reduce
product and packaging losses as well as ensuring product
consistency. Checkweighers are a valuable device for any
production line for both quality verification and production line
optimization.
The SSV series checkweigher with metal detector has the

following features:
A high-speed and high-accuracy weighing system

The SSV weighing system is capable of checking up to 600
products per minute with an accuracy of up to +/- 10mg (model
dependant).
Operator panel with color LCD touch screen

The display enables the operator to quickly and easily view
production line or weight trending information.
Management by USB memory and Ethernet ports

Date management/collection can be done by connecting the LAN
or USB memory.
* Ethernet ports are standard specifications include Ethernet
(LAN) connection to QUICCA.
Standard I/O capabilities for monitoring and line

integration
The system interface fully supports line status monitoring and
integration via standard and programmable I/O signals.
Designed for specific operating environments

You can choose from painted exterior or stainless steel exterior.
9
Checking the Package Contents
Make sure that all of the following items are present. If any item is damaged or missing, please contact us.
● SSV-h/f Series
□ Main unit 1 □ Spanner 1
(Double-head wrench with bolt widths 10 mm and 7 mm)
□ Operation Manual 1 set

□ Operation Manual -
Before Use 1
□ Operation Manual 1
● SSV-i Series
□ Main unit 1 □ Spanner 1
(Double-head wrench with bolt widths 10 mm and 7 mm)
□ Operation Manual 1 set □ Cable clamp 2

□ Operation Manual -
Before Use 1
□ Operation Manual 1
10
Names and Functions
● Main unit
[1] [1] Indicator

Stores the control unit of the checkweigher.
[2] Conveyor section
Weighs products while carrying them.
[2] [3] Stand
Supports the indicator and conveyor unit.
[3] [4] Foot bolt
Adjusts the main unit height with the production
line.
[4]
● Indicator
[1] Operation screen

[1] Displays measured values, evaluation results,
and statistics data, and is used to start or stop
[3] [2] operations and for a variety of settings.
[2] Power switch
Turns the power of the checkweigher on and
off.
[3] USB port
Used for inserting a USB memory for data
storage (sold separately).
● Conveyor section
[7] [5] [6] [1] Weigh conveyor section

[4]
Weigh conveyor with the product carrying
[3] [1] function.
[2] Weighcell
Weighcell for measuring weight.
[2] [3] Infeed conveyor section
Section to feed products to the weigh conveyor
section in stable conveyance state.
[4], [6] Photocell
Sensor for detecting the location of a product
being weighed.
[5] Metal detection unit
Performs test for metal contamination.
[7] Opening
Tests for metal contamination when products
pass.
11
Names and Functions
■ Weigh conveyor section, Infeed conveyor section
SSV-h/f Series
Weigh conveyor section [Weigh conveyor section]
（KWS6XXX, KWS52XX, KWS54XX type） [1]， [5] Weigh conveyor unit
[1] [2]， [7] Motor
[3]，[6] Belt cover
[4] Catch clip
[4] [8] Roller cover

[2] [9] Conveyor belt
[3] [10] Drive roller
(KWS55XX type) [11] Drive belt
[5]
[12] Adjuster
[8] [13] Driven roller
[7] [6]
Weigh conveyor unit
(Common to SSV-h/f series)
[9]
[10]
[13]
[11]
[12]
Infeed conveyor section [Infeed conveyor section]
(Common to SSV-h/f series) [1] Infeed conveyor section
[2] Tension roller
[1] [3]，[6] Catch clip
[2] [4]，[7] Belt cover
[5]，[8] Motor
[9] Conveyor belt
For a belt width of For a belt width of
160 mm or 250 mm 350 mm [10] Drive roller
[11] Drive belt
[12] Driven roller
[6]
[3] [7] [8]
[5]
[4]
Infeed conveyor unit
(Common to SSV-h/f series)
[9]
[10]
[12]
[11]
12
Names and Functions
SSV-i Series
Weigh conveyor section [Weigh conveyor section]
[1] Weigh conveyor unit
[1] [2] Motor
[3],[4] Catch clip
[2] [5] Conveyor belt

[4] [6] Knob
[3] [7] Driven roller part

[8] Drive roller
Weigh conveyor unit,
Infeed conveyor unit (Common) [5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Infeed conveyor section [Infeed conveyor section]
[1] Infeed conveyor section
[1] [2]，[3] Catch clip

[4]
[4] Motor
[2]
[3]
13
Names and Functions
● Operation screen
Push-button switches
[1] [Start] button
[4] [8] [5] [6] [7] [20] [10] Starts the operation of the
checkweigher.
The green lamp around the button
illuminates when the checkweigher is
[11]
operating.
[12]
[2] [Stop] button
[13] Stops the operation of the
checkweigher. The red lamp around
[14] the button illuminates when the
[15] checkweigher is stopped.
[3] [Home] button
Displays the Basic screen.
Touch screen type color LCD display

[16] [17] [9] [3] [18] [2] [19] [1] operation panel
[4] Operation mode/product display
Displays the current operation mode
of the checkweigher or current
product (switches according to the
screen type).
[5] [Date and Time] button
Displays the current date and time. Press the button to set the internal clock.
[6] [Access Level] button
Displays the level of authority to operate. Press the button to change the access level.
[7] [Help] button
Displays supplementary menu.
[8] [Current product display] area
Displays the product number, setting values, and weighed item count of the current
product.
[9] [Weighing result display] area
Displays the weight and evaluation results of weighed products.
[10] [Zero Set] button
Adjusts the zero point of the weighcell.
[11] [Switch the product.] button
Switches the product type.
[12] [Register new product.] button
Registers the product type.
14
Names and Functions
[13] [Changing Product setting.] button

Displays the Ins. condition set. screen.
[14] [Checking operation.] button
Feeds products to check the operation without counting statistics. Displays the selected
screen either of the check mode or evaluation/rejection check by selecting [Menu],
[Control Panel], [Home display settings], and [Display settings] in this order.
[15] [Adjusting MD sensitivity.] button
Displays a screen on which you can adjust the sensitivity.
[16] [Menu] button
Opens the setting menu.
[17] [Display] button
Switches screens.
[18] [Others.] button
Displays the submenu such as Stats Clear by touching this.
[19] [Metal detection level] bar
Displays the detection level of metal contaminant.
[20] [NowWt.R] display
Displays the weight range currently set.
15
Description of Operation Screen
● Operation screen
The display screen of an SSV series checkweigher with metal detector can be changed according
to purpose.
Each time the [Display] button in the bottom of the screen is pressed, the screen switches to
another screen in the order of: [Basic display] → [General] → [Statistics] → [Histogram] → [Show
X-bar R/s] → [Enlarge bar] → [Zoom Weight Disp.] → [Custom Disp.] → [Individual Disp.] → [Smart
guide].
Basic display
This is the basic screen of the checkweigher.
Regular operations can be performed with one
click.
This screen is displayed when the [Home] button
is pressed.
 P. 90 Basic display
General
It collects and displays frequently used information.
 P. 90 General
Statistics
This screen is used to see production control
statistics (weighed item count and weight).
ALL data or Pass. data only views are available.
 P. 91 Statistics
16
Histogram
This screen is used to visually check the weight
distribution of weighed products.
ALL data or Pass. Data only views are available.
 P. 92 Histogram
X-bar R/s
This screen is used to visually check the trend of
weight changes in weighed products.
The mean value and dispersion of each
aggregate unit (batch) are displayed in
time-series graphs. Quantity or cycle time can be
a factor to formulate a batch.
 P. 92 X-bar R/s
Enlarged bar
This screen is used to visually check the real-time
variation of the weight.
An enlarged bar graph is displayed.
 P. 93 Enlarged bar
Zoom Weight Disp.

This screen is used to check the operation status
of the production line.
It displays the weight as an enlarged number and
also shows the production status (the number of
products weighed per minute).
 P. 94 Zoom Weight Disp.
17
Custom Disp.
This screen is used to display the opted items
only. It helps to see data need to be monitored
specifically.
 P. 94 Custom Disp.
Individual Disp.
This screen is used to display the evaluation
results, each weight value and statistics for the
last 31 products checked. By keeping the data
displayed, it helps to adjust or confirm the
operations with ease.
 P. 95 Individual Disp.
Smart guide (displays only when the Smart guide function is used)
This screen displays operation instructions for the
operator to prevent operation errors or an
omission of steps.
 P. 80 Daily Operation Procedure
18
(The General screen is used as an example in the description below.)
● Mass bar and icons

The weighing results are displayed with the mass bars and icons shown below as well as in a
numerical display of the weight.
Mass bar Icon Weighing results
Indicates a PASS product was fed.
* The weight was within the upper and lower
limits.
Indicates a +NG product was fed.
*
The weight exceeded the upper limit.
Indicates a -NG product was fed.

*
The weight was less than the lower limit.
Indicates an NG signal was received from

(As per weight value) external equipment.
The products was evaluated as no good.
Weight evaluation could not be completed
because the product was not carried properly.
The reason of the conveyor error can be
checked with the alarm displayed at the top
of the screen.
 P. 325 Error Messages and Solutions
* If the product is evaluated as metal NG, the mass bar and the weight value are displayed
according to the weighing result; however, the icon indicates [Metal NG].
When the weight appears as [+OVF] or [-OVF], the meaning is as follows.

Displayed weight Meaning
The measured value exceeded the maximum value to be displayed.

This occurred because the product is too heavy for the
checkweigher specifications, the weighcell or weigh conveyor was
overloaded, or due to the effects of wind, vibrations, or another
disturbance.
The measured value fell below the minimum value to be displayed.
This occurred due to double products, a locked weighcell, or the
effects of wind, vibrations, or another disturbance.
• Double product indicates that two products exist on the weighcell conveyor unit.
• MDNG indicates that the metal detector detected metal contamination.
19
● Metal detection level bar and evaluation result icons
The test result for metal contamination is displayed by the metal detection level bar and icons as
shown below.
[For metal contamination checks ( P. 42) ]
Metal detection level bar Icon Detection result
No metal contamination
The metal effect value has not
*
reached the metal contamination
The red light is not turned on. evaluation reference.
Metal-contaminated product
The metal effect value has reached
Red lights (1 to 4 on the right side)
the metal contamination evaluation
turn on.
reference.
Metal evaluation could not be
completed because the product was
not carried properly.
The reason of the conveyor error
(Depending on the metal effect value)
can be checked with the alarm
displayed at the top of the screen.
 P. 325 Error Messages and
Solutions
[For missing product checks ( P. 43) ]

Metal detection level bar Icon Detection result
No missing product
The metal effect value exceeds
Red lights (1 to 4 on the right side) *
the missing product evaluation
turn on.
reference.
Missing product
The metal effect value has not
reached the missing product
The red light is not turned on. evaluation reference.
Missing product evaluation could
not be completed because the
(Depending on the metal effect value)
product was not carried properly.
(See the description above.)
* If the evaluation of the metal contamination (or missing product) check is [OK], the final
evaluation is determined by the weighing result.
20
- Metal contamination check 1 –

▪ When products are being conveyed: Updates the effect values every time a product is fed.
▪ When products are not being conveyed: Updates the effect values every 100 ms.
- Metal contamination check 2, 3, 4 –
▪ When MDNG products are being conveyed: Updates the effect values at the timing of the
MDNG evaluation.
▪ When MDNG products are not being conveyed: The effect values are not updated. However,
on the "Sensitivity Adjustment" screen and "Sensitivity Adjustment 2" screen ( P. 237
Changing the Metal Detection Sensitivity), the effect values are updated every 100 ms.
● Icon display
At the top of the operation screen, the icons are displayed to show the state of network, USB
memory and code reader.
(QUICCA, USB memory and code reader are optional.)
Network (QUICCA)*1 USB memory*2 Screen (Code reader)*3
Connected Inserted Able to

correctly read
correctly
Disconnected
Data stored in the

metal detector while
disconnected
Network (Other)
Connected correctly
Disconnected
*1 Indicates the connecting status of QUICCA (Quality Management and Control System
Software by Anritsu)
*2 Appears when a USB memory when an optional USB memory is used.
*3 The animation of code reader is displayed while the bar code (Item code etc.) is readable.
21
● Operation and input method
■ Touch screen buttons
When a button is pressed, the corresponding
function starts.
 P. 86 2. Advanced Operations
Example 1 [Menu]
The first layer of the setting menu is called.
When a button is pressed, the detailed
setting menu is displayed.
Example 2 [Others],
When a button is pressed, the submenu is
displayed above the button. When an item
is pressed, the function is called directly
without opening another menu.
■ Information display area of the touch screen

When the information display area in the frame is pressed, the related settings and display
screens are called.
 P. 90 Viewing Measurement Data
Example 1 When the product display frame is

pressed, the Product Change screen
is displayed.
Example 2 When the reference value or
upper/lower limit value display frame
is pressed, the Ins. condition set Prod Change screen Ins. Condition set
screen is displayed. screen
22
■ Settings screen (menu)

Inspection conditions for the product and checkweigher operation are set.
When an item in the list is pressed, the setting input screen or a setting list of deeper layer is
displayed.
The cursor moves to the previous page.

Keep pressing to let it move continuously.
When the cursor reaches to the first page, it moves
to the last page.
The cursor moves to one line above.

The keypad is displayed to enter list number

directly.
The cursor moves to one line below.

The cursor moves to the next page.

When the cursor reaches to the last page, it moves
to the first page.
■ Setting selection
When a setting is to be selected from the
provided options, a list screen containing the
options is displayed.
Select an option (the selected option is
highlighted) and press the [OK] button to
specify the option.
23
■ Software keypad
When a numeric value is to be entered, the keypad is displayed.
Enter a number and press the [OK] button to set the value.
BS key
Deletes the last digit.
▲ key
Increases the value by 1.
▼ key
Decreases the value by 1.
C key
Clears the input value to 0.
+/- key
Reverses positive and negative.
24
■ Software Keyboard
When characters are to be entered, a software keyboard is displayed.
Enter characters and press the [OK] button to set the characters.
Character type selection key BS key

Switches over [ABC], [NUM], and [Symbol]. Deletes the last character before the
cursor.
< > key

Moves the cursor by one character.
Aa key
Swithes upper case
and lower case.
Num key
Switches to input
number.
Space key
Enters one space.
25
Entering letters
When [A/a] is pressed, input is switched
to lower-case letters.
Entering Korean characters

When the display language is changed to
Korean, the Korean keyboard screen is
displayed.
Press the [엔터키] (Confirm) button to
confirm the composition of the Korean

characters.
 P. 165 Changing the Display Language
Entering Chinese characters

When the display language is changed to
Chinese, the Chinese keyboard screen is
displayed.
Press the [ 转变 ] (Convert) button to
convert the alphabetic characters into

Chinese characters.
Korean and Chinese product names do not support output to USB memory, printer, or serial (it is
replaced with "?" when output).
Entering numbers
In addition to numbers, frequently used units
and symbols can be entered.
26
Entering symbols
Other symbols can be entered.
27
1 Basic Operations
This chapter describes the basic operations.
1 Basic Operations
Turning on the System for the First Time 29
Basic Usage 32
Daily Operation Procedure 80
28
Turning on the System for the First Time
1 Turning on the power.

 P. 32 Turning On/Off Power
1 Basic Operations
2 When the system is started for the first
time after it has been delivered, the
Confirmation at installation screen, which
provides cautions for using the system
safely, is displayed. Be sure to read the
contents of this screen before using the
system.
Tap [Yes] to allow the Confirmation at installation screen to be displayed.
Tap [Do not display] to stop the Confirmation at installation screen from being
displayed when the system is started next time.
The Confirmation at installation screen shows safety messages in the following order.
Cautions for safety Handling caution 1 Handling caution 2 Installation precaution

Connection and Installation Place to install the Checking
installation metal detector installation state
Operation Operation Using the metal Checking

detector conveyance
Maintenance and Use in combination Products to be Checking for dust

cleaning with rejector inspected by metal
detector
End of confirmation
Metal detection Weighcell Checking belts and
performance of conveyors
metal detector
Touch panel End of confirmation Checking photocell

4 Maintenance
operation
End of confirmation End of confirmation
3 Tap the [Next] button to display the next message.

5 Appendix
29
4 Select the check box on the screen, and
then tap [Completed].
1 Basic Operations
5 Press "Start" and follow the instructions

displayed on the screen.
When “Smart guide settings” is set to “No”,

operation screen is automatically
displayed. ”Start” does not appear on the
screen.
"Smart guide" screen

In standard equipment, Smart Guide is
set by factory default.
To use the equipment without following

this guide, select the "Menu" screen →
"Maint. and Setting" → "Functions" →
"Smart guide settings", select "No" in
"Input", and tap [OK]. Tap the Home
button to return to the operation screen.
To open "Maint. and Setting", the access level must be set to 2 (manager level).
4 Maintenance
6 Select the access level.

Refer to "Changing Access Level".
 P. 33 Changing Access Level
7 Set the Date and Time.

Refer to "Setting the Date and Time”.
5 Appendix
 P. 164 Setting the Date and Time
30
8 Set RJ direction.
Refer to "Setting Rejector".
 P. 206 Setting Rejector
1 Basic Operations
9 Calibrate the weighcell.
Refer to "Sensitivity correction".
 P. 96 Sensitivity Correction
To register a product, refer to "Register New a Product" in Basic Operations.

 P. 36 Registering a New Product
To connect to a network, refer to "Connecting Ethernet (LAN)".
 P. 154 Connecting Ethernet (LAN)
For USB memory, printer, and signal tower settings, refer to the respective sections.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
31
Basic Usage
Basic Usage
> Turning On/Off Power

To turn on the power, turn the power switch
clockwise.
1 Basic Operations
To turn off the power, turn it counterclockwise.

Power switch ON
OFF
> Warming Up
After completion of machine sealing, the

screen will display the warming-up screen.
Checkweigher operation will be disabled
while the warming-up screen is displayed.
After completion of warming-up, the screen
will change to the “Basic screen”.
When the checkweigher had been running for
sufficient periods of time before the power
switch is turned off, the warming-up time
would be reduced according to the time when
4 Maintenance
turning the power off and the model of the

checkweigher.
5 Appendix
32
Basic Usage
> Changing Access Level
The access level can be changed to change the range of operation according to the level
of the operator.
1 Basic Operations
This machine has 4 access levels. Level 3 is only for Anritsu service engineers and not
available for general use. The following 3 levels can be used:
Level 1a: Operator Level 1

Only basic operations such as running, stopping, and changing the product
are allowed.
Level 1b: Operator Level 2
In addition to the operations permitted by Level 1a, "Operation Check",
"Product Registration", and "Clear Statistics" are allowed.
Level 2: Manager Level

This level is for managers of this product. In addition to the operations
permitted by Level 1b, managers are allowed to set production conditions and
check the history data.

To set parameters, change the access level from "Operator Level" to "Manager Level".
1 Tapping the key icon at the upper right

part of the "Main" screen displays the
"Access Level Change" screen.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
33
Basic Usage
2 Select the Manager Level radio button and click [OK]. The password input screen is
displayed.
1 Basic Operations
Select Manager Level Password input screen

3 Enter the password "7777" and tap [OK] to change the access level to Manager Level.
For instructions on changing or initializing the password, refer to "Changing and
Initializing Password".
 P. 161 Changing and Initializing Password
When the power is turned off while in Level 2 and turned on again, the level returns to Level 1b.
When the power is turned off while in Level 1a and turned on again, the level is Level 1a.
To change the level from Level 1a to Level 1b or Level 2, or from Level 1b to Level 2, enter the
password.
The password to Level 1b is "5555".
The password to Level 2 is "7777".
It is also possible to access the "Access Level Change" screen by selecting the "Menu"
screen → "Control Panel" → "Access Level Change".
The access level can also be set by using a function in the "Set Access Authority" screen.
 P. 227 Setting Access Level By Function
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
34
Basic Usage
> Operating and Stopping
1 Basic Operations
For stable metal detecting operation, we recommend that you turn on the power 60 minutes prior
to the start of production. However, turning on the power 90 minutes before performing
automatic settings is recommended if the product to be tested uses evaporated aluminum or is a
food with a high salt content.
For stable metal detecting operation, we recommend that you turn on the power at least 10
minutes before the start of production.
(The same applies when performing "Register new product." and "Auto-setting".)
Before starting the conveyors, remove products on the infeed, weigh, and downstream
conveyors. If operation is started while products are on the conveyors, weighing and rejection
may not be performed correctly.
■ Operating

Tap the [Start] button. The conveyor starts
up and becomes operational.
The area around the Start button illuminates
in green.
■ Stopping
Tap the [Stop] button.
The conveyor stops, and the area around 4 Maintenance
the Stop button illuminates in red.
5 Appendix
35
Basic Usage
> Registering a New Product
In this equipment, parameters of up to 200 products can be registered.
Registering products allows you to perform production control properly and operate the
1 Basic Operations
equipment effectively.
When "Register new product" is tapped in the "Menu" screen, the "Product Registration
Start" screen is displayed.
Input and set a product and its parameters by following the on-screen instructions.
1 Prepare a master product (a product with dimensions, weight, contents, and

packaging equivalent to those of products normally fed to the line).
Tap [Next] to proceed to the input screen.

2 Tap the Product text box and select the

product number to register. Tap [OK].
Or select the following method of register,

and check the check box.
▼ Auto select unregistered Prod.
The Product No. is chosen automatically

from the unregistered Prod No. after the
currently selected Prod No..
4 Maintenance
▼ Set Prod. after delete.
Get registered in the selected product

No.. When that product No. is registered,
the registration information is removed
and overwritten with new information.
Tap [Next].
5 Appendix
36
Basic Usage
3 Make sure that the cursor is on "Product
Parameter Setting", and tap "Execute".
The screen shown on the right is
1 Basic Operations
displayed. Tap [Next].
If "Enter Directly" is selected in the "Prod Para Setting Start" screen, input are made swiftly from
the parameter table.
4 When the text box area of the "Enter
Product Information" screen is tapped,
the keyboard is displayed. Enter the
product name, and click [OK].
Fill Disp Type2 when necessary.

To register both Type1 and Type2, you
can switch the display language.
Make sure that the product name has

4 Maintenance
been entered correctly, and tap [Next].

5 Appendix
37
Basic Usage
5 In the Product Dimension screen, enter
the Product Length, Width, and Height.
When the box area is tapped, the keypad

1 Basic Operations
is displayed. Enter a value and tap

[Next].
You can measure approximate dimensions Enter Product Length

using the ruler displayed on the screen.
Enter the longest dimension value for length,

width, and height.
When all dimensions are entered
6 Enter the Reference Value, +Limit, and

-Limit.
Tap the Reference Value text box, and
use the displayed keypad to enter a
value.
For +Limit and -Limit, press the

appropriate text box and use the
displayed keypad to enter a value.
When the master product is placed on the weigh conveyor, the weight value is displayed. Values
4 Maintenance
are automatically entered when "Regis measured val" is tapped.
Method for setting the upper and lower limits

The checkweigher (CW) upper and lower limit settings are usually set as follows:
(1) Determine the upper and lower limit settings for production based on the reference
value for the product being weighed.
(2) Subtract the CW rejection accuracy from the determined upper and lower limits.
(3) Set the CW upper and lower limits so they are in the following range:
5 Appendix
0 g ≤ Lower limit + Reference weight ≤ Upper limit + Reference weight ≤ Maximum

display value.
38
Basic Usage
The following "Upper limit" and "Lower limit" are the CW upper and lower limit setting
values.
Lower limit Upper limit
1 Basic Operations
for production for production
Reference
Lower value Upper
limit limit
Rejection Rejection
accuracy accuracy
This document describes about Product parameter, Lower Limit.

Refer to [EEC function instruction manual] for mean value.
Rejection accuracy
The rejection accuracy of this CW is represented as 3. This means that when the theoretical

rejection accuracy is 1 g, the weighing error has a 99.7% probability of being within 1 g. For
example, when measuring a 100.0 g product 1000 times, the chance that the measured weight
will exceed 100 1 g is three times.
Consequently, if you want to keep stricter production upper and lower limits, it is necessary
to narrow the CW upper and lower limit widths. However, in this case, there is an increased
probability that the CW will evaluate Pass products as NG products, so this should be set
based on the production quality control and yield ratio.
7 To enter the tare weight, enter a value

using the same method as when you
4 Maintenance
entered the reference value.
After entering the value，tap [Next].

5 Appendix
39
Basic Usage
8 Enter the Main Conveyor Speed.
Set an appropriate conveyor speed for
the production line capacity. When a
speed value (m/min) is entered in "Main
1 Basic Operations
Conveyor Speed", "Inspection

performance" and "Auto-zerosetting
Perf." (number of products measured per
minute) are automatically calculated
based on the value and displayed.
After entering the value, tap [Next].

9 Select a check method for the metal

detector.
▪ Check metal contamination

To check for metal contamination.
When the product length or main

conveyor speed satisfies the specified
conditions, the message screen is
displayed. In this case, select "Metal
Check 3".
4 Maintenance
Even the conveyor speed is set at 70m/min. or faster, Metal 1 can be used if the products are tall
enough (tall box, for instance) to block the optical sensors located at the side of metal detection
head sufficiently.
Products which may block the sensors more than twice for each feed (in bags with narrow gaps,
for instance), false detection may be caused.
▪ Check missing product

To check for missing metal (evaporated)
attachments or missing attached
documents printed in magnetic ink
5 Appendix
After selection, tap [Next].
40
Basic Usage
10 Check if the photocell of the metal
detector detects the product.
▪ Yes
1 Basic Operations
The red lamp of the photocell goes out
(the light is blocked), when place the
product in front of the photocell of the
metal detector.
▪ No
When the red lamp does not go out (the
light is not blocked). If you cannot
determine if the light is blocked.
A missing product check cannot be performed if the product to be measured is not blocking the
photocell.
11 Set the interval of feeding products.

Select [Yes] if the interval of feeding
products is 280 mm or more and select
[No] when it is less than 280 mm.
And press [Next].
Feed products at an interval of 280 mm or

more to check for missing products.
4 Maintenance
12 Set the control sensitivity.

(Go to step 13 to check for missing
products.)
Enter the size of the Fe and SUS test

pieces used for checking the metal
detection sensitivity and press [Next].
5 Appendix
41
Basic Usage
13 Check the evaluation mode of the metal detector and the size of the control sensitivity
test pieces.
▼ Metal 1
1 Basic Operations
(The photocell is blocked and products

are fed through at an interval of 280 mm
or more.)
Evaluate if there is any metal

contamination for each product.
An alarm evaluation (double product or

length over) is given when the photocell is
not blocked or products are fed through at

an interval of less than 280 mm.
▼ Metal 2
(Product carrier method: Products are in a

box. The photocell is blocked. Products
are fed through at an interval of less than
280 mm.)
Product recognition via the photocell is

not performed. Metal evaluation and
rejection are performed from the location
of the MDNG judgment. OK products are
not counted.
▼ Metal 3
(The photocell is not blocked or products

are fed through at an interval of less
than 280 mm.)
4 Maintenance
Product recognition via the photocell is

not performed. Metal evaluation and
rejection are performed from the location
of the MDNG judgment. OK products are
not counted.
5 Appendix
42
Basic Usage
▼ Checking for missing products
Evaluate if a metal (evaporated)

attachment is missing for each product.
1 Basic Operations
Tap [Next] to finish setting the product
parameters.
Tap [Check set items] to view the setting
values for each item.
Tap [Completed] to set the fine

adjustment.
14 If the weight of the master product and

the displayed value during operation are
different, the displayed value needs to

be corrected. This correction is called
fine adjustment.
Tap [Execute] to proceed the start

screen.
Prepare a master product and tap [Next].
4 Maintenance
Enter the weight of the master product.

5 Appendix
43
Basic Usage
Tap [Next], and press the Start button to
start the conveyor.
Follow the screen instructions to feed

1 Basic Operations
the master product.
Feed it for the specified number of times.

When "Fine adjustment has finished
normally." is displayed, fine adjustment
is complete.
If the master product is of a different form from products fed on the line, or if the flow orientation
is different, there is some risk of reduced accuracy when feeding products during the production
run.
15 Auto-set the metal detector.

Auto-set allows the metal detection unit
to automatically adjust the inspection
and evaluation conditions to the
optimum conditions according to the

properties of the product.
Prepare a master product and press

[Execute].
Prepare a product containing a missing

component (NG sample product) if you
are performing a missing product check.
4 Maintenance
Feed products at an interval of 280 mm or more to check for missing products.
5 Appendix
44
Basic Usage
1 Basic Operations
16 Select New/Readjust
Press [Next] if the product number has
not been registered.
Select [Make auto setting by using
current settings] and press [Next] to
register a new product using the
registered product number.
See the following to readjust the settings of the registered product.

 P. 102 Auto Settings (Readjusting registered products)

17 Select the auto-set method.
Normally, select Full-auto (recommended)
and press [Next].
▪ Full automatic method

This method automatically evaluates
the properties of the product and
automatically adjusts the check
settings to optimal values to fit these
4 Maintenance
properties.
▪ Specifies scan mode and specify product property

Specify product property
This is used for setting a product for which auto setting was performed and whose
properties are already known.
 P. 230 Registering Products Using Another Auto Setting Method

5 Appendix
45
Basic Usage
18 Check the back and forth movements of
the conveyor.
▪ Yes
1 Basic Operations
To automatically move the master

product back and forth on the conveyor
when performing the auto-set.
▪ No
To allow an operator to feed the master
product when performing the Auto-Set.
However, it is not appropriate to automatically move the following products back and
forth under the conditions described below.
▪ A product whose height is 10 mm or less and that does not block the photocell
▪ A product whose gravity center is high and is unstable
▪ A product of a shape prone to falling over
▪ A long product that could drop from the edge of the conveyor
▪ A product prone to changing its orientation when moved back and forth
(for example, a slippery product)
19 Press the [Start] button. When the

conveyor starts moving, feed the master
product according to the on-screen
instructions.
▪ Do not feed the master product while the

“Wait for a while” message is displayed.
4 Maintenance
▪ Press the [Cancel], [Back], or [Stop] button

during auto setting to stop the setting
operation. When the operation is stopped,
settings are not updated and the previous
settings are kept.
▪ If a system error occurs during auto setting,
the setting operation is stopped. Release from
the error and try auto setting again.
5 Appendix
46
Basic Usage
▼ Checking for metal contamination
Feed the master product

15 times.
1 Basic Operations
Feed the master product 5
times.
Feed the master product 12

times.
When Auto-set finishes, the determined

sensitivity mode and the estimated
detection sensitivity are displayed.
Press [Cancel] if you do not want to
have the results of auto-set applied.
The value of the estimated detection sensitivity is a rough indication of the test piece that can be
detected and is not a guaranteed value. Be sure to check the detection sensitivity after
performing the auto settings.

▼ Checking for a missing product

8 times and missing product (NG
sample products) 2 times (for the
Full-auto method).

7 times and missing product (NG
sample products) 3 times 4 Maintenance
When Auto-set finishes, the determined

sensitivity mode and the stability index
are displayed.
The less the stability index, the more a

missing product can be detected with
stability.
Adjust the detection sensitivity if the

stability index in 0.5 or more.
5 Appendix
 P. 242 Changing the detection sensitivity

(for a missing product check)
47
Basic Usage
Press [Completed] to terminate
registration of the product.
Press [Cancel] if you do not want to

1 Basic Operations
have the results of auto setting applied.
When Auto-set Method is “Auto

(recommended)”, press [Details] to
display the estimated detection level by
sensitivity mode.
Auto (recommended) at Auto-set
To change the settings,

select the new item and tap [Change],

[Completed].
Estimated detection by sensitivity mode
When the sensitivity

4 Maintenance
mode determined by auto-setting is either

[A-A] or [B-B], the sensitivity may be
improved by changing the mode from
[A-A] to[B-B] or [B-B] to [A-A] respectively,
depending on products to be
inspected.When the sensitivity mode is
changed, select the mode to set then tap
Change to start the final adjustment
again by feeding the product.
5 Appendix
48
Basic Usage
The setting market by ★ is the highest in detection sensitivity. The sensitivity value in
parenthesis may change when auto-setting is conducted again.
1 Basic Operations
Notes on auto-set
(1) Avoid passing the master product to the next part of the line because the contaminants
contained in the master product are not detected during auto-set. The RJ direction is
not controlled during auto-set. Be especially careful if the rejector is on standby in the
OK direction.
(2) Be careful not to use an inappropriate product during auto-set. You may not be able to
conduct a correct check, resulting in passing a contaminated or missing product.
(3) Do not feed a product heavier than the weight specified by the checkweigher.
Otherwise, the amount of heat generated by the motor may increase, and this could
lead to motor trouble and burning.
(4) Do not feed a product larger than the opening size of the MD head. The product might
hit the resin cover of the MD head and cause the resin cover to crack or chip.
(5) Feed the master product in the same direction and shape as that of the normal
inspected product fed on the line.
(6) If the master product does not block the photocell, block the light axis with your hand
when the master product is passing the MD head. Do not use the function for moving
the conveyor back and forth.

(7) The detection conditions may vary with each auto-set due to external noise for
instance, even if the products are the same.
(8) If the property of the master product is different from that of those actually fed in the
line, or if the product is fed in the wrong direction, the products fed during operation
may be erroneously detected.
(9) Operation for a product for which Auto setting is not completed cannot start.
Metal level bar
(10) When auto-set is set, a photocell error occurs when the photocell monitoring time
elapses even for a bulk type product.
(11) For Auto-setting, the number of feeding products may increase in accordance with the
4 Maintenance
product characteristics.
5 Appendix
49
Basic Usage
After product parameter setting, fine
adjustment, and auto-set are performed,
whether the system is running correctly
according to the registered product
1 Basic Operations
settings can be verified.
Tap the [Adj/check] button to perform RJ

timing adjustment/setting, sensitivity
adjustment, accuracy check, and Eval/RJ
check.
 P. 101 Adjusting the RJ timing

 P. 237 Changing the Metal Detection Sensitivity
 P. 52 Checking Operations
▪ The [RJ timing adjustment/setting] button is not displayed if the system is specified to stop
when no rejector is connected or when a product is evaluated as NG.
▪ Usually, the Adjust RJ timing screen is displayed when the [RJ timing adjustment/setting]
button is tapped. Note, however, that the RJ Timing Setting screen (shown on P. 62) might
be displayed instead depending on the rejector type.
Product registration is now complete.

If the setting is wrong, start the setting again from Step 1, or adjust the corresponding
items from “Adjusting Registered Products”.
 P. 57 Adjusting Registered Products
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
50
Basic Usage
Some types of metal detection heads have the following additional functions
■ HIS setting function

Use this function to enhance the
1 Basic Operations
detection probability after performing
auto-setting.
Select [HIS Setting] on the right screen

and press [Execute].
 P. 254 Using HIS Setting Function
Auto-limit-setting function
■
Setting the optimum evaluation limit

reduces false detection.
Select [Auto Limit Setting] on the right

screen and press [Execute].
 P. 259 Using Auto-Limit-Setting Function

■ FOCUS Setting
Set FOCUS to have a specific metal
detected after performing auto-setting.
Select [FOCUS Setting] on the right

screen and press [Execute].
 P. 262 Using FOCUS Setting Function
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
51
Basic Usage
> Checking Operations
Operations Check is a function to check if the equipment is operating correctly.
By making sure that the equipment is operating normally at the beginning and end of
1 Basic Operations
production of a day, or at the beginning and end of a lot, operational reliability can be
guaranteed indirectly.
There are two types of operational check functions: "Accuracy Check", which checks the
accuracy of the weighcell, and "Eval./RJ Confirmation", which checks for the correct
evaluation and rejection of products. When performing an Accuracy Check, set
"Permissible Accuracy" and "Accuracy Check Sample Count" in advance.
Smart Guide can also be used to check operations during the daily operations procedure.
 P. 211 Using Smart Guide
When "Ope. Check" is tapped in the "Menu"

screen, the screen on the right is displayed.
The displayed menu item varies depending
on the settings of the operation access
authority for the operation check.

Select "Accuracy check settings", set "Permissible Accuracy" and "Accuracy Check
Sample Count", and tap [Back].
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
This sets the permissible range for the measurement
accuracy.
When the measurement accuracy calculated from the
4 Maintenance
results of the measurement of the master product used

for the accuracy check is within the permissible
Permissible 1.00 g accuracy, the accuracy check results displays OK.
Accuracy (0.00 to 300.00 g) The measurement accuracy is calculated from the
following equation:
Measurement Accuracy =3 × Standard Deviation (s) +
Absolute Value of Bias
Bias = Master Product Weight - Average of Measured
Values (Xbar)
This sets the number of times to measure the master
product for an accuracy check.
Accuracy Check 20 times
Checking as many times as possible is recommended
5 Appendix
Sample Count (10 to 60 times)

because there may be deviations from the original
accuracy if the count is too low.
52
Basic Usage
Select "Common set for Ope. Check" and check the conditions specified.
For the settings at the end of an operation check, see the following table.
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Initial Setting:_)
When an operator feeds a product according to the
Eva/RJ Check Fix Route instructions on the screen, the operator can check
the device operation.
Print at end of
This sets on or off for the function that automatically
operation check
No prints out the operation check results at the end of an
(displayed only when operation check.
Yes
a printer is
* Only when using the printer option
connected)
Print stat data at No prints out the statistics data at the end of production
production end Yes when Smart Guide is used.
* Only when using the printer option
Store at end of No saves the operation check results to USB memory at
operation check Yes the end of an operation check.
* Only when using the USB memory option
Save stat data at No saves the statistics data to USB memory at the end
production end Yes of production when Smart Guide is used.
* Only when using the USB memory option

Select [EVAL/RJ･CHK Setting] to set and check the conditions. See the following table for
details.
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Eval./RJ Sample 2 to 10 Set the number of sample products used for an
Count (Initial value: 3) evaluation/rejection check.
Test Piece Size Φ0.0 Set the size of the Fe test piece used in the pattern
(Fe) (φ0.0 to 20.0) method for the operation check.
Test Piece Size Φ0.0 Set the size of the SUS test piece used in the pattern
4 Maintenance
(SUS) (φ0.0 to 20.0) method for the operation check.

Test Piece Size Φ0.0 Set the size of the non-Fe test piece used in the
(Non-Fe) (φ0.0 to 20.0) pattern method for the operation check.
OK
-NG Set the evaluation reference of sample products
used for evaluation/rejection check.
Eval. Ref. +NG
Set this parameter for the number of times (3 to 10)
MDNG to perform an operation check per product.
EXNG
Fe Set the type of sample test piece used for

evaluation/rejection check.
Test Piece Type SUS
5 Appendix
Set this parameter for the number of times (3 to 10)

Non-Fe to perform an operation check per product.
53
Basic Usage
■ Accuracy check
1 Select "Others" → "Accuracy Check",
check the product number and product
name, and tap [Next].
1 Basic Operations
2 Check the values of "Master Weight" and

"Permissible Accuracy", and tap [Next].
3 Tap the Start button.

4 Feed the master product.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
54
Basic Usage
Feed the master product for the number
of times specified in "Accuracy Check
Sample Count" and make sure that "OK"
is displayed. Tap [Completed] to return to
1 Basic Operations
the "Home" screen.
If "Failed" is displayed, check for any incorrect setting values. Tap the "Details" button
to display a list of information during the accuracy check.
■ Eva/RJ check
This function is used to check that the checkweigher is performing evaluation and
rejection correctly. For the Eva/RJ check, feed a product that is actually used on the
production line.
1 Tap "Others" and select "Eval./RJ

Confirmation".

2 Check the product number, tap [Next], and tap the Start button.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
55
Basic Usage
3 Follow the on-screen instructions to feed an OK product, +NG product, and -NG
product to the conveyor in this order.
Check that evaluation and rejection are performing correctly by feeding a PASS
1 Basic Operations
product, +NG product, and -NG product.

4 Check that "OK" is displayed. Tap

[Completed] to return to the operation
screen.
4 Maintenance
The rejector operates when it is connected. Be careful of its movement.

5 Appendix
56
Basic Usage
> Adjusting Registered Products
This is the procedure for modifying the
specified conditions for registered products.
1 Basic Operations
Detailed information omitted in the Product
Registration Navi can also be entered.
Select the “Menu” screen → “Adjust
registered products” → “Product settings”.
The screen to the right is displayed.
Set and adjust each item by referring to the tables below.
■ Product information
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Product information)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Sets the product name. This is the same as Disp
(Max. 14 characters
Type1 in the “Enter Product Information” screen.
in Japanese)
Product Name To register both Product name and Product name2,
(Max. 28 characters

you can change the display of them.
in alphabet)
Sets the product name. This is the same as Disp
Type2 in the “Enter Product Information” screen.
Product name 2 (Max. 28 characters)
This is available in blank.
Sets the Lot No. Displays the Lot No. on the
Lot No. (Max. 10 characters)
“Statistics” screen.
(1 to weigh conveyor
Product Length Sets the maximum length of the product.
length) mm 4 Maintenance
Product Length (L) Displays the value set for the product.
Product Width (W) Displays the value set for the product.
Product Height (H) Displays the value set for the product.
This is the parameter to recognize the product. To
register the part of the product bar code (5 to 12
Item code 0 ~ 999999999999
digits), changing the product is available.
When this is set 0, this parameter is unregistered.
5 Appendix
57
Basic Usage
■ Ins. condition set
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Ins. condition settings)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default: )
Reference Value Weight Range Sets the reference value for the product.
+Limit Displays the value set for the product.
-Limit Displays the value set for the product.
Tare Weight Displays the value set for the product.
Test Piece Size Φ0.0
Sets the test piece size Fe.
(Fe) (φ0.0 to 20.0)
Sets the test piece size SUS.

(SUS) (φ0.0 to 20.0)
Sets the test piece size Non-Fe.
(Non-Fe) (φ0.0 to 20.0)
Displays the evaluation method for the currently selected product. It is
determined at product registration.
* Read only
■ Evaluation method
Uses photocell to recognize the product for metal
Metal Check 1 (Box) evaluation and rejection.

■ When rejector is used
Can reject products one by one reliably.
Does not use photocell for product recognition.
Performs metal evaluation and rejection from the
Evaluation mode point where MDNG evaluation occurred. OK
Metal Check 2 (Bulk) products are not counted in statistics.
Metal Check 3 (Bulk) ■ When rejector is used
Metal Check 4 (Bulk) Rejection timing must be adjusted manually because
4 Maintenance
individual products are not recognized. Set rejection

time of 2 times or more of the product inspected
assuming that metal is attached to the head and/or
tail of the product.
Uses photocell to recognize the product for missing
Missing Check (Box) inspection and rejection.
■ When rejector is used
Can reject products one by one reliably.
5 Appendix
58
Basic Usage
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Set whether to perform the “Double Product
No Evaluation”. This item is set to “Yes” when checking a
Double product
1 Basic Operations
Yes missing product and you cannot change this setting.
evaluation
ALL When ALL is set, double-OK products are rejected as
Double Product.
If the evaluation value of a product fed through with
the bulk type setting (photocell is not used) is equal
MD Ultra under 0.3
to or lower than this parameter, it is not counted.
limit (0.0 to 10.0)
When data is retrieved in the histogram while the
product is not fed through, set a larger value.
Parameter to set the algorithm for signal processing.
The variation of work effect value may become larger
Algorithm 1 if 2 is set.
2
1 Set to stabilize the detection sensitivity.
2 Set to enhance the detection sensitivity.
This is the check method being used for the currently
selected product.
If a product is evaluated as NG in a

metal evaluation, the product being
fed is evaluated as NG.
Set this when the interval between
Metal check
fed products is 280 mm or less, when
(bulk)
the product cannot block the
photocell since it is too thin, or when
inspecting smaller products such as
candies.
Metal check (bulk) If a product is evaluated as NG in a
Metal check metal evaluation, the product being
Check method
(packaged) fed is evaluated as NG.
Missing
4 Maintenance
Metal check Set this when the interval between
(packaged) fed products is 280 mm or more,
when the products interrupt the
photocell, and when the products are
rejected individually.
Checks if accessories made of metal
(or coated with aluminum-evaporated
products) are missing. Set this when
Missing the interval between fed products is
280 mm or more, when the products
5 Appendix
interrupt the photocell, and when the

products are rejected individually.
59
Basic Usage
■ Set main conveyor speed
Set main conveyor speed
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → conveyor speed → Set main
conveyor speed)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Sets the CW Conveyor Speed.
Main Conveyor 50
Unable to change when approved parameter history
Speed (5 to 120 m/min)
reaches to maximum of 3000 items.
Set this parameter when a two speed conveyor
(optional) is used.
Conveyor Speed High Unable to change when approved parameter history

H/L Low reaches to maximum of 3000 items
High Main conveyor speed (high speed)
Low Main conveyor speed (low speed)
RJ conveyor spd. Settings

(Adjust registered products → Product settings → conveyor speed → RJ conveyor spd.
settings)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
RJ Conveyor 50
Sets the conveyor speed of the rejector.
Speed (5 to 120 m/min)
Auto Sets the RJ Speed automatic calculation to Enabled
Manual or Disabled.
* If RJ Conveyor The RJ Conveyor Speed is automatically calculated
Speed is set when the CW Conveyor Speed or product length is
manually when input while this parameter set to "Auto", or this
RJ conveyor spd. parameter is changed from “Manual" to "Auto".
settings this parameter
is “Auto”, this To perform automatic calculations, it is necessary to
parameter satisfy the following two conditions in addition to
4 Maintenance
automatically those above.

changes to ■ Either a flipper or dropout rejector is used.
“Manual”. ■ The conveyor speed for each product is used.
5 Appendix
60
Basic Usage
■ Measurement timing
Measurement timing set
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Measurement timing →
Measurement timing set)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
T0
Timer to acquire the MDNG signal (optional).
(MDNG valid (0 to 6000) ms
This timer is automatically set (parameter per product).
time)
Displays the time until the product moves onto the
T1 weigh conveyor. The value is calculated
(Measurement (30 to 6500) ms automatically when the product length is input.
delay time) Unable to change when approved parameter history
Displays the weigh cell stabilization time. The value
T2 is calculated automatically when the product length is
(Stabilization (40 to 6500) ms input.
time) Unable to change when approved parameter history
When this parameter is set to "Auto", (T1), (T2), and
Auto

Meas. timing Filter Time are automatically set when Product length
Manual
and CW Conveyor Speed are input. (Manual/Auto)
Sets measurement filter time. Filter Time is set
automatically by inputting the product length and
Auto Calculation
Filter Time conveyor speed.
Value
Sets whether or not to make automatic calculation of
T8. T8 is automatically calculated by inputting T1, T2,
Dbl. Prod Timer Auto
and product length when ”Auto” is set.
Setting Manual
4 Maintenance

Double-product detection time. The checkweigher
produces a double-product evaluation when the
Auto Calculation
T8 photocell is blocked by the next product within time
Value
(Dbl. Prod Timer) T8.
(10 to 12500 ms)
Time during which auto-zero setting cannot be
T5 Auto Calculation
performed.
(Zero-set disabled Value
5 Appendix
time) (0 to 60000 ms) Unable to change when approved parameter history

61
Basic Usage
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Sets the EXNG delay time (the shift time until CW
1 accepts the External NG signal). This is set when
EXNG Delay Time
conveyor speed by product and I/O input: EXNG
1 Basic Operations
(0 to 9999) ms
signal are used together.
Sets the EXNG2 delay time (the shift time until the
EXNG2 Delay 1 checkweigher accepts the External NG2 signal). This
Time (0 to 9999) ms is set when conveyor speed by product and I/O input:
EXNG2 signal are used together.
■ RJ timing
RJ timing settings
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → RJ timing → RJ timing settings)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
T3
Sets the rejector delay time (from the end of weighing
(Rejection delay (1 to 9999) ms
to the start of rejector operation).
time)
T4
Sets the RJ operation time (from start to end of RJ
(RJ operation (45 to 9999) ms
operation).
time)*1
This parameter is automatically set according to the

Auto specified RJ model type. When this is set to "Auto", T3
RJ Timing
manual and T4 are automatically set by inputting the RJ
Conveyor Speed.
specified RJ model type.
Pulses
RJ Output Type*2 Pulses The RJ output is kept for T4 time.
Hold
The current RJ output is kept until the next
Hold
RJ output.
Selects the +NG product processing.
* If Pass Stats is specified, +NG product data is not
included in the statistics.
Product is discharged in accordance with
4 Maintenance
NG the NG Product setting, or the conveyor

+NG Product NG stops.
(by prod.)*3 OK The product is not discharged and is fed
in the direction of PASS products. The
product is considered an +NG product in
OK Statistics Count. However, in the case of
+OVF, the product cannot be correctly
weighed, so it is considered an +NG
product.
Does not stop the conveyor when NG
NG product Nonstop
Nonstop product occurs.
process (by prod.)
5 Appendix
Stop Stop the conveyor when NG product

*3 Stop
occurs.
62
Basic Usage
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Set the rejection operation when T4 of the next
product overlaps during T4 (rejection hold time). Set
this item when using a rejector that has a low rejecting
1 Basic Operations
performance such as a shuttle rejector.
Performs the rejection operation after T3
Evaluate
Rejection output Evaluate Priority (Rejection delay time) according to the
control*4 Priority latest evaluation result.
NG Priority
Extends the rejection operation in the NG
NG direction when the first product is
evaluated as NG and the next product is
Priority evaluated as OK. The operation is
extended for T4 of the next product.
*1
When a product with a large metal effect value such as aluminum tape is fed,
MDNG evaluation is held depending on the conveyor speed set, and no rejection
can be done during the hold time.
Main conveyor speed [m/min] Hold time [sec]
9 or less 10.0
10 to 19 6.5
20 to 38 4.0

39 or more 3.0
*2 The default of RJ Output Type depends on the type of Rejector.
*3 “+NG Product” and “NG product process” is displayed when “operation / by prod.” Is
set to “by prod.”.
*4 This parameter is invalid and hidden when RJ Shift by Rank is enabled, when the
rejection output type is set to "Hold” or when the product is “Bulk Type”.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
63
Basic Usage
■ Detection sensitivity
Adjust detection sensitivity
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Det. Sens. → Detection sens. settings)
1 Basic Operations
Detection sens. settings
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Eval. Limit
Magnification (Fe)
Eval. Limit
Magnification (SUS)
This parameter sets the evaluation limit

magnification that is automatically set when the
Eval. Limit auto setting of the metal contamination check
finishes.
Magnification (ML1)
5.0 The estimated detection sensitivity displayed
after auto setting is the value for the evaluation
(0.1 to 19.0) limit magnification set by this parameter.
Eval. Limit
Magnification (ML2) Regarding the “Evaluation limit magnification
(Fe)” and “Evaluation limit magnification
(SUS)”, M6-h is used only when checking a
Eval. Limit missing product.
Magnification (ML3)
Eval. Limit
Magnification (ML4)
* Read only This is the value of the estimated detection

Est. Sens (Fe)
sensitivity (Fe) displayed after auto setting.
* Read only This is the value of the estimated detection
Est. Sens (SUS)
sensitivity (SUS) displayed after auto setting.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
64
Basic Usage
■ Test piece control sensitivity
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Set test piece ctl sense)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default: )
Φ0.0 Set the size of the Fe test piece for the control
Test Piece Size
sensitivity (the value indicating the size of the test
(Fe) (φ0.0 to 20.0) piece used as the detection reference).
Φ0.0 Set the size of the SUS test piece for the control
Test Piece Size
(SUS) (φ0.0 to 20.0) piece used as the detection reference).
Φ0.0 Set the size of the Non-Fe test piece for the control
Test Piece Size
(Non-Fe) (φ0.0 to 20.0) piece used as the detection reference).
■ Statistic product settings
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Statistic product settings)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Batch Cycle Qty. (1 to 999999) Sets the cycle (count) of the production batch.
Batch time (1 to 14,440 minutes) Sets the cycle (time) of the production batch.
Sets the upper limit of Xbar (mean value) in the "X-R"

(-9999.99 screen and "X-s" screen.
X-bar +limit
to +9999.99 g)
This is used for management purposes.
Sets the lower limit of Xbar (mean value) in the "X-R"
(-9999.99 screen and "X-s" screen.
X-bar -limit
to +9999.99 g)
This is used for management purposes.
These parameters are the frequency distribution
Histogram Scale (0.01 to +9999.99) pitch and frequency distribution -NG limit for the
“Histogram” screen used to see a detailed view of the
boundary between PASS and NG products.
Auto-setting is performed when the reference value
and +NG and -NG limits are input. Set these
parameters manually when you want to change the
Histogram Lower (-9999.99
auto-set values. When the settings are changed
4 Maintenance
Limit to +9999.99)
during operation, the correct frequency distribution
results are not obtained if the statistics are not
cleared.
This sets the upper limit for inclusion in the statistics.
Valid +Limit (-9999.99
Weights outside the set limit range are excluded from
(Statistics) to +9999.99 g)
the statistics. Rejection is not affected by this setting.
This sets the lower limit for inclusion in the statistics.
Weights outside the set limit range are excluded from
Valid -Limit (-9999.99 the statistics. Rejection is not affected by this setting.
(Statistics) to +9999.99 g) When both Valid +Limit and Valid -Limit are set to 0,
inclusion in the statistics is not limited and all data is
included in the statistics.
5 Appendix
(-9999.99 This is the upper limit of R (range) for the "X-R"

R +Limit
to +9999.99 g) screen and "X-s" screen.
65
Basic Usage
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
(-9999.99 This is the upper limit of s (standard deviation) for the
s +Limit
to +9999.99 g) "X-R" screen and "X-s" screen.
1 Basic Operations
You can set whether to perform the automatic

calculation.
The automatic calculation value is calculated using the
following formula.
Histogram scale = (Upper limit value - Lower limit
value + 0.01)/13
Histogram lower limit = Standard value + Lower limit
value - Histogram scale
* When “Decimal Point” is “.00”
Histogram auto No Does not calculate the histogram scale
setting
Yes and histogram lower limit even when

No
either of the standard value, lower limit
value, and upper limit value is changed.
Calculates the histogram scale and
histogram lower limit every time either of
the standard value, lower limit value, and
Yes upper limit value is changed. Changes the
histogram auto setting to “No” when the
histogram scale or histogram lower limit is
manually set.
■ Conveyor mode
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Conveyor Mode)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
No Perform weight evaluation.
Yes Set when weight evaluation is not to be performed.
CW Conveyor Set when weight evaluation, MDNG (metal NG)
Mode Yes evaluation, and EXNG (external NG) evaluation are not
(Force Motor ON) to be performed. This setting is also effective when an
extremely long product, etc., is to be forcibly conveyed.
4 Maintenance
MD Conveyor No Sets when use the conveyor without metal

Mode Yes contamination detection.
 P. 222 Using Conveyor Mode

5 Appendix
66
Basic Usage
■ Metal Detector
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Metal Detector)
Fe Side setting
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Set whether to save the results of tracking the Fe phase
by the auto tracking function.
Clears the tracking phase when the power
Not Save is turned off, the conveyor stops, or the auto
setting is performed.
Save
Fe: Tracking data Save the tracking phase when the conveyor
Not Save
stops. The auto tracking function starts at
this time.
Save
Note that the auto tracking data is cleared
when the power is turned off or the auto
Normally, you do not have to change this parameter
50
Fe: S1 because the metal detector automatically sets the
(0 to 250)
optimum value.

0
Fe: S2 because the metal detector automatically sets the
(0 to 1000000)
optimum value.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
67
Basic Usage
SUS Side setting
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
1 Basic Operations
Set whether to save the results of tracking the SUS

phase by the auto tracking function.
Clears the tracking phase when the power is
Not Save turned off, the conveyor stops, or the auto
SUS: Save
Tracking data Not Save Save the tracking phase when the conveyor
this time.
Save

50
SUS: S1 because the metal detector automatically sets the
(0 to 250)
optimum value.
0
SUS: S2 because the metal detector automatically sets the
(0 to 1000000)
optimum value.
■ Product check
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Product check)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Set whether to perform a product check.
No Does not perform a product check.
Performs a product check when the
conveyor starts running first after
4 Maintenance
the power is turned on or the

No Standard product is changed. Note that a
product check is not performed
Default Phase Correction Standard
when the product is changed while
Each
the conveyor is running.
Always performs a product check
when the conveyor starts running.
Each * This setting cannot be specified
when a smart guide is being
used.
5 Appendix
Set the allowable range of the phase shifting

Default Phase Correction 0.5° when multiple master products are fed through
Range (0.1 to 10.0°) during a product check. Increasing the value
reduces the accuracy.
68
Basic Usage
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
1 Set the number of master products fed through

Default Phase Correction
during a product check. Increasing the value
Count (1 to 5) stabilizes checking.
1 Basic Operations
6.0° Set the range of the phase shifting of master
Default Phase Correction
products fed through during a product check.
Limit (0.1 to 10.0°) Increasing the value reduces the accuracy.
Prod. Detection level (Fe)
Prod. Detection level (SUS)

Set the tracking level (Fe) in a product check for
Prod. Detection level (ML1) bulk settings. The set value is a multiple of the
0.80 product effect value (Imax) for auto-settings.
Prod. Detection level (ML2) (0.01 to 1.00) * If a product check does not finish even after a
product has been fed through, specify a
smaller value for this setting.
Prod. Detection level (ML3)
Prod. Detection level (ML4)
 P. 235 Correcting the Phase based on Characteristic Change (Product check function)
■ HIS setting details

(Adjust registered products → Product settings → HIS setting details)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Algorithm auto
Yes Sets the algorithm automatically based on the results
selection
No of HIS settings when “Yes” is set.
Sets the S1 automatically based on the results of

S1 auto selection Yes HIS settings when “Yes” is set. This parameter is
No automatically set to “No” if Algorithm auto selection is 4 Maintenance
set to “No”.
Fe:FNo
This is the optimum processing method determined
SUS:FNo * Read only
based on the result of the HIS setting.
■ FOCUS setting details

(Adjust registered products → Product settings → FOCUS setting details)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
5 Appendix
Hi freq. : FSNo.2 This is the optimum processing method determined

* Read only
Lo freq. : FSNo.2 based on the result of the FOCUS setting.
69
Basic Usage
■ Tracking conditions
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Tracking conditions)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default: )
This parameter sets parameters related to auto tracking
from the characteristics during the production.
OFF When measuring a product that requires auto-tracking
Standard function, the auto-tracking function is automatically
Temp Chg1 enabled according to the auto-setting. But if the status of
Temp Chg2 the product changes rapidly, the auto-tracking function
Temp Chg3 might not be enabled with the parameters set by the
Var-1 auto-setting. To prevent this problem from occurring, this
parameter can be used to set the tracking parameter for
Var-2 supporting rapid changes. The settings Temp Chg1 to
Tracking Type Var-3 Temp Chg3 and Var-1 to Var-3 can be set after the
auto-setting is performed without a need of performing
the auto-setting again.
It is also possible to disable the auto-tracking function
forcibly.
Sets how to perform auto-tracking.
OFF
OFF Auto-tracking is not performed.
Standard1
Standard Auto-tracking is performed in accordance
1 with the product characteristics.
Set whether to save the results of tracking the Fe

Not
is turned off, the conveyor stops, or the auto
Save setting is performed.
Fe: Tracking data Save
Not Save Save the tracking phase when the conveyor
this time.
Save
Set whether to save the results of tracking the SUS
4 Maintenance

Not
is turned off, the conveyor stops, or the auto
SUS: Save setting is performed.
Tracking data Save/Not Save
Save the tracking phase when the conveyor
this time.
Save
5 Appendix
Auto-tracking function is automatically set based on the results of auto-setting.

Setting the auto-tracking function ON/OFF requires special knowledge. Ask Anritsu or its
distributor for service to perform the setting.
70
Basic Usage
■ Full detection
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Full Detection)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default: )
0 This is used for detecting when the rejected-products

BoxFull Qty. box is full. This sets the permissible count from when full
(0 to 9999) is detected until the conveyor is stopped.
 P. 180 Full detection
■ NG Rate
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → NG Rate: NG)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Sets the NG rate batch.
100 When the rate in NG rate batch exceeds the set value
NG Rate Batch
(1 to 100) (NG rate) during NG rate evaluation, the NG Rate alarm
is output.
Sets the rate for NG Rate.
0
NG Rate Alarm When the rate in NG rate batch exceeds the set value,
(1 to 100%)

the NG Rate alarm is output.
 P. 182 NG rate
■ Counter preset
(Adjust registered products → Product settings → Counter preset)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
0
Counter Preset Sets the count for the counter preset.
(0 to 999999) 4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
71
Basic Usage
■ RJ operation adjustment
(Adjust registered products → RJ operation adjustment → RJ Parameter table)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default: )
RJ Conveyor
(5 to 120 m/min) Set conveyor speed of rejector.
Speed
Sets the RJ Speed automatic calculation to Enabled or
Auto
Disabled.
manual
The RJ Conveyor Speed is automatically calculated
* If RJ Conveyor
Speed is set when the CW Conveyor Speed or product length is input
manually while this parameter set to "Auto", or this parameter is
RJ conveyor spd.
when this changed from “Manual" to "Auto".
settings parameter is
“Auto”, this To perform automatic calculations, it is necessary to
parameter satisfy the following two conditions in addition to those
automatically above.
changes to ▪ Either a flipper or dropout rejector is used
“Manual”.
▪ The conveyor speed for each product is used.
T3
Sets the reject delay time (from the end of weighing to
(Rejection delay (1 to 9999 ms)
the start of rejector operation).
time)
T4
Sets the RJ operation time (from start to end of RJ
(RJ operation (45 to 9999 ms)
operation).
time)
Auto specified RJ model type. When this is set to "Auto", T3
RJ Timing
manual and T4 are automatically set by inputting the RJ
Conveyor Speed.
specified RJ model type.
Pulses
RJ Output Type* Pulses The RJ output is kept for T4 time.
Hold
The current RJ output is kept until the next RJ
4 Maintenance
Hold
output.
* The default of RJ Output Type depends on the type of Rejector.
■ Auto-set
(Adjust registered products → Auto-set)
Readjust the sensitivity setting if the sensitivity decreases due to a change in product
properties such as temperature, water content, and shape, which causes a false
detection.
5 Appendix
72
Basic Usage
> Handling Errors and Alarms
When the equipment detects any abnormality, an error or alarm message is displayed on
the screen.
1 Basic Operations
The date and time when the error occurred, model name, serial number, and a detailed
description of an error appears automatically, and tapping the [Help] button while
an alarm message is displayed makes a detailed description appear. If there are multiple
possible measures, they can be viewed sequentially by tapping the [Others] button. When
the buzzer alarm is enabled ( P. 188 Setting Signal Tower and Buzzer), it can be
stopped by tapping the [No sound] button.
Check the description and act according to the description. Tap the [Close] button and tap
the Reset button to cancel the display.
Operations cannot continue until the system recovers the error.
Operation can continue even when an alarm message is displayed. The equipment can
be stopped when an alarm is displayed by the parameter settings. Perform settings
according to the production line.
Reset button
When the "Contact the SE" message is

displayed, contact the SE and report the
status when the error occurred, "Error No.",
"Model", and "SN".
An example of error display
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
73
Basic Usage
■ Checking the error or alarm occurrence status
The types and numbers of errors or alarms that have occurred are listed.
This function is used for a daily check of the production status of device status during or
1 Basic Operations
after production.
Note that you may be asked to describe the message displayed on the screen when
making a customer support inquiry.
1 Select [?] → [Alarm occurrence status].
Tap [Latest date] or [Counts] to sort the
list in the order of date or number of
occurrences.
2 Select one of the errors or alarms and tap

[Date/Time] to narrow down the list
based on the event that triggered the
selected error or alarm and display the
operation history. A list of the occurrence
dates can also be checked.
Tap [Expanded] to cancel the

narrowed-down display and return to the
normal operation history display.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
74
Basic Usage
> If NG frequently occurs
If the metal detector frequently detects metal incorrectly, you can check what might be
causing the incorrect detection by following the guidance.
1 Basic Operations
1 Select [?] → [If NG frequently occurs...].
2 Select the NG type and then tap [Next].
3 Tap [Next].

Note that if your access
level is Administrator Level or higher and
you tap [Environment Diagnosis], you
can launch a function to narrow down the
cause of the incorrect detections.(
P.76 Investigating the cause of incorrect
detections).
4 Maintenance
4 Check the device or product status
according to the descriptions on the
screen.
Tap [Next].
Note that if your access

level is Administrator Level or higher and
you tap [Frequency change], you can
launch the function to change the device
5 Appendix
settings depending on the surrounding

environment on the screen.
75
Basic Usage
5 Tap [Next] to check the contents sequentially.
6 Tap [Completed].
1 Basic Operations
> Investigating the cause of incorrect detections

If the metal detector frequently detects metal incorrectly, the cause of the incorrect
detections can be narrowed down.
1 Select [?] → [If NG frequently occurs...]

→ [Metal NG occurs], and then tap
[Environment Diagnosis]. To perform this
operation, your access level must be

Administrator Level or higher.
2 Tap [Next].
This function automatically controls the
operation (on/off) of the conveyor. Do not
perform this operation during production
or while products remain on the
4 Maintenance
conveyor.
3 Check the status of the metal detector. It

takes about two minutes for the result to
be displayed.
If you tap [Cancel], the inspection will be

canceled and the conveyor will stop if it is
5 Appendix
operating.
76
Basic Usage
4 Display the inspection results.
Tap [Details] to confirm the possible
causes.
1 Basic Operations
If the problem persists or occurs again
later, contact your customer support.
5 Tap [Next].
By saving the data here, you can output
the inspection results if requested by
your customer support.
 P. 319 Outputting support data
6 Tap [Completed].

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
77
Basic Usage
List of inspection results
SN-00 There is no anomaly on Metal detector operation.

No anomalies If false detection occurs, consider following causes.
1 Basic Operations
▪ Product characteristics such as temperature, moisture, sodium

contents and shape is changing.
▪ Product flow is not stable.
▪ Operation is unstable due to deterioration or machine failure.
If problem persists, Call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
SN-02 Sharing same power source between MD and other peripheral devices
Noise from such as packaging or filling machine can generate influential noise and
power source could cause false detection.
or other Separate the power source or change one plug to different nearby
devices outlet.
False detection may occur by electromagnetic noise generated from a
device with an inverter.
Change carrier frequency of an inverter by following the device
operation manual.
Peripheral MD may affect and cause false detection.
Need to arrange peripheral devices around or change frequency.
Call Anritsu or its distributor for service.

Operation may be unstable due to electrical fault or aged deterioration.
SN-03 False detection may occur due to vibration from the floor or peripheral
Noise from devices.
vibration or ▪ Ensure to lock legs of frame.
moving metal ▪ Leave little gap between adjacent conveyor and main conveyor.
False detection may occur due to metal objects such as metal door/gate
creating influential noise by opening and closing motion.
4 Maintenance
Take measure to keep the objects away. If it does not solve a problem,
5 Appendix
78
Basic Usage
SN-04 False detection may occur due to filthy conveyor belt.
Noise from Clean the conveyor belt. There may be residue left on the belt.
conveyor ( P.283 Cleaning)
movement Any fray or scratch found, the belt should be replaced.
1 Basic Operations
( P.295 Removing the Conveyor Belt/Roller,  P.306 Removing the
Conveyor Belt)
When conveyor belt has any contact to MD aperture, it would lead to
possible false detection.
Ensure to keep the conveyor belt not to come in contact with MD
aperture.
( P.298 Adjusting Belt Alignment,  P.308 Adjusting Belt Alignment,)
Roller deformation faulty motor would generate influential noise and
cause false detection.
Check any abnormality on exterior of conveyor unit. Call Anritsu or its
distributor for service.
* The system can easily be influenced by external noise if the evaluation limit
magnification value is too low. If the test piece can be detected with sufficient margin,
increase the evaluation limit magnification value or perform auto-setting again.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
79
Daily Operation Procedure
Warning (1) In an emergency, cut the power to the Turn leftwards

ON
checkweigher by turning the power switch
leftwards
OFF
1 Basic Operations
Power switch
If the optional Emergency Stop Switch is Press to stop CW
fitted, press it to stop the checkweigher in an in an emergency
emergency.
An alarm message (A361) is displayed on the
screen.
Releasing Emergency Stop Switch and recovery Release lock

method
(a) Release Emergency Stop Switch
Turn the head of the switch in the marked
direction.
(b) Use the Reset button to reset the alarm.
Tap the Reset // button displayed on the
screen.
(c) Tap the Stop button to stop the
checkweigher.
Address the cause of the emergency stop,
remove the product on the checkweigher
conveyors and rejector, and restart

operations.
(2) For safety, NEVER touch any moving part during operation.
(3) For safety, NEVER operate the checkweigher when it is partly
disassembled.
(4) For safety, ALWAYS confirm that the operator is not touching any
moving part before starting the checkweigher by remote control.
Using Smart Guide

Smart Guide makes the checkweigher display on-screen instructions to follow for daily
4 Maintenance
operations to prevent incorrect operations or the omission of steps. Smart Guide is set at
factory shipment. You can also perform operations without following the Smart Guide.
To make Smart Guide not to use

Select "Menu" → "Maint. and Setting" → "Functions" → "Smart guide settings". Select
"No" in "Input" and tap [OK].
5 Appendix
80
Cautions when Smart Guide is not used

Before starting production, check the zero point and sensitivity.
(1) Zero point check
1 Basic Operations
Press the [Zero Set] button when nothing is on the weigh conveyor and make sure
that the weight display is zero. If any tare value is set, the setting value is shown as a
negative number.
(2) Sensitivity check
Place the reference weight on the weigh conveyor and make sure that the correct weight is
displayed.
The following describes the standard flow of operations when using Smart Guide.
1 Perform an inspection before starting
operations.
■ Checking for contact with other devices
Make sure that the checkweigher is not in contact with the upstream/downstream
conveyors or peripheral devices.
■ Cleaning the conveyor and weigh unit

Clean the checkweigher for correct measurement and equipment maintenance.
■ Checking the conveyor belt
Replace the belt if there is any fraying.
2 Turn the power on.

Press "Start" and follow the instructions
displayed on the screen.
 P. 32 Turning On/Off Power

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
81
3 Perform an inspection and check before
starting production.
Perform the following operations by
following the on-screen instructions.
1 Basic Operations
■ Selecting an access level

Press "Select an access level" and set it
according to the operation to be
performed.
 P. 33 Changing Access Level

■ Selecting the manufacture date and

manufacture unit
Tap [Select Manufacture Date] and
specify the date on which production will
be performed and the production unit.
■ Inspection before starting production

When the "Start inspection" is tapped,

the inspection items are displayed on the
screen. Confirm the items and tap [Yes].
Tap [Next] to proceed to product
selection.
Screen with Access Level set to 2

■ Selecting a product
Tap "Select the product", check and select
the target product, and tap "Prod. Chg.".
4 Maintenance
The screen on the right is displayed.

Check the product name and tap [Next].
To register a new product, tap [Register
product] and set it.
[Next] is not enabled until the product registration completes (product parameter setting, dynamic
correction, and auto-setting must be finished).
5 Appendix
82
■ Adjusting detection sensitivity
To adjust the detection sensitivity of metal detector, press [Adjust detection
sensitivity ].
1 Basic Operations
P. 237 Changing the Metal Detection Sensitivity
■ Operation check before production

Tap [Next] to perform an operation check
before production. Press the Start button
and feed an OK product, +NG product,
and -NG product in this order.
When the operations above are complete,
the screen on the right is displayed, and
production can be started.
4 Start production.

4 Maintenance
Before starting the conveyors, remove any products that are on the infeed, weigh, or
downstream conveyors. If operation is started while products are on the conveyors, weighing
and rejection may not perform correctly.
When [Next] is tapped, the screen on the

right is displayed. Tap the Start button to
start production.
5 Appendix
83
5 Perform a check at production completion.
When 1 of "Display" is selected while
operation is stopped, the screen on the
right is displayed.
1 Basic Operations
To finish, tap [Next] to perform an

operation check at production completion.
Follow the on-screen instructions to

perform the operation check that was
performed before starting production
again.
If the operation check is successful,

operation during production can be
determined as normal.
Check that "OK" is displayed, and tap

[Next].
6 Perform the next production.

To perform production of another product,
select "Proceed with the next prod".
Otherwise, select "Execute end process".
7 Execute end process.

When "Execute end process" is selected
4 Maintenance
in the screen above, the screen on the

right is displayed.
Tap "Start inspection" and perform

inspection by following the on-screen
instructions.
5 Appendix
84
After the inspection is complete, the following screen is displayed. Tap [Complete
current process].
1 Basic Operations
Click [Close] in the page above to finish.
After turning off the power, be sure to:
■ Clean the weigh unit.
■ Clean the belt top and back surfaces.
■ Clean the checkweigher.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
85
This chapter describes the operations according to the purpose.
Screen Hierarchy 87
Viewing Measurement Data 90
Calibrating/Adjusting Equipment 96
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data 104
Other Settings and Adjustments 160
Options and Peripheral Devices 188
Other Useful Functions 211
86
Screen Hierarchy
Screen Hierarchy
The screen system of this checkweigher is as follows.

Register new product Adjust RJ timing
Switch the product Sensitivity Adjustment
Registering a New Product Accuracy check settings
1 Basic Operations
Evaluation & RJ check settings
Changing Product settings
Adjust registered products Product settings *1
Checking Operations
RJ operation adjustment *2
MD sensitivity adjustment
Fine Adjustment
Auto-set
HIS Setting
Smart guide
Auto Limit Setting
Display product list FOCUS Setting
General
Control Panel Access Level Change

Statis Password Change
Display settings
Display Histogram Key touch operation
Date setting
Show X-bar R/s Menu Regional and Language
Version Information
Enlarge bar Master information **
Home display settings *3
Date Setting
Zoom Weight
Access level change Accuracy Check
Operation Check
？(Help) Evaluation/RJ Confirmation
Custom
Check Mode
Common set for Ope. check
Individual data
Accuracy check settings

Evaluation & RJ check settings
Operation check
Stats Control Basic Statistics Setting
Eva/RJ Confirmation
Clear Statistics
Accuracy Check
Alarm occurrence status
Check Mode History
Operation History
Parameter History
Production Control
NG History
Change Product No.
Alarm History
Clear Statistics
Operation Check History
Save to USB memory
USB memory/printer Save to USB memory
Output to printer
Output to printer
Print Statistics
Load USB memory 4 Maintenance
Set USB memory store
Settings/Adjustment
Printer output settings
Timing Adjustment
Saving data for service tech.
Sensitivity Correction Language
Installation check *4
Fine Adjustment Maintenance and setting
Unit/connected device set *5
Product effect monitor
Functions *6
Noise monitor
Security and Rules *7
Auto-set
Unit monitoring *8
Sensitivity Adjustment
** Not available Device Information *9
Maintenance Information *10
5 Appendix
87
Screen Hierarchy
*1
Product information
Product settings
Inspection condition set
1 Basic Operations
Conveyor speed Set main conveyor speed

RJ Conveyor Spd. Setting
Measurement timing Timing Adjustment

Measurement timing setting
RJ Timing Adjust RJ timing

RJ Timing Setting
Detection Sensitivity Sensitivity Adjustment

Sensitivity Adjustment 2
Set testpiece ctl. sense
Detection sensitivity settings
Statistic product settings
Conveyor Mode
Metal Detector Fe Side setting

SUS Side setting
Product check
HIS setting details
FOCUS Setting details
Tracking conditions
Full detection
NG Rate
Counter Preset
Multi range
*2 *6
RJ operation adjustment Adjust RJ timing
Functions Photocell monitoring
RJ Parameter table
Smart guide settings
*3 Full detection
Home display settings Home screen disp. sel. NG Rate
Ope. Check menu sel. Counter preset
Prod. Control menu sel. Product check
Set/Adj menu sel Auto Limit Setting
Other Menu sel. Multi range
Custom display screen settings
4 Maintenance
Basic screen disp. settings
*4 *7
Installation check Confirmation at installation Security and rules Set Access Authority
Set RJ direction Password Change
Register new product. User management settings **
MD Head Inspection Policy setting list
Installation check setting Common/By product
** Not available Caution for handlong
Noise avoidance setting
5 Appendix
88
Screen Hierarchy
*5
Unit/connected device set
Weighcell Sensitivity Correction
Zero-set
Weighcell settings
1 Basic Operations
Conveyor Set main conveyor
RJ conveyor settings
Set other conveyor
Rejector Common set of RJ

RJ direction settings
I/O output settings
IO timing adjustment
Signal tower / Buzzer Signal tower common settings

Signal tower settings
I/O output settings
Printer Printer Settings

USB Memory Set USB Memory store
General I/O connection I/O input settings

I/O output settings
IO input setting (Details)
IO output setting (Details)

EXT-I/O connect setting
Serial connection Serial1 settings

Serial2(A) settings
Serial3(B) settings
Network connection Network Common settings

Communication content settings
Time synchronization settings
NTP time acquisition
Network status
Version upgrade
*8
Unit monitoring Timing Adjustment
Product effect monitor
4 Maintenance
Noise monitor
*9
Device Information Version Information

Device Information settings
*10
Maintenance Information User Information

5 Appendix
89
Viewing Measurement Data
> Basic display

Daily operation can be made with a single
touch of the screen.
1 Basic Operations
> General
In the General screen, the measured value,

reference value, lower limit, upper limit, tare
weight (if any), inspection total count and
OK/NG product counts of the product are
displayed.
See “Description of Operation screen” (P. 16) for details about the metal detecting level
bar and the icon displayed under the measured value.

Item Explanation
Ref. Val. Weight of the product registered as the master product in Product settings.
Value set as the lower limit of PASS products (the difference from the
-Limit
reference value).
Value set as the upper limit of PASS products (the difference from the
+Limit
reference value).
Tare Sets the weight of the container, bag, or box for tare measurement.
Total Displays the total count including OK and NG products.
OK Displays the number of PASS products.
NG Displays the number of products other than PASS.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
90
> Statistics
If the target data for statistics is set to [ALL],
the total count and OK, NG products, and
1 Basic Operations
double product count and percentage (%)
are displayed in the left side of the Statis
screen. In the right side of the screen, the
accumulated total weight, mean value
(X-bar), standard deviation (s), randomness
(R), maximum value (Max) and minimum
value (Min) are displayed.
To switch the target data for statistics, press the [ALL] button (all products including NG
products) and [Pass] button (PASS products only) in the lower right part of the screen.
Item Explanation
Total Current total count of all products since statistics last cleared
Current total count and percentage of all PASS products since statistics last
OK
cleared
-NG Current total count and percentage of all -NG products since statistics last cleared
+NG Current total count and percentage of all +NG products since statistics last cleared
Current total count and percentage of all MDNG products is detected since
MDNG

statistics last cleared
Current total count and percentage of all double products since statistics last
D-Prod.
cleared
Current total count and percentage of all external NG products since statistics last
EXNG
cleared.
EXNG2 Same as EXNG. Use this when multiple external NG inputs are used.
Lot No. Lot number of the current product
Indicates the start time (time when production started after statistics last cleared).
St. Time
(Year/Month/Day Hour:Minute:Second)
Total.W Current total weight of all products since statistics last cleared
X bar Current mean weight since statistics last cleared
s Current standard deviation of weighed products since statistics last cleared
4 Maintenance
R Displays |Max - Min|.

Max Current max weight of weighed products since statistics last cleared
Min Current min weight of weighed products since statistics last cleared
5 Appendix
91
> Histogram
The measurement results from the statistics
clear to the present are displayed in the
1 Basic Operations
histogram by the preset scale. The vertical

axis indicates the data count, and the
horizontal axis shows the weight value.
In the right side of the screen, the mean value
(X-bar), standard deviation (s), randomness
(R), maximum, and minimum are displayed.
[ALL] (all products including NG products) or [Pass] (PASS products only) can be selected as
target data for statistics.
Also, the histogram can be displayed in the [Upright] or [Side] orientation.

Item Explanation
X bar Current mean weight since statistics last cleared.
s Current standard deviation of weighed products since statistics last cleared.
R Displays |Max - Min|.
Max Current max weight since statistics last cleared.
Min Current min weight since statistics last cleared.
Weight Measured weight of the product.
> X-bar R/s

The values displayed in the right side of the
graph are the mean values of X-bar, R, and s
from the statistics clear to the present time.
The changes of the mean value (X-bar),
randomness width (R), and standard
deviation (s) are displayed in graphs by the
preset cycle (batch cycle quantity or time).
4 Maintenance
The standard deviation and randomness

width can be switched by pressing [R]/[s]
below the graph.
[ALL] (all products including NG products) or [Pass] (PASS products only) can be selected
as target data for statistics.
The meanings of the words displayed on the graph are as follows. UCL and LCL are used
as guidelines for control of production. The settings can be specified by selecting "Adjust
registered products"  "Product settings"  "Statistic Product Settings" in the "Menu"
5 Appendix
screen.
92
X-bar UCL (Upper Control Limit, X-bar +Limit, yellow line)
Mean upper limit value. It is automatically calculated as the reference value
plus UCL (X-bar +Limit).
It is set in "UCL (X-bar +Limit)" in the "Statistic product settings" screen.
1 Basic Operations
CL (Center Line, blue line)
Mean weight value for the batch.
LCL (Lower Control Limit, X-bar -Limit, red line)
Mean lower limit value. It is automatically calculated as the reference value
minus LCL (X-bar -Limit).
It is set in "LCL (X-bar -Limit)" in the "Statistic product settings" screen.
s UCL (Upper Control Limit, yellow line)
Upper limit of standard deviation. It is set in "s +Limit" in the "Statistic product
settings" screen.
Mean standard deviation (or randomness width) of the batch.
R UCL (Upper Control Limit, yellow line)
Upper limit of randomness. It is set in "R +Limit" in the "Statistic product
settings" screen.

Mean randomness width of the batch.
Cycle Count that is set as a batch.
To specify Cycle with Time instead of Count, select the "Menu" screen 
"Stats Control"  "Basic Statistics Setting"  "Batch Cycle Unit" and press
[Input], and then select "Time”.
> Enlarged bar

In the “Enlarge bar” screen, the weight data 4 Maintenance
of the individual products on the conveyor is
displayed with a bar and a numeric value.
The enlarged display of the bar enables to
recognize the weight dispersion with ease.
5 Appendix
93
> Zoom Weight Disp.
The graph is excluded from the weight
display screen, and the measured value is
1 Basic Operations
enlarged in the display.

In the lower left part of the screen, the
capacity (count/min) during operation is
displayed in real-time. It becomes 0 when
operation stops.
"Max.” indicates the maximum capacity recorded during production. It becomes 0 when
[Clear] is pressed or the power is turned off.
"Max. cap”. indicates the maximum capacity of this checkweigher regardless of the
production data.
In the lower right part of the screen, the production total, OK product count, and NG
product count from the statistics clear up to the present time are displayed.
> Custom Disp.

Up to two items which are pre-selected,
among “ All Prod.”, “OK product count”,
“Weight”, “Perf. Value” and “W. mean value”

can be displayed.
In the "Menu" screen, select "Control Panel"
 "Home display settings"  "Custom
display screen settings" and press [Input],
then select the items(s) to be displayed.
■ Access level 2 or higher is required to set.
■ When “No” is selected at “Display area 2”, the lower half part of the display will be
blank.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
94
> Individual Disp.
The evaluation results and each weight
value of the last 31 products are displayed in
1 Basic Operations
sequence. The weight value surrounded with
a yellow frame is the latest one.
The statistics appeared at the bottom of the

screen are from the data currently displayed
on the screen only.
When [Stop] at the bottom right of the screen
is pressed, update of display is stopped.
Press [Restart] to resume update.
Press [Clear] to delete the display of data
and statistics.
Update of display is stopped

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
95
Calibrating/Adjusting Equipment
> Sensitivity Correction

If the weight value displayed in the screen is different from the known value of the weight
or master product, perform sensitivity correction.
1 Basic Operations
This function is disabled after machine sealing.
1 When operation is stopped, press

"Others.", and then in the following
display screen, select "Sensitivity
Correction”.
2 When the "Start Sensitivity Correction"

screen is displayed, press "Next". Follow
the instructions to perform sensitivity
correction.
Enter the Mass of Master Weight. To

perform sensitivity correction, use the
same weight displayed value in the
“Weight Range”.
If there is no weight, prepare a substitute
that is close to the “Weight Range”, and
4 Maintenance
measure the weight using a static scale

in advance.
Entering the value, press [Next] to

perform sensitivity correction.
"Weight Range" displays the upper limit of the weight range.

5 Appendix
96
Perform the operations in Step 1 through
Step 3 by following the on-screen
instructions.
1 Basic Operations
When placing the weight on the weigh
conveyor, place it at the center.
"Level" below the weight display indicates the percentage in the weight capture range.
When sensitivity correction is performed
correctly, the following screen will be
displayed.
Press [Completed] to return to the

"General" screen.
If an error or an alarm message is

displayed, refer to "Error Messages and

Solutions" and perform the appropriate
actions, and then perform sensitivity
correction again.
 P. 325 Error Messages and Solutions
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
97
> Fine Adjustment
When the weight of the master product and the displayed value during operation are different,
the displayed value needs to be corrected. This correction is called fine adjustment.
1 Basic Operations
When the History of Fine adjsument after machine sealing reaches to maximum number of
recording, it is not able to perform Fine adjustment. In order to use the fine adjustment again, you
need to unseal the machine and clear the history of fine adjustment after sealing.
Cautions on fine adjustment

■ Master product refers to a typical product with average characteristics (such as size,
weight, contents, and packaging) passed on the line.

■ Feed the master product under the same conditions (such as position and flow
orientation) as normal products.
Conveyor belt
Master product
Viewed from the top

■ Adjust the photocell position so that the master product interrupts the optical axis.
■ If the master product is of a different form from products fed on the actual line, or if the
flow orientation is different, there may be some risk of reduced accuracy when feeding
actual products during the production run.
■ Perform fine adjustment after setting "Conveyor Speed", "Prod Len", or "Ref. Value".
■ The measurement accuracy does not change when fine adjustment is performed.
4 Maintenance
1 Select "Others"  "Fine Adjustment".

5 Appendix
98
2 Follow the instructions on the "Fine Adjustment" screen and enter the values of the
master product weight and fine adjustment master weight.
1 Basic Operations
3 Feed the master product.
When feeding the master product, make
sure that the orientation and the position
on the belt are fixed.

Press [Next] and then press the Start
button to start the conveyor. Follow the
on-screen instructions and feed the
master product through the conveyor 10
times.
When the message "Fine adjustment has finished normally" is displayed, fine
adjustment is complete. Press [Completed].
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
99
> Timing Adjustment
The weighing timing, RJ timing, RJ check timing, and NG input delay timing of the target
product can be set to improve overall performance. The checkweigher sets the
1 Basic Operations
measurement timing automatically when the product length is entered. By fine-tuning the
value, higher measurement accuracy can be obtained.
No adjustment is required if it is within the specification accuracy.
1 When operation is stopped, press "Others" and select "Timing Adjustment".

"Timing Adjustment" screen

2 In the "Timing Adjustment" screen, press the "Prod Len" area to display the input
screen.
Entering product length

■ When the product length is entered, the Flow
measurement rejection timing (T1, T2) Product length

and filter time are calculated automatically.
For product length, enter the maximum
length in the direction of the flow of
4 Maintenance
products.
■ For products packaged in a bag, enter the dimensions in the packaged state.
■ For products that flow diagonally, enter a maximum length.
For special product shapes, the timing value must be set manually.
5 Appendix
100
3 Set the product length. No input is
required if it has been set in the "Basic
Setting" screen.
1 Basic Operations
4 Press the Start button and feed a product to display the product timing and damping
waveform.
Feed a product several times, and obtain the waveforms. Adjust T2 by finding a point
with minimal randomness (dispersion).
To change the range of the graph vertical axis (weight value), press [Vert. range] in the
upper right part of the screen or slide your finger to the vertical axis direction on the
graph.
To change the range of the horizontal axis (time) of the graph, press [Time] or slide
your finger in the direction of the horizontal axis on the graph.

Press [Clear] in the lower right part of the screen to clear the waveform data.
To restore the timing after changing it, set Measurement timing to "Auto”. T1, T2, and
the filter time will return to the original values.
> Adjusting the RJ timing

(Adjust registered products. → Product settings → RJ timing → RJ timing adjustment)
The RJ timing can be adjusted by feeding through a product and checking the evaluation
result. Tap the [Reset timing] button to set T3 and T4 automatically. 4 Maintenance
This feature is available for flipper and dropout

rejectors only.
5 Appendix
101
> Auto Settings (Readjusting registered products)
Readjust the sensitivity setting if the sensitivity decreases due to a change in product
properties such as temperature, water content, and shape, which may cause a false
1 Basic Operations
detection.
▪ Use a master product that has the property (temperature, water content and shape) after the
change.
▪ For M5, the HIS setting can be adjusted when performing the auto setting again for the
product for which the HIS setting is effective.
1 Press [Menu] → [Adjust registered

product.] when the checkweigher is

shutdown and select [Auto-set].
2 Prepare a master product and press

[Next].
3 Select [Make auto setting by using

current settings] and then press [Next].
4 Maintenance
Selecting [Make auto setting newly] allows

you to start performing the settings from the
initial state in the same way as when
registering a new product.
 P. 45 Registering a new product - step16
4 Select whether to move the master
product back and forth for auto setting,
and then press [Next].
5 Appendix
102
5 Press the [Start] button. When the
conveyor starts running, feed through the
master product according to the
on-screen instructions.
1 Basic Operations
▼ Metal contamination check
Feed through the master product three
times.
Feed through the master product one

time.
When the auto setting finishes, the

determined sensitivity mode and the

estimated detecting sensitivity are
displayed. Press [Completed] to apply
the new settings.
Press [Cancel] if you do not want to apply

the auto setting results.
detected and not a guaranteed value. Be sure to check the detection sensitivity after performing
the auto setting. 4 Maintenance
▼ Missing product check
Feed through the master product once

and a missing product (NG sample
product) once.
When the auto setting finishes, the

stability index are displayed. Press
5 Appendix
[Completed] to apply the new settings.
Press [Cancel] if you do not want to apply the auto setting results.
103
Saving, Inputting, and Outputting Data
> Saving Data to the USB Memory

The following information can be saved to the USB memory. USB port has been installed
to the checkweigher.
1 Basic Operations
■ Statistics (total statistics, batch statistics)
■ Measured values
■ History (Operation History, Parameter History, Approved Parameter History, NG
History, Alarm History, Operation Check History, Fine Adj. History, Fine Adj. History
after sealing, Software Update History, Seal History, Time Change History)
■ Parameters set to the checkweigher (product parameters, common parameters)
■ Support data (used when a trouble occurs in the checkweigher)
The data recorded to the USB memory is in the CSV format and can be edited easily by
using any spreadsheet application such as Microsoft Excel (except for information for
restoration after a failure).
Conversion Tool (A Data Viewer Software) is already included with Checkweigher, which
creates statistical data from measured value.
The specifications regarding USB memory are as shown below.

Item Description
Max Speed Measured value output 600 products/min
When Meas. Value Output is Standard: Approx. 30 million
records (data size: 64 bytes)
Maximum number of records When Meas. Value Output is Detail: Approx. 20 million
records (data size: 92 bytes)
* Calculated for 2 GB USB memory
File system FAT16/FAT32
File name, folder name Up to 255 characters
4 Maintenance
USB memory maximum capacity USB memory of up to 2 GB can be used.

Data retention period: >10 years
Recommended USB memory Rewrite count: >2,000,000 times
Supported OS: Windows XP/2000/Me/Vista/7/8/10
5 Appendix
104
The number of days to save data in the USB memory for the production volume per day is
shown below.
Production volume/day 10,000 50,000 100,000 200,000 500,000
Standard 8.2 years 1.6 years 300 days 150 days 60 days
1 Basic Operations
Detail 5.5 years 1.1 years 200 days 100 days 40 days
(1) When using USB memory

Do not save any data other than files created by the checkweigher.
If files created in a PC are saved to the USB memory, the files may be identified
falsely, and data may be destroyed. This may also result in losing the
checkweigher’s ability to record data.
(2) Inserting and removing USB memory
USB memory can be inserted or removed while the power is ON. After completing
the removal command, remove the USB making sure that the writing indication
LED has turned off. If the USB memory is removed while the LED is still blinking (or
if power is suddenly turned off while the LED is still blinking), it may result in
destroying the data and the data may become unreadable. After removing USB
memory, make sure to close the cover. Otherwise, foreign objects or water may
enter during cleaning, resulting in failure of the equipment.
Do not insert the USB memory again immediately after you have removed it. The USB

memory might not be recognized if it is re-inserted immediately after removal.
(3) Operation when no USB memory is inserted
Unable to operate a sealed machine when USB memory is not inserted.
(4) Operation when USB memory capacity is exceeded
When USB memory capacity is exceeded, an alarm will be generated.
After the alarm, data will not be recorded to the USB memory. Move data to a PC
periodically to avoid capacity overflow.
(5) Using the recommended USB memory
Use the recommended USB memory. Operation cannot be guaranteed for USB
memory other than that recommended.
4 Maintenance
■ Installing USB memory

This section describes how to install USB memory.
Cover
1 Turn the knob to open the cover of the Knob
Turn
USB memory unit.
Open
2 Insert the USB memory to the main unit

5 Appendix
while being careful of the direction.

USB memory
105
3 Close the cover and turn the knob. Knob
Turn
Close
1 Basic Operations
■ Removing USB memory

This section describes how to remove USB memory.
To remove USB memory safely, make sure to perform the "removal" operation in the
checkweigher.
1 Select [?]  [Eject USB]

2 Turn the knob to open the cover of the

Cover
USB memory unit. Knob
Turn
Open
3 Make sure that the LED on the USB

memory is not blinking.
If USB memory is removed during data recording, files may be destroyed and become
unreadable. Before removing USB memory, make sure that data is not being recorded by
4 Maintenance
checking the LED on the USB memory.

Especially when measured values are being recorded in high production capacity, USB memory
may be accessed more than 10 seconds after the last product is fed. Make sure to check the
LED blinking state before removing USB memory.
4 Remove USB memory from the main unit.

USB memory
5 Close the cover and turn the knob. Knob

5 Appendix
Turn
Close
106
■ File/folder configuration of USB memory
Data recorded by the checkweigher is stored in folders sorted by date. As device
information, folders can optionally be set with a Level 1 and Level 2 "Line Name" and
"Sub-number".
1 Basic Operations
"Record Type" and "Serial number" are automatically added to a file name. The serial
number counts up in the following cases, and a new file is created. When the date
changes, the serial number returns to 00. When the serial number is 00, addition of the
serial number to the file name is omitted.
■ If the data size of one file exceeds 1 MB

■ When USB memory is installed
■ When the power is turned on again
Image of folder auto generation

Level 1 folder
Level 2 folder
Record type Record data
Header
CW HEADER.csv
Record

Directory Record data
Year/Month/Day (RecordType_SerialNumber.csv)
History
Record HIST 20120913 HACT.csv
Directory
HPRM.csv
HMIDPRM.csv
HNG.csv
HALM.csv
20120914 HOPCHK.csv
HACCHK.csv
20120915 HD001.csv
HDYN.csv
20120915 HSFT.csv 4 Maintenance
HSEL.csv
HTIM.csv
Measurement RECORD 20120913 INDIV.csv
Record
Directory INDIV_01.csv
20120914 INDIV.csv
INDIV_01.csv
Statistics
Record STATS 20120913 SBTS.csv
Directory STTS.csv
20120914 SBTS.csv
STTS.csv
Parameter
5 Appendix
Record PARAM 20120913 PP.csv

Directory
20120914 PCOM.csv
107
"Level 1”, "Level 2”, "Record Type”, and "Year/Month/Day" folders are created automatically by
this unit.
1 Basic Operations
■ USB memory storage settings

("Menu"  "USB memory/printer"  "Set USB Memory store")
When data is recorded to USB memory, the Level-1 Folder and Level-2 Folder can
optionally be specified to identify the device. To manage recorded data, specify folder
names before use. By adding an expiration date to data recorded to USB memory,
insufficient capacity of USB memory can be resolved.
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Sets the USB memory folder structure.
USB Memory Level-1 Disable Disable Sets the standard folder structure.
Folder Enable Sets a specified character string to the
Enable
folder name.
Sets folder name for the USB memory folder structure.
USB Memory Level-1 (Up to 4
Do not enter a single-byte space at the beginning of a
Folder Name characters)
folder name.
Sets the USB memory folder structure.

USB Memory Level-2 Disable Disable Sets the standard folder structure.
Folder Enable Sets a specified character string to the
Enable
folder name.
Sets folder name for the USB memory folder structure.
USB Memory Level-2
00 (0 to 99) Do not enter a single-byte space at the beginning of a
Folder Name
folder name.
Sets the time limit for data saved to USB memory.
Data folders in the USB memory stick are checked and
USB Memory Data 0
expired folders are deleted automatically. This function
4 Maintenance
Time Limit (0 to 365 days)

frees up space in USB memory. No limit is set when it
is set to 0.
5 Appendix
108
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Select the details of the measured value to be saved.
* The weights are not saved if “Statistics” is set to
1 Basic Operations
“Only Pass” and “Meas. Value Output” is set to “Only
NG”.
No Does not save the measured values.
No Saves the weights of all products (PASS,
ALL
USB Memory Meas. ALL -NG, +NG).
Value Output Only NG Saves the weights of NG products only.
MDNG Only NG NG products include –NG, +NG, MDNG,
EXTNG, and Dbl Prod.
Saves the weights and MD evaluation
values of MDNG products only. The MD
MDNG
evaluation values are not printed when the
metal detector is installed separately.
Select the details of the measured value to be output.
Outputs the measured date, option code,
Standard
USB Memory Meas. Standard rank code and measured value.
Out Contents Detail Outputs the product interval and other

Detail data in addition to the contents output
when Standard is selected.
Enables and disables the function to automatically
Store at operation No
save the operation check results into USB memory at
check end Yes
the end of the operation check.
To specify whether to save Statistical data
Save stats data at No automatically to USB memory at the end of the
the production end Yes production while the Smart Guide function is being
used.
Specify the batch saving cycle (0 to 9999, 4 digits
maximum).
4 Maintenance
The batch saving cycle indicates the number of batches

USB Memory Batch 0 to save records into the USB memory. Specify “0” to
Output Cycle (0 to 9999) save only total statistics instead of using batch saving.
When EEC function for Germany and the Netherlands
is enabled, make sure to set this parameter to 1 or
greater.
Set whether to encrypt the data output to a USB
memory. It is automatically set to “Yes” by sealing off
USB Memory No the equipment.
Encoding Yes
5 Appendix
No The data is not encrypted and output.

Yes The encrypted data (.cwe file) is output.
109
When setting a data expiration date, set the number of days in which recorded data becomes
unnecessary. Auto deletion of data is performed when the power is turned on. Make sure to
insert USB memory before turning on the power.
1 Basic Operations
If no data expiration date is used for operation, save the data in the USB memory to the PC
periodically to make sure the USB memory will have free space.
After machine sealing, “Total statistics data”, “Batch statistics data”, and “Measured value data”
are stored in encrypted file (.CWE file). To read the file, Conversion Tool supplied with your
checkweigher is required.
■ Selecting data to record

Select data to record to USB memory and contents to be saved.
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Measured values are saved to USB memory for each
measurement.
The data to save can be selected.
No Saves no measured value.
Saves weights of all products (PASS, –

No ALL
NG, and +NG, products).
USB Memory Meas. ALL
Saves weights of faulty products (NG
Value Output Only NG products). Only NG products means –
MDNG Only NG
NG, +NG, MDNG, EXNG and
Double-product.
Saves weights of faulty products (NG
products). Only NG products means –
MDNG
NG, +NG, MDNG, EXNG and
Double-product.
4 Maintenance
Selects measured value output contents.

Outputs measured data, option code,
Standard
USB Memory Meas. Standard rank code, measured value, etc.
Out Contents Detail In addition to the standard contents,
Detail “Product interval” and other options are
available
Weights are not saved when “Statistics” is set to “Only PASS” and “Meas. Value Output” is set to
“Only NG”.
5 Appendix
110
■ Folder and file names
Measured value data is saved as "INDIV_ΔΔ.csv" (ΔΔ indicates a serial number) under
the folder "RECORD".
Data items are recorded to USB memory in the CSV format (comma-delimited) in the
1 Basic Operations
order of the table below.
Item Remarks
ID Code Measured value ID code [ ] (space)
Product No. Product No.
Measured Value Output
Serial number for recording measurement data
No.
Date and Time Measurement date and time YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Normal: Space
MDNG: 0
EXNG: 1
RJ check error (RJNG): 2
Option Code *Only when RJ check option is used and the "Meas. Out Contents"
parameter is set to "Details”.
When evaluations are entered simultaneously, option code is output in
the following order of priority.

MDNG > EXNG > RJNG
Weight value rank
Value RJ 3 levels EEC
0 D-Prod. D-Prod.
1 -NG
2 PASS Zone B ← PASS
3 Zone C ← PASS
4 Zone D ← PASS
5 Zone E ← PASS 4 Maintenance
6 Zone A ← -NG
Rank Code
7 Zone B ← -NG
8 Zone C ← -NG
9 Zone D ← +NG
A Zone E ← +NG
B
C
D
5 Appendix
E +NG
F +OVERFLOW +OVERFLOW
111
Item Remarks
Weight value
Measured Value
*Space code is output for D-Prod., +OVERFLOW.
Detection sensitivity/evaluation limit factor
1 Basic Operations
Metal Eval. Level 1

*For checkweighers with a metal detector only
Metal Eval. Level 2
*For checkweighers with a metal detector only
Metal Eval. Level 3
Metal Eval. Level 4
RJ check result
*Only when the RJ check option is used
If the result is 2, 3, or 4, option code is set to 2 of RJ check error

(RJNG). If the result is 4, rank code is output as 0.
If it is 4, it is not included in statistics because the product is not
evaluated. Be careful because the counts of checkweigher statistics
and measured value output result may become different.
Upper: RJ check PASS side detection
Value
Lower: RJ check NG side detection
Product was rejected correctly at NG evaluation.
(Not passing PASS side photocell)

0
Product was passed correctly at OK evaluation.
(Not passing NG side photocell)
Product was passed correctly at OK evaluation.
(Passing PASS side photocell)
1
RJ Check Result Product was rejected correctly at NG evaluation.
(Passing NG side photocell)
Product was not passed at OK evaluation.
(Not passing PASS side photocell)
2
Product was rejected at OK evaluation.
4 Maintenance

Product was passed at NG evaluation.
3
Product was passed at NG evaluation.
(Not passing NG side photocell)
Product was passed at no evaluation.
4
Product was rejected at no evaluation.
5 Appendix

RJ check was interrupted after measurement
5
completion.
112
Item Remarks
Zeroset state at weighing
Zeroset No zeroset: 0
Zeroset: 1
1 Basic Operations
Zero AD Value Zero value at weighing
Product Length Product length measured at photocell for weighing. Unit is mm.
Product Interval Interval from product fed previously. Unit is ms.
Time from the start of blocking the photocell for weighing by product to
Product Movement
the start of blocking RJ photocell. Unit is ms.
Time
Note: Only when the RJ check option is used
Product Blocking Time Time in which product blocked RJ photocell. Unit is ms.
(rejector) Note: Only when the RJ check option is used
* Parameters from "Zeroset" to "Product Blocking Time (rejector)" are recorded when "Meas. Out
Contents" parameter is "Details”.
An image of measured value data recorded to USB memory is shown below.

Opened in Notepad

Opened in Microsoft Excel
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
If Microsoft Excel is installed, double-click the file to open Excel and load the CSV file.
113
■ Saving batch statistics data
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default: _)
Sets Batch output cycle (MAX 4 digits: 0 to 9999).
1 Basic Operations
This specifies the cycle for outputting batch data to a

USB memory stick. Input 0 to disable batch recording
USB Memory Batch 0
and only record the total statistics.
Output Cycle (0 to 9999)
When EEC function for Germany and the Netherlands
is enabled, make sure to set this parameter to 1 or
greater.
The batch statistics data are saved at the following timing.

▪ When products are measured the number of the batch cycle count (when Batch
Cycle Unit is set to “COUNT”)
For all product statistics, the batch statistics data are saved when the measurement
count reaches the batch count.
For pass product statistics, the batch data statistics are saved when the number of
pass products reaches the batch count.
▪ When the batch cycle time has passed (when Batch Cycle Unit is set to “Time”)
▪ When the total statistics data saving is executed in the middle of a batch
measurement (Forced counting)

Executing batch statistics data saving in the middle of a batch measurement is
called “Forced counting”.
Example) Batch saving cycle：2

Batch saving unit: count
Batch count: 10
4 Maintenance
Forced counting
Normal batch statistics data saving Data to be saved
10 pcs 10 pcs 10 pcs 5 pcs
Batch count
Batch saving cycle Total statistics saving

5 Appendix
114
(1) Folder and file names
Batch statistics are saved as "SBTS_ΔΔ.csv" (ΔΔ indicates a serial number) under the
folder "STATS”.
1 Basic Operations
(2) Record format
Item Description
Standard EEC option Standard EEC option
ID Code Batch statistics data ID code [B]
Batch Sta. Out No. Number of times batch statistics are output
Compilation Start Batch statistics start date and time YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Compilation End Batch statistics end date and time YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Statistics Method 0: All products statistics 1: PASS statistics
Product Name Product name
Lot No. Lot No.
Batch Count Batch count
-NG Zone A count -NG count Zone A count

PASS Zone B count PASS count Zone B count
Zone C count Zone C count
Zone D count Zone D count
+NG Zone E count +NG count Zone E count
MDNG Metal NG count
EXNG External input NG count
D-Prod. Double product count
Not Statistics Target Not statistics target count
Sample count of statistics target
Sample Count
(except MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not Statistics Target)
Total weight (except MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not Statistics
Total Weight
4 Maintenance
Target)
Mean value (except MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not Statistics
Mean Value
Target)
Standard deviation (exceptions: MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not
Standard Deviation
Statistics Target)
Maximum weight (exceptions: MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not
Maximum Weight
Statistics Target)
Minimum weight (exceptions: MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not
Minimum Weight
Statistics Target)
RANGE Maximum Weight - Minimum Weight
Reference Value Reference setting value
5 Appendix
TU2 TU2 Limit setting value

Lower Lower limit
Limit setting value
115
Item Description
Upper Upper limit
TO1 TO1 Limit setting value
Limit setting value
1 Basic Operations

Zone B PASS In Zone B, count rejected as PASS because
count within permissible range
Percentage of Zone B PASS count in PASS
Zone B TU1%
count
Zone C PASS In Zone C, count rejected as PASS because
count less than mean value
Percentage of Zone C PASS count in PASS
Zone C TO1%
count
PT Preset tare setting value

Batch aborted 0: No Forced counting 1: Forced counting
■ Saving operation check data

Setting
Name Explanation
(Default: _)
Sets ON/OFF of the function to automatically save
operation check result at the end of an operation
Store at Operation
No/Yes check.
Check End
Ope.Check …(Accuracy Check and Eva/RJ
Confirmation)
To specify whether to save Statistical data
Save stats data at automatically to USB memory at the end of the
No/Yes
the production end production while the Smart Guide function is being
used.

History data is saved with the following file names (ΔΔ indicates a serial number) under
the folder "HIST”.
Operation Check History (Eva/RJ Confirmation): HOPCHK_ΔΔ.csv
4 Maintenance
Operation Check History (Accuracy Check): HACCHK_ΔΔ.csv

5 Appendix
116
(2) Record format
1 Basic Operations
■ Accuracy Check
Item Description
ID Code History type "4"
History Type Outputs history type.
History Output No. History serial number
Date and Time YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Mode Equipment mode when the event occurred
Event Event occurred
Result Accuracy check result
User Access level at check
PASS Weight PASS product weight

Permissible
Permissible accuracy
Accuracy
Measurement
Accuracy of the results measured by accuracy check
Accuracy
Count Measurement count
X-bar Mean value
S Standard deviation
R RANGE
Max Maximum value
Min Minimum value
4 Maintenance
Output by repeating the number of times

Weight Value N Weight value
specified for checking (N)
5 Appendix
117
■ Eva/RJ Check
Item Description
1 Basic Operations

History No. History serial number
Result Result
User Access level

Reference Value Reference value
Upper Limit Upper limit
Lower Limit Lower limit
Test Piece Size (Fe) Set value
Test Piece Size (SUS) Set value
Metal Eval. Level 1 Set value

Criteria N Criteria
Evaluation N Evaluation result
Weight Value N Weight value
For checkweighers with
Fe/SUS N
a metal detector only
Evaluation value 1
Evaluation value 1 N
Output by repeating the number
4 Maintenance
Evaluation value 2 of times specified for checking

(N)
Evaluation value 3
Evaluation value 4
Rejection N Rejection
Result N Pass/NG of check result
5 Appendix
118
■ Saving total statistics data
Select "Menu"  "USB memory/printer" 
"Save to USB memory”, select the target
item to save from the list in the left part of the
1 Basic Operations
screen, and press [Save]. The following
screen is for saving "Product statistics”.
To save all registered product data, check
"Save all product data" before saving.
Save data for one product
Total statistics data is saved as "STTS_ΔΔ.csv" (ΔΔ indicates a serial number) under the
folder "STATS”.
(2) Record format

Item Description

ID Code Total statistics data ID code [C]
Total Statistics Output No. Number of times total statistics are output
Compilation Start Total statistics start date and time YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Compilation End Total statistics end date and time YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Statistics Method 0: All products statistics 1: PASS statistics
Lot No. Lot No.
Batch Count Batch count
-NG Zone A count -NG count Zone A count
4 Maintenance
PASS Zone B count PASS count Zone B count

Zone C count Zone C count
Zone D count Zone D count
+NG Zone E count +NG count Zone E count
MDNG Metal NG count
EXNG External input NG count
Double Product Double product count
Not Statistics Target Not Statistics Target count
Sample count of statistics target
Sample Count
(except MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not Statistics Target)
5 Appendix
Total weight (except MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not Statistics

Total Weight
Target)
119
Item Description
Mean value (except MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not Statistics
Mean Value
Target)
1 Basic Operations
Standard deviation (except MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not

Standard Deviation
Statistics Target)
Maximum weight (except MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not
Maximum Weight
Statistics Target)*
Minimum weight (except MDNG, EXNG, D-Prod., Not
Minimum Weight
Statistics Target)*
RANGE Maximum Weight - Minimum Weight*
Reference Value Reference setting value
Lower limit
Lower Limit TU1 TU1 Limit setting value
setting value
Upper limit
Upper Limit TO1 TO1 Limit setting value
setting value
Zone B PASS In Zone B, count rejected as PASS because
count within permissible range
Percentage of Zone B PASS count in PASS
Zone B TU1%
count
Zone C PASS In Zone C, count rejected as PASS because

count less than mean value
Percentage of Zone C PASS count in PASS
Zone C TO1%
count
PT Preset tare setting value
Batch aborted 0: No Forced counting
* If Batch Data is specified for Statistics Print Select, Max D., Min D. and Range Mean
are recorded. Max D. and Min D. indicate the maximum and minimum values of the
standard deviation per batch. Range Mean indicates the mean value of the range per
batch. Note that the names of the items in the CSV file will be Max, Min, and RANGE
regardless of the setting of Statistics Print Select.
4 Maintenance
* Output all product data during suspension. You cannot output the data during
operation.
5 Appendix
120
■ Saving parameter data
Similarly, select [Parameter] and press
[Save].
1 Basic Operations
Parameter data is saved with the following
file names (ΔΔ indicates a serial number)
under the folder "PARAM”.
PCOM_ΔΔ.csv: common parameter
PP_ΔΔ.csv: Product Parameter
(2) Record format
Item Description
ID Code Parameter type “P”
System parameter
Parameter Type
Product parameter
Product No. 001 to 200 / -

Parameter Out No. Serial number of output parameter
Channel Output when parameter has a channel
Name Parameter name
Setting Value Parameter value
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
121
■ Saving history data
Similarly, select [History] and press [Save].
Type: Operation History

1 Basic Operations
Parameter History
Approved Parameter History
NG History
Alarm History
Operation Check History
Fine Adj. History
Fine Adj. History After Seal
Software Update History

Seal History
Time Change History
Target: Output all product data  All products
Output data for one product  Only selected products
Out. range: All data  All data recorded in history
Past 24 hours  Data recorded in the past 24 hours

History data is saved with the following file names (ΔΔ indicates a serial number) under
the folder "HIST”.
Operation History HACT_ΔΔ.csv
Parameter History HPRM_ΔΔ.csv
Approved Parameter History HMIDPRM_ΔΔ.csv
NG History HNG_ΔΔ.csv
Alarm History HALM_ΔΔ.csv
Operation Check History (Eva/RJ Confirmation): HOPCHK_ΔΔ.csv
Operation Check History (Accuracy Check): HACCHK_ΔΔ.csv
4 Maintenance
Fine Adj. History: HD001_ΔΔ.csv

Fine Adj. History After Seal: HDYN_ΔΔ.csv
Software Update History: HSFT_ΔΔ.csv
Seal History: HSEL_ΔΔ.csv
Time Change History: HTIM_ΔΔ.csv
5 Appendix
122
(2) Record format
1 Basic Operations
Operation History, Parameter History, Approved parameter History, NG History, Alarm
History, Seal History and Time Change History
Item Description
Product No.
Product No.
("-" is the output if product does not exist)
Mode Equipment mode when the event occurred
Description Description

Fine Adj. History, Fine Adj. History After Seal
Item Description
Product No.
Product No.
Date and Time YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS 4 Maintenance

Master product refers to a typical product with average
Fine adjust coeffi. characteristics (such as size, weight, contents, and
packaging) passed on the line.
Master weight Master weight used for Fine adjustment
Individual Master data that was measured by fine
Individual data adjustment.
Recordable 10 times.
5 Appendix
123
Software Update History
Item Description
1 Basic Operations
Product No.
Product No.
Result Result from software updating
MPU2010 Software Ver. Software version of MPU2010 Soft

Protected Software Ver. Software version of Protected Soft
Issuer Software publisher
Error information Error information at software updating
For the formats of Operation Check History (Eva/RJ Confirmation and Accuracy Check, refer to
the following;
 P. 116 Saving operation check data
■ Saving USB information

(1) Displaying USB memory information
Total Space Displays total space of USB
memory.
Used Space Displays used space of USB

memory.
Free Space Displays free space of USB

4 Maintenance
memory.
When no USB memory is inserted, "- - - " is displayed.

5 Appendix
124
(2) Format
USB memory can be formatted by pressing the [Format] button.
When data cannot be recorded to the USB memory, format the USB memory. USB
memory can be formatted on the checkweigher or on a PC.
1 Basic Operations
Once USB memory is formatted, all data is erased. Erased data cannot be recovered.
Reference: Formatting USB memory on a PC
1 Open [My Computer].
2 Right-click the USB memory drive, and select [Format].
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
125
3 Make sure that the file system is "FAT”, and press [Start].
1 Basic Operations
Make sure that the

file system is “FAT.”
Make sure to format the USB memory as a "FAT" file system. USB memory formatted with a file
system other than "FAT" does not operate on this unit. Leave Volume Label blank. If Volume
Label is used, it may not operate.
4 When the completion message is displayed, formatting is complete.

■ Saving support data

Save data to support recovery in case of
equipment failure.
When asked by an Anritsu SE, save data in
this screen and provide the data.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
126
> Setting External I/O Signals
This section describes input and output signals for external control.
To adjust I/O timing, refer to "Adjusting I/O Timing”.
1 Basic Operations
 P. 153 Adjusting I/O Timing
This checkweigher has two contact input/outputs as standard. When an optional

KCU2504A is added, 8 more points can be added. For an overview of I/O settings, refer to
the table below.
Destination I/O Input Setting I/O Output Setting
IN1 OUT1
Standard I/O
IN2 OUT2
OUTA1, OUTA2, OUTA3,
KCU2504A INA1, INA2, INA3, INA4,
OUTA4, OUTA5, OUTA6,
Expansion I/O (optional) INA5, INA6, INA7, INA8
OUTA7, OUTA8
OUTB1, OUTB2, OUTB3,
For Anritsu Expansion INB1, INB2, INB3, INB4,
OUTB4, OUTB5, OUTB6,
(optional) INB5, INB6, INB7, INB8
OUTB7, OUTB8
Signal tower and buzzer
― OUTP1, OUTP2, OUTP3
(both optional)

1 In the "Menu" screen, select "Maint. and Setting"  "Unit/connected device set." 
"Gen. I/O connection”.
4 Maintenance
Performing I/O input settings
2 Perform settings and enter values for the items displayed.

5 Appendix
Input setting for IN1 When "Type" of IN1 is pressed
127
Select the target destination and press [Input]. The input screen is displayed. For
descriptions of the items, refer to the table below.
Types of input signals

1 Basic Operations
Type Explanation
- No signal input
This is the Operate/Stop switch input.
Switches between operation and stop every time this input is set to
ON. Set the input ON time at 100 ms or faster.
Mot. ON/OFF This signal cannot be used at the same time as “Mot. ON/OFF
(Momentary) (Alternate)” or “Mot. ON/OFF2 (Alternate)”. When both signals are set,
this signal is prioritized.
If this input is switched to stop while the IO output signal “Error” is ON,
turn it OFF.
The device is in the operating status while this input is ON.
Mot. ON/OFF This input cannot be used at the same time as the “Mot. ON (Pulse
(Alternate) input)” signal. When both signals are set, this signal is prioritized.
If this input is switched to stop while the IO output signal “Error” is ON,
turn it OFF.
Run input. The Checkweigher runs while this input is ON.
However, the Mot. OFF (Par. Priority) input has priority over this input
and this input cannot stop the Checkweigher. Use the Mot. OFF (Par.
Mot. ON (Pulse input) Priority) input to stop the Checkweigher. The signal ON time must be
at least 100 ms.
In addition, the " Mot. OFF (Par. Priority)" input has priority over this
input.
Mot. OFF The conveyor motor is forcibly stopped while this signal is ON. The
(Par. Priority) conveyor motor cannot be set to ON while this signal is ON.
Input for rejecting weighed products in EXNG direction irrespective of
weight rank. The rejector gate operates at the same timing as at
External NG input weight NG.
(Synchronous) For bulk-type products, use EXNG (Continuous + Synchronous).
 P. 391 T iming Chart
Input for rejecting weighed products in EXNG direction irrespective of
4 Maintenance
weight rank. The rejector gate operates in the EXNG direction while
External NG input this signal is ON. However, to avoid the risk of rejector gate jams
(Continuous + Synchronous) during normal rejector gate operation intervals (T4), the gate operates
after the rejector gate operation.
For box-type products, use EXNG (Synchronous).
External zero setting Input for performing external zero setting
Error reset Input for releasing errors and alarms
Stop dividing input (OK1)
Stop dividing input (OK2) Inputs for stopping ranking when using optional PASS Product
Stop dividing input (OK3) Division function. Ranking is not performed while this input is ON.
Stop dividing input (OK4)
5 Appendix
128
Type Explanation
Input signal for rejecting Pass products in EXNG direction. Rejection
of NG products is unaffected by whether this signal is ON or OFF and
External NG input for pass
NG products are rejected in the specified NG rank direction. (The
product (Synchronous)
priority rank of the external signal by this input is lower than the weight
1 Basic Operations
evaluation NG.)
Clears stored tare value when using optional Net Weight Calculation
Clear stored tare value
function.
Input for rejecting weighed products in EXNG2 direction irrespective
of weight rank. The rejector gate operates at the same timing as at
weight NG.
External NG input 2
(Synchronous)
 P. 391 T iming Chart
This signal can be used with the EXNG: S or EXNG: A.
EXNG2 is normally higher priority evaluation than EXNG.
For bulk-type products, use EXNG2 (Continuous + Synchronous).
Input for rejecting weighed products in EXNG2 direction irrespective
of the weight rank. The rejector gate operates in the EXNG2 direction
while this signal is ON. However, to avoid the risk of rejector gate jams
External NG input 2 during normal rejector gate operation intervals (T4), the gate operates
(Continuous + Synchronous) after the rejector gate operation.
This signal can be used with the EXNG: S or EXNG: A.
EXNG2 normally has a higher priority evaluation than EXNG.
For box-type products, use EXNG2 (Synchronous).
Input for detecting full rejected-products box.
When this input is continuously ON for more than 5 seconds, the

Indicator displays the “A070 Box Full” alarm to turn the Full detection
output to ON and full counting starts.
When the count reaches the set full count (except 0 and 9999), the
Checkweigher conveyors are forcibly stopped.
Detection full When the full count is set to 0, the Checkweigher displays an alarm
and stops the conveyors. When the full count is set to 9999, the
Checkweigher does not stop the conveyors.
The alarm will be deactivated automatically after this input changes
from ON to OFF, and the full detection output goes OFF and the count
will be re-set to 0.
This input can be used along with the optional rejection confirmation
function.
Switches target head number to next head when using optional Head
4 Maintenance
Head Change
Statistics function for Automatic Combination Weigher.
Resets target head number to first one when using optional Head
Head Select
Statistics function for Automatic Combination Weigher.
This switches the Checkweigher to the Conveyor mode while this
Forced motor ON input signal is ON even if the Checkweigher is in normal operation.
(Alternate switch) However, when a conveyor error is generated, the Checkweigher
cannot run (in the Conveyor mode) even if this input goes ON.
Switches between operation and stop every time this input is set to
ON. Set the input ON time at 100 ms or faster.
Mot. ON/OFF2 This signal cannot be used at the same time as “Mot. ON/OFF
5 Appendix
(Momentary) (Alternate)” or “Mot. ON/OFF2 (Alternate)”. When both signals are set,
this signal is prioritized.
Even if this input is switched to stop, the IO output signal “Error” is not
turned OFF.
129
Type Explanation
The device is in the operating status while this input is ON.
Mot. ON/OFF2 This input cannot be used at the same time as the “Mot. ON (Pulse
(Alternate) input)” signal. When both signals are set, this signal is prioritized.
1 Basic Operations
Even if this input is switched to stop, the IO output signal “Error” is not
turned OFF.
The conveyor motor is forcibly stopped while this signal is ON without
releasing error output.
Mot. ON disabled
Use the “Mot. OFF (Par. Priority)” input for releasing error output with
the conveyor-motor stop at the same time.
While the conveyor speed setting is “2 Speed”, the conveyor speed
Conveyor 2 Speed
decreases if this input signal is active and increases if it is inactive.
This is a conveyor error input signal available only for the
Carrying Unit Error Checkweighers for aerosol cans (which have a model name starting
with KW9627). Error 161 occurs if this signal becomes active.
NGBOX RJ1 These input signals are used to indicate the open states of the
NGBOX RJ2 corresponding NGBoxes with electronic locks (optional).
If one of these signals becomes active, the corresponding NGBox is
NGBOX RJ4 regarded to be open. If the NGBox open state continues for 5 seconds
NGBOX RJ5 or more, alarm A072 occurs.
Input for monitoring the air pressure. Error 061 “Air pressure error” is
Air Pressure Detection
output if this signal is enabled (ON).
The number of counted items is cleared to 0 when counter preset is
Preset count clear
used.
Setting this input to ON starts the Start Eval./RJ Check

Start Eval./RJ Check confirmation.
This signal cannot be used with Smart Guide.
OptionInput1
OptionInput2
Settings for options
OptionInput3
OptionInput4
Types of output signals
Output Type
Type Signal Explanation (at standard output type)
4 Maintenance
Setting
- No signal output
Standard
Motor. ON This signal is ON while the Checkweigher conveyor is running.
Pulse
This signal is ON while the Checkweigher is in an abnormal
ABNORMAL
Standard status (EXXX displayed).
Pulse This signal is ON when the Checkweigher is in an abnormal
BUZZER Hold 2 status and when is it stopped by NG products in the NG Stop
mode.
This signal is ON when the following alarm occurrs and product
RJ Alarm
Standard is discharged in alarm direction.
5 Appendix
Direction
Target: A051 to A055, A504
130
Output Type
Setting
This signal is ON when the operation status is abnormal, or
CONVEYOR Standard when the conveyor is stopped by NG evaluation or when an
STOP Pulse Auto-zeroset alarm (A011) is generated. It is used for stopping
1 Basic Operations
an upstream conveyor.
This signal is ON when the Checkweigher is able to perform
weight measurement.
Measurable Standard This signal is OFF when the Checkweigher is stopping,
performing fine adjustment, adjusting timing, performing
Operation check, performing Auto setting, generating error,
NG Stop, and Conveyor mode.
-NG
OK
+NG
Pulse
Eval output
These signals go ON at each respective evaluation.

MDNG Hold 1 * When the evaluation output is MDNG or external NG or
External RJ Sync external NG2, both of the NG and weight evaluation signals
NG Hold 2 (–NG, OK or +NG) go ON at the same time.
External
NG 2
D-Prod.
This signal is the evaluation output strobe signal and goes ON
Timing Pulse
10 - 20 ms after the evaluation output.
Standard

This signal goes on when the ±NG ratio exceeds the set value
NG rate alarm Pulse
(NG RATE). Press the [Stop] button to release the alarm.
Hold 2
+Mean value These outputs are for the Reference value tracking, EEC, and
alarm Pulse Mean value alarm options. If “Standard” is selected, the output
-Mean value Hold 1 is held until next batch end. (Refer to the specifications and
alarm Reject sync instruction manual for each option.)
Hold 2 This signal goes ON when a NG (-NG, +NG, MDNG, EXNG and
NG output
Dbl. Prod.) evaluation occurs.
Rejection Standard
This signal goes ON when a rejector error occurs when the
confirmation Pulse
optional rejector confirmation function is installed.
error output Hold 2 4 Maintenance
This goes ON when the printer out-of-paper alarm occurs. It
No paper alarm Standard
goes OFF when the alarm is released.
When “2 Speed” (option) is set, this output is ON when the
speed setting of current product No. is LOW and goes OFF
Conveyor 2 when it is HIGH.
Standard
Speed When the conveyor is set to OFF, this output goes OFF.
However, when the conveyor speed setting is changed from
HIGH to LOW, this output goes ON.
This goes ON when the product count set at the “Preset
Pattern” reaches the counter preset. This signal is used for
Pulse downstream dividing equipment and rejection box switching
Counter preset equipment.
Hold 2
5 Appendix
Clear the preset count, clear all, change the product switch or
turn off the power switch to clear the preset counter.
131
Output Type
Setting
Pulse This signal is output when the weighed product is evaluated as
Hold 1 –NG or +NG. It is not output when the products is evaluated as
NG Output
Reject sync MDNG, external NG, external NG2 , Double product alarm or
1 Basic Operations
Hold 2 Product Length Exceeded alarm.

This output goes ON when the Full detection input is ON for 5
Detection full Standard
seconds. It goes OFF when the Full detection input is OFF.
Pulse
Hold 1 This signal is output when weighed products are evaluated as
Ultra-under
lighter than the Ultra Under Limit. It is not output when the Ultra
output Reject sync Under Limit is not set.
Hold 2
Pulse This signal is output when the weighed products are evaluated
as PASS.
Hold 1
OK Output * It is not output at MDNG, external NG, external NG2 , Double

Reject sync
product alarm or Product Length Exceeded alarm, even
Hold 2 when the weighed products are evaluated as PASS.
Monitoring
This checks the controller CPU at starting and outputs a 500-ms
output for CPU Standard
pulse when operation is normal.
operation
Standard
Conveyor error
Pulse This goes ON when a conveyor error is generated.
output
Hold 2
This is enabled when the EEC function (option) is used and the
Standard "EEC (Prod.)” at the “Product Parameter Setting” is set to “Yes”.
Pulse * This is disabled when the “EEC Function (Average)” at the
Reference value
Hold 1 "Product Parameter Setting" is set to “Yes”).
alarm
Reject sync It does not depend on the batch number and outputs when the
Hold 2 mean value is below the reference value. The mean value is
calculated only using PASS product data.
Serial Output signal for optional KW255A and KW2504A/B.
Communication Standard This alarm is output when an error occurs at serial
Alarm communications.
USB Memory
Standard This alarm is output when an USB-related error occurs.
Related Alarm
This is a weigh-cell-ready output signal available only for the
4 Maintenance
Checkweighers for aerosol cans (which have a model name

READY Standard starting with KW9627). This signal does not become active if it
is selected for a Checkweigher other than those for aerosol
cans.
NGBOX OPEN
Standard
RJ1 These output signals are used to enable the corresponding
NGBOX OPEN NGBoxes with electronic locks (optional) to open.
Standard
RJ2 These signals become active if the NGBoxes are unlocked,
NGBOX OPEN enabling the NGBoxes to open.
Standard
RJ4 These signals do not become active if they are selected while
NGBOX OPEN no NGBox with an electronic lock is connected.
5 Appendix
Standard
RJ5
132
Output Type
Setting
This signal goes ON when the metal detector is operating in the
conveyor mode, such as in the cases below. This signal is
available for checkweighers that have a metal detector.
1 Basic Operations
MD conveyor The product parameter “MD Conveyor mode” is set to “Yes”.
Standard
mode output
The metal detector is operating in the forced conveyor mode.
The Forces motor ON signal (Forced ON) is input for the
external control input.
Output OUT1 by reset pulse when the safety relay unit is
mounted
Safety relay reset Pulse Type Pulse
Logic Not Reverse
Latency 300 ms
Checking This outputs signal while the Checkweigher conveyor is running
Standard
operation when using Eval/RJ Check, Accuracy Check and Check Mode.
Standard This outputs signal when the product blocks the photocell during
Detect product
Pulse running or stopping.
Standard
CW/CCW motor This signal is not available.
Pulse
OptionOutput1
OptionOutput2
― Settings for options

OptionOutput3
OptionOutput4
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
133
Logic, Type, Delay Time, and Hold Time settings
Setting
No. Name Description
(Default: )
1 Basic Operations
Output signal logic can be set as follows:

Not Reverse
1 Logic Not Reverse Signal not reversed
Reverse
Reverse Signal reversed
This screen sets the output type.
The operation is not assured when selecting a type that is
not shown in the table on the above.
Pulse ON only for set Hold time
Hold1 ON until end of evaluation of next product.
Pulse
ON only during rejector gate operation time
Hold 1 RJ Sync
(T4 interval)
2 Type RJ Sync
ON continuously until one of
Hold 2 [Recover] /[Stop] button pressed, or until ERR
Standard RES (Error reset) input signal input.
Hold2
“I/O Output signal On” is displayed when the
output signal is ON if the “Hold 2” is set to the
signal.
Operates as described in table on previous

Standard
page
0 ms
3 Delay time This screen is used to set the Output ON delay time.
(0 to 9999 ms)
0 ms This screen is used to set the signal hold time. It is only
4 HOLD time
(0 to 9999 ms) enabled when “Pulse” is selected as the output type.
For connection terminals, refer to Appendix "External I/O Specifications" and "Timing
Chart”.
 P. 381 External I/O Specifications, P. 391 Timing Chart
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
134
Usually use “IO input setting”. Use “IO input setting (Details)” when setting the logical
combination of the signal.
IO input setting (Details)
1 Basic Operations
(Maint. And Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Gen. I/O connection → IO input
setting (Details) )
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Input Signal ID No Input Displays the signal name.
Selects the input terminal No. of terminal block.
Corresponding numbers are described below: Do
not change.
Input Terminal
0 to 255 IN1.2 180, 181
No. 1
INA1 to INA8 182 to 189
INB1 to INB8 190 to 197
Not Reverse Specifies the logic of the input signal from the
Input Logic 1
Reverse selected terminal.
Specifies the delay time of the input signal from the
Delay Time 1 0 to 9999
selected terminal.

Delay Time 1 Specifies the delay time of the input signal from the
0 to 9999
(Low) selected terminal.
Signal Specifies the logical connection of the signals input
None/And/Or
Connection 1 from the input terminal No. n and [n+1].
not change.
Input Terminal
0 to 255
No. 2 IN1.2 180, 181
4 Maintenance
Input Logic 2
selected terminal.
0 to 9999
None/And/Or
5 Appendix
135
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
1 Basic Operations
not change.
Input Terminal
0 to 255 IN1.2 180, 181
No. 3
Input Logic 3
selected terminal.
0 to 9999
None/And/Or
Rejector
Conveyor
Checkweigher
Metal detector
Destination X-ray inspect. system Sets the connection of input signal.

Weigher
Packager
Labeler
Other inspect. system
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
136
Usually use IO output setting. Use “IO output setting (Details)” when setting the
combination of the signal.
IO output setting (Details)
1 Basic Operations
(Maint. And Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Gen. I/O connection → IO output
setting (Details) )
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
not change.
Output Terminal
0 to 255 OUT1.2 80, 81
No.
OUTA1 to OUTA8 82 to 89
OUTB1 to OUTB8 90 to 97
Output Signal
No Output Displays the signal name.
ID1
Pulse
Hold1
Specifies the format of the signal output from the
Output Type 1 RJ Sync.

output terminal block.
Hold2
Standard
Not Reverse Specifies the logic of the signal output from the
Output Logic 1
Reverse output terminal block.
Specifies the delay time of the signal output from the
Hold Time 1 0 to 9999
Signal Specifies the logical connection of the signals output
None/And/Or
Connection 1 from the output terminal No. n and [n+1].
4 Maintenance
Output Signal * Same as Output

* Same as Output Signal ID1
ID2 Signal ID1
Pulse
Hold1
Hold2
Standard
Output Logic 2
5 Appendix

137
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
1 Basic Operations

None/And/Or
Output Signal * Same as Output
* Same as Output Signal ID1
ID3 Signal ID1
Pulse
Hold1
Hold2
Standard
Output Logic 3
None/And/Or
Rejector
Conveyor
Checkweigher
Metal detector
Destination X-ray inspect. system Sets the connection of output signal.
Weigher
Packager
Labeler
Other inspect. system
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
138
Extension I/O connection setting
(Maint. And Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Gen. I/O connection → Extension
I/O connection setting)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Selects the method of treating error occurring upon
abnormal IO-NET connection.
This parameter is set to Yes if the
EXT-I/O (channel A) connection is
detected when the power is turned
Extension I/O Auto Auto
to ON. This parameter is not
(A): Connection No
changed to No when the EXT-I/O
monitoring Yes (channel A) is not connected.
Restrains the occurrence of the
No
Generates the occurrence of the
Yes

EXT-I/O (channel B) connection is
detected when the power is turned
Extension I/O Auto Auto
to ON.EXT-I/O This parameter is not
(B): Connection No
changed to No when the EXT-I/O
monitoring Yes (channel B) is not connected.
No
Yes
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
139
Set other conveyor
(Maint. And Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Conveyor →Set other conveyor)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default: )
MOT-CONT connection is detected
when the power is turned to ON.
Auto Auto
MOT-CONT: This parameter is not changed to No
No
connect check when the MOT-CONT is not
Yes connected.

No
Yes
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
140
■ Serial connection
When inputting and outputting data in connection with external devices such as code
reader, specify the settings by referring to the table below.
1 Basic Operations
Serial1 Setting
(Maint. and Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Serial connection → Serial1
Setting)
* The items displayed differ depending on the Serial1:Connection setting.

*1 Setting for Anritsu optional equipment. Not use for other equipment.
*2 Prod. No. in the message corresponds to 3 digits (up to 200 products).
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Select the connection method of Serial1 I/O.
Does not connect to the external
No No
device.
Yes
Serial1:Connection Yes Connects to the external device.
Labeler
Labeler Connects to the Label printer.
Code Reader

Code Makes a connection with a code
Reader reader (optional).
Serial1:Transfer 1200, 2400,
Selects the transfer speed of Serial1 I/O.
Speed 4800, 9600 bps
No
Serial1:Parity EVEN Selects the parity of Serial1 I/O.
ODD
1
Serial1:Stop Bit Selects the start/stop bit of Serial1 I/O.
2
No
Serial1:flow control Sets the flow control method of serial communication.
4 Maintenance
RTS
5 Appendix
141
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Selects the serial input/output type.
No Outputs no data.
1 Basic Operations
Serial1:Output 1
Outputs measured value for each
Meas. Value
weighing.
Outputs batch mean value at the end
Mean Value
No of a batch.
Meas. Value Outputs batch statistics data at the
Serial1:Output 2 Stat. Value
Mean Value end of a batch.
Stat. Value Meas. Outputs data with product number
Meas. Output Output added for each weighing.

Meas V. Plus Meas V. Outputs detailed measured value for
History Plus each weighing.
Stat. V. 2 History Not available
Meas. Output2
Outputs batch statistics data 2 at the
Meas V. Plus2 Stat. V. 2
end of a batch.
Serial1:Output 3 Meas. Outputs data with product number
Output2 added for each weighing. *2
Outputs detailed measured value for

Meas V. each weighing. This setting is
Plus2 available for Checkweigher with M6-h
series metal detector. *2
Selects the serial output data format and number of
digits.
ASCII Outputs 4-digit ASCII code with
ASCII deviation deviation deviation value.
Serial1:Data ASCII absolute ASCII Outputs 6-digit ASCII code with
1
Format CW deviation * absolute absolute value.
CW absolute *1
4 Maintenance
CW Outputs in CW format with deviation

deviation*1 value.
CW Outputs in CW format with absolute
absolute*1 value.
Selects the serial input/output data length of measured
value output.
Var. Text format of the measured value output is
Serial1:Meas. Var. Length
Length adjusted according to the mass value.
Output Fixed Length
The mass value is specified as 8-digit fixed
Fixed
5 Appendix
length. (G is included and blank parts are

Length
specified as space)
142
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Selects the type of measured values output during
operation check in serial 1 I/O.
1 Basic Operations
No No
No Yes Yes
Yes Outputs measured values with product
Serial1:Out when Expansion
Expansion number added. *2
ope check
Expansion 2 The measurement value is output during
an operation check together with
Expansion product No., product effect value and
2 phase value. This setting is available for
Checkweigher with M6-h series metal
detector. *2
Selects whether statistics data to output in serial I/O or
No not by operating Indicator.
Serial1:Total Stats
Stat. Value No Not output.
Out
Stat. V. 2 Stat. Value Outputs in statistics value format.
Stat. V. 2 Outputs in statistics value 2 format.

Selects statistics data output format when sending
Serial1: Stats Stat. Value statistics read command in serial I/O.
Read Cont Stat. V. 2 Stat. Value Outputs in statistics value format.
Stat. V. 2 Outputs in statistics value 2 format.
Selects the type of product number link in serial 1 I/O.
Set this to No.
No
Serial1:Prod No. No Does not output data.
Yes
Link
Expansion Yes Outputs data.
Expansion Outputs data. *2 4 Maintenance

Selects whether to output them to the serial I/O when
an error or alarm occurs.
Serial1:Err. Alarm No
Does not output errors and alarms to the
Output Yes No
serial1 I/O.
Yes Outputs errors and alarms the serial1 I/O.
Selects whether to output equipment state change to
Serial1:State Chg. No the serial1 I/O.
Output Yes No Does not output state change to the serial1 I/O.
Yes Outputs state change to the serial1 I/O.
5 Appendix
143
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Leave it as Old (Default setting).
Serial1:Comm. Old
Old KD80XX series
1 Basic Operations
message New
New KD81XX, KD82XX series
Specifies whether to read the item code in the product
barcode by the barcode reader.
The item code cannot be read by the barcode
No
Serial1:Item code No reader. Enter the item code using the touch
Yes
panel.
The item code can be read by the barcode
Yes
reader.
Serial1:Item code 2 Specifies the start digit of the item code in the product
(start digit) (1 to 20) barcode.
Specifies the number of digits of the item code in the
Serial1:Item code 6 product barcode.
(digit count) (0 to 20) If “0” is specified, the start digit and the subsequent
digits are regarded as the item code.
Specifies whether to read the user code in the barcode
of the user by the barcode reader.
The user code cannot be read by the barcode

No
Serial1:User code No reader. Enter the user code using the touch
Yes
panel.
The user code can be read by the barcode
Yes
reader.
Serial1:User code 1 Specifies the start digit of the user code in the barcode
(start digit) (1 to 10) of the user.
Specifies the number of digits of the user code in the
Serial1:User code 0 barcode of the user.
(digit count) (0 to 10) If “0” is specified, the start digit and the subsequent
4 Maintenance
digits are regarded as the user code.

5 Appendix
144
Serial2(A) settings
(Maint. and Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Serial connection → Serial2(A)
settings)
1 Basic Operations
* The items displayed differ depending on the Serial2(A):Connection setting.
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Select the connection method of Serial2(A) I/O.
No Does not connect to the external device.
Connects to the external device (other
No
Yes than Anritsu Product, Labeler or Code
Yes
Serial2(A): Reader).
Anritsu Product
Connection Anritsu
Labeler Connects to the Anritsu device.
Product
Code Reader
Labeler Connects to the Labeler.
Code Makes a connection with a code reader
Reader (optional).

Serial2(A): RS232C
Sets the transmission standard (transfer method).
transfer method Current loop
Serial2(A): 1200, 2400,
Selects the transfer speed of Serial2(A) I/O.
Transfer Speed 4800, 9600 bps
No
Serial2(A):
EVEN Selects the parity of Serial2(A) I/O.
Parity
ODD
Serial2(A): Stop 1
Selects the start/stop bit of Serial2(A) I/O.
Bit * Read only
Serial2(A): flow No Sets the flow control method of serial2(A)
4 Maintenance
control RTS communication.

5 Appendix
145
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Selects the serial 2(A) input/output type.
No Output no data.
1 Basic Operations

Meas. Value
weighing.
Outputs batch mean value at the end of
No Mean Value
a batch.
Meas. Value Outputs batch statistics data at the end
Mean Value Stat. Value
of a batch.
Serial2(A): Stat. Value
Outputs data with product number
Output Meas. Output Meas. Output
added for each weighing.

Meas. Output2
Meas. Outputs data with product number
Meas V. Plus Output2 added for each weighing. *2
Meas V. Plus2
Outputs the detailed measured values
Meas V. Plus
for each weighing. *2
Meas V. for each weighing. This is available only
Plus2 in the checkweigher equipped with the
M6-h series metal detector. *2
Selects the serial A input/output data format and number

of digits.
Serial2(A):Data ASCII absolute ASCII Outputs 6-digit ASCII code with
1
Format CW deviation * absolute absolute value.
CW absolute *1 CW Outputs in CW format with deviation
deviation*1 value.
absolute*1 value.
4 Maintenance
Selects the serial input/output A data length of measured

value output.
Text format of the measured value
Serial2(A): Var. Length Var. Length output is adjusted according to the
Meas. Output Fixed Length mass value.
The mass value is specified as 8-digit
Fixed Length fixed length. (G is included and blank
parts are specified as space)
5 Appendix
146
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
operation check in serial 2(A) I/O.
1 Basic Operations
No Does not output measured values.
No Yes Outputs measured values.
Serial2(A): Out Yes Outputs measured values with product

Expansion
when ope Expansion number added. *2
check Expansion 2 The measurement value is output
during an operation check together with
product No., product effect value and
Expansion 2
phase value. This setting is available for
detector. *2
Selects whether statistics data to output in serial A I/O or
Serial2(A): No not by operating Indicator.
TotalStats Out Yes No Not output.
Yes Outputs in statistics value format.
operation check in serial 2(A) I/O.

No
Serial2(A): No Does not output measured values.
Yes
ProdNo. link Yes Outputs measured values.
Expansion
Outputs measured values with product
Expansion
number added. *2
Selects whether to output them to the serial2(A) I/O when
Serial2(A):Err. No
Alarm Output Yes No
serial2(A) I/O.
Yes Outputs errors and alarms the serial2(A) I/O.
4 Maintenance
Selects whether to output equipment state change to the

Serial2(A): serial2(A) I/O.
No
State Chg. Does not output state change to the serial2(A)
Yes No
Output I/O.
Yes Outputs state change to the serial2(A) I/O.
Serial2(A): Item No
code Yes No
reader. Enter the user code using the touch panel.
5 Appendix
Yes The item code can be read by the barcode reader.
147
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Serial2(A): Item
2 Specifies the start digit of the item code in the product
code (start
1 Basic Operations
(1 to18) barcode.
digit)
Specifies the number digits of the item code in of the
Serial2(A): Item
6 product barcode.
code (digit
(0 to 18) If “0” is specified, the start digit and the subsequent digits
count)
are regarded as the item code.
Specifies whether to read the user code in the barcode of
the user by the barcode reader.
Serial2(A): User No
code Yes No
Yes The user code can be read by the barcode reader.
Serial2(A): User
1 Specifies the start digit of the user code in the barcode of
code (start
(1 to 10) the user.
digit)
Serial2(A): User
barcode of the user.
code (digit 0 (0 to 10)
If “0” is specified, the start digit and the subsequent digits
count)
are regarded as the user code.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
148
Serial3(B) settings
(Maint. and Setting → Unit/connected device set. → Serial connection → Serial3(B)
settings)
1 Basic Operations
* The items displayed differ depending on the Serial3(B):Connection setting.
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Select the connection method of Serial3(B) I/O.
Does not connect to the external
No
device.
No
Connects to the external device (other
Yes
Serial3(B): Yes than Anritsu Product, Labeler or Code
Anritsu Product
Connection Reader).
Labeler
Anritsu Product Connects to the Anritsu device.
Code Reader
Labeler Connects to the Labeler.
Makes a connection with a code
Code Reader
reader (optional).

Serial3(B): RS232C
Sets the transmission standard (transfer method).
transfer method Current loop
Serial3(B): 1200, 2400,
Selects the transfer speed of Serial3(B) I/O.
Transfer Speed 4800, 9600 bps
No
Serial3(B):
EVEN Selects the parity of Serial3(B) I/O.
Parity
ODD
Serial3(B): Stop 1
Selects the start/stop bit of Serial3(B) I/O.
Bit * Read only
Serial3(B): flow No Sets the flow control method of Serial3(B)
4 Maintenance
control RTS communication.

5 Appendix
149
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Selects the serial 3(B) input/output type.
No Outputs no data.
1 Basic Operations

Meas. Value
weighing.
Outputs batch mean value at the end of
No Mean Value
a batch.
Meas. Value Outputs batch statistics data at the end
Mean Value Stat. Value
of a batch.
Serial3(B): Stat. Value
Outputs data with product number
Output Meas. Output Meas. Output
added for each weighing.

Meas. Output2
Meas. Outputs data with product number
Meas V. Plus Output2 added for each weighing. *2
Meas V. Plus2
Meas V. Plus
for each weighing. *2
Meas V. for each weighing. This is available only
Plus2 in the checkweigher equipped with the
M6-h series metal detector. *2
Selects the serial B input/output data format and number

of digits.
Serial3(B): ASCII absolute ASCII Outputs 6-digit ASCII code with absolute
1
DataFormat CW deviation * absolute value.
CW absolute *1 CW Outputs in CW format with deviation
deviation*1 value.
absolute*1 value.
4 Maintenance
Selects the serial input/output B data length of measured

value output.
Text format of the measured value output
Serial3(B): Var. Length Var. Length
is adjusted according to the mass value.
Meas. Output Fixed Length
The mass value is specified as 8-digit
Fixed
fixed length. (G is included and blank
Length
parts are specified as space)
5 Appendix
150
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
operation check in serial 3(B) I/O.
1 Basic Operations
No Does not output measured values.
No Yes Outputs measured values.
Serial3(B): Out Yes Outputs measured values with product

Expansion
when ope Expansion number added. *2
check Expansion 2 The measurement value is output during
an operation check together with product
No., product effect value and phase
Expansion 2
value. This setting is available for
detector. *2
Selects whether statistics data to output in serial B I/O or
Serial3(B): No not by operating Indicator.
TotalStats Out Yes No Not output.
Yes Outputs in statistics value format.
Selects the type of product number link in serial 3(B) I/O.
Set this to No.

No
Serial3(B): No Does not output data.
Yes
ProdNo. link
Expansion Outputs data. *2

Selects whether to output them to the serial3(B) I/O when
Serial3(B): Err. No
Alarm Output Yes No
serial3(B) I/O.
Yes Outputs errors and alarms the serial3(B) I/O.
Selects whether to output equipment state change to the
4 Maintenance
Serial3(B): serial3(B) I/O.

No
State Chg. Does not output state change to the serial3(B)
Yes No
Output I/O.
Yes Outputs state change to the serial3(B) I/O.
Serial3(B): Item No
code Yes No
5 Appendix
Yes The item code can be read by the barcode reader.
151
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Serial3(B): Item
2 Specifies the start digit of the item code in the product
code (start
1 Basic Operations
(1 to18) barcode.
digit)
Specifies the number digits of the item code in of the
Serial3(B): Item
6 product barcode.
code (digit
count)
are regarded as the item code.
Specifies whether to read the user code in the barcode of
the user by the barcode reader.
Serial3(B): No
User code Yes No

Yes The user code can be read by the barcode reader.
Serial3(B):
1 Specifies the start digit of the user code in the barcode of
User code (start
(1 to 10) the user.
digit)
Serial3(B):
0 barcode of the user.
User code (digit
count)
are regarded as the user code.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
152
> Adjusting I/O Timing
This screen monitors input and output signals for external control. Use this screen for
input and output signals that require a timing adjustment.
1 Basic Operations
In the "Menu" screen, select "Maint. and
Setting"  "Unit/connected device set.”
From "Gen. I/O connection”, select "I/O
timing adjustment”.
The adjustment screen shown on the right is
displayed.

Description of the buttons on the top and bottom of the screen
Sets a channel to monitor trigger detection timing of [UP] and [DOWN] as

Trigger CH
set in the event.
DOWN Detects a signal when it goes from ON to OFF.
Event UP Detects a signal when it goes from OFF to ON.
No Does not detect events.
Loop Displays the signal regardless of events.
4 Maintenance
Display
Stationary Displays the signal when an event occurs.
When one of items 1 to 8 in the left side of the screen is tapped while
[Input] is displayed, the settings for the item such as signal type and delay
Input
time can be changed.
Signals must be set in advance.
When one of items 1 to 8 in the left side of the screen is tapped while [Set]
Set
is displayed, the signal to display is selected.
Get Starts capturing waveform data and displays the data.

5 Appendix
Clear Clears the signal displayed on the screen.
153
> Connecting Ethernet (LAN)
When connecting to the network via Ethernet, select "Maint. and Setting" 
"Unit/connected device set.”  "Network connection" in the "Menu" screen, and specify
1 Basic Operations
the settings by referring to the table below.
Network common settings

(Maintenance and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Network connection 
Network common settings)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
IP Address 192.168.0.100 Sets the IP address of the checkweigher.

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Sets the subnet mask of the checkweigher.
Default
192.168.0.1 Sets the default gateway of the checkweigher.
Gateway
The MAC address of the checkweigher. It cannot be
xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx changed.
MAC Address
* Read only The MAC address varies depending on the individual
item.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
154
Comm. content settings
Comm. content settings)
1 Basic Operations
* Prod. No. in the message corresponds to 3 digits (up to 200 products).
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Network: No
Sets whether to connect to the network.
Connection Yes
Standard
Network: Applicable
QUICCA Selects the applicable connection.
connection
Mobile monitor
Outputs measured value for each weighing.
Outputs measured value by
Variable Length adjusting text length according to
weight value.
Outputs weight value in 8-digit
Invld. Fixed length fixed length. (G is included and
Variable Length blank parts are specified as space)
Fixed Length Prod. Outputs measured value with
Prod. (variable (variable length) product number at variable length.
length)
Prod. Outputs measured value with

Prod. (Fixed (Fixed length) product number at fixed length.
Network: Individual length)
output Outputs detailed measured value
Detail Detail
for each weighing.
Prod.2 (variable
Outputs measured value in
length) Prod.2
variable length with product
Prod.2 (fixed (variable length)
number added. *
length)
Outputs measured value in fixed
Detail 2 Prod.2
length with product number added.
(fixed length)
*
Outputs detailed measured value
for each weighing. This setting is
Detail 2
available for Checkweigher with
M6-h series metal detector. *
4 Maintenance
Network: Mean No
Outputs batch mean value at the end of a batch.
value output Yes
No
Network: Statistics
Stat. Value Outputs batch statistics data at the end of a batch.
output
Stat. V. 2
5 Appendix
155
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
operation check in network I/O.
Does not output measured value at
1 Basic Operations
No
operation check.
No Outputs measured value at operation
Yes Yes
check.
Network: Out when
ope check Expansion Outputs measured values with product
Expansion 2 Expansion
number added. *
The measurement value is output during
an operation check together with product
Expansion
No., product effect value and phase value.
2
This setting is available for Checkweigher
with M6-h series metal detector. *
Selects the format of statistics data for the statistics

read command.
Network: Total stats. Stat. Value
Stat.
Contents Stat. V. 2 Outputs batch/total statistics data.
Value
Stat. V. 2 Outputs batch/total statistics data 2.
Selects the type of product number link output in
network I/O. Set this to No.
No
Network: Product No Does not output data.
Yes
link
Expansion Outputs data. *

Selects whether to notify the network when an error or
Network: Error No alarm occurs.
alarm output Yes No Does not output errors and alarms.
Yes Outputs errors and alarms.
Selects whether to output equipment state change to
Network: State No external device.
change output Yes No Does not output state change.
Yes Outputs state change.
Network:Ext. No
Leave it as No (Default setting).
4 Maintenance
system output Yes

5 Appendix
156
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Sets message format of Ethernet communication. When
connecting to QUICCA, follow the procedures in the
1 Basic Operations
Invld. QUICCA operation manual.
Network:ANP
version Version 1 Used when connected to other than
Invld.
QUICCA
Version 1 Used when connected to QUICCA
Selects operation when a communication alarm occurs
during operation.
When data accumulation function is available,
generates
Network:Proc. at Alarm alarm when communication is disconnected and
comm. alarm Error accumulation starts. After reaching limit, operates
according to the settings below.
Processes communication alarm as
Alarm
alarm.
Error Processes communication alarm as error.
This parameter specifies how long to wait before
regarding connection as being terminated for periodic
data reception from QUICCA (optional) or the PC, in

seconds since the last data was received. The
Network:Keep alive
10 communication status is not monitored if 0 is specified.
timer
The connection status is indicated by the connection
status icon on the QUICCA connection status display
screen. This parameter is valid if “Ethernet” is specified
for the “Data out device” parameter.
This is used to set the processing to perform if the
connection with QUICCA (optional) or the PC is
terminated during operation.
Network:Proc. upon No No No special operation is performed. 4 Maintenance
disconnect Yes Outputs a error or alarm when
disconnecting communication. Whether
Yes
error or alarm depends on the setting of
“Network:Proc. at comm. Alarm”.
Network: Data Sets whether data accumulation function is used.
No/Yes
accum. Function Displayed when using network ANP version 2.
This license is required when connecting to the
No specified QUICCA.
Network:
Yes
Connection license No The network connection is not licensed.
* Read only
5 Appendix
Yes The network connection is licensed.
157
Time synchronization setting
Time synchronization setting)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Network:SNTP time No Selects whether to perform time synchronization
sync. Yes with external server using NTP.
Network:SNTP
0 to 60 (10) min
connect interval (M)
Specifies interval of NTP synchronization.
Network:SNTP
0 to 59 (0) sec
connect interval (S)
Network:SNTP
255.255.255.255 Specifies IP address of NTP server.
server
Network:SNTP TD -23 to +23 (+9)
adjustment (H) hour Specifies time difference between installation site
Network:SNTP TD and Greenwich mean time.
0 to 59 (0) min
adjustment (M)
■ Setting on the PC
Start the "Command Prompt" on a PC connected to a common network, enter the ping
command with the IP address (e.g. ping 192.168.0.1), and press the [Enter] key.
For Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7, select "All

Programs"  "Accessories"  "Command
prompt" to open the command prompt.
For Windows 8, select "All apps" or

displayed at the bottom of the start screen,
and select "Command prompt" to open the
4 Maintenance
command prompt.
For Windows 10, select "All apps"  " Windows System Tool"  “Command prompt” to
open the command prompt.
5 Appendix
158
• Network status
(Maint. and Setting → Unit/connected
device set. → Network connection →
Network status)
1 Basic Operations
The network connection status is
displayed.
• Version upgrade
(Maint. and Setting → Unit/connected
device set. → Network connection
→Version upgrade)
This function updates the software of the
device. Use this function only when
requested by your dealer.
When the screen to the right is displayed, C:¥>ping 192.168.0.1 ← Command entered
network settings are complete. Pinging 192.168.0.1 with 32 bytes of data:

Reply from 192.168.0.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
Ping statistics for 192.168.0.1:

Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
159
Other Settings and Adjustments
> Performing an installation check

Installation check
(Maintenance and Setting → Installation check)
1 Basic Operations
 P. 29 Turning on the System for the First Time
> Adjusting Touch Screen

If the system does not respond when a screen button or key is pressed, perform
readjustment in the following steps.
Center of the screen

1 With the power switch turned OFF, turn
on the power switch while pressing the

center of the screen. "Touch Upper Left" Power switch button
is displayed on the screen.
Square
2 Press the square button on the screen. button
3 Press the (1), (2), and (3) square buttons

in this order. "Push [YES] button" is
displayed, and a 15-second countdown
starts.
（1）
4 Before the countdown is complete, press

[Yes]. The adjustment will be completed, （2）
（3）
and the [Start] screen is displayed a few
seconds later.
4 Maintenance
Push [YES] button : 10
If you choose not to press [YES] before the end of YES YES
countdown, the system returns to Step 2.
5 Appendix
160
> Checking Version Info
Press Help [?] → [Version Info.] to display
the checkweigher model, serial number,
1 Basic Operations
version information of the software, and
details on options.
> Changing and Initializing Password
The password can be changed or initialized by following the steps below.
1 In the "Menu" screen, by selecting "Control Panel"  "Password Change", "Password

Change" screen will be displayed. Tap [Next].

2 Press [Next] and select change or
initialization.

4 Maintenance
Changing the password

5 Appendix
161
▼ Changing the password
3 Select the access level.
1 Basic Operations
Selecting the Manager Level
4 Enter "Current password”. When the box is pressed, the keypad will be displayed.
Enter the password and press [OK].

Password input screen
When [Next] is pressed, the screen

shown right is displayed. Similarly, use
the keypad to enter a new password two
times.
Enter a password using 18 characters or less.

Only numbers, letters, or a combination can
be used. Operation can be done without
4 Maintenance
setting any password. When [Next] is pressed

with a blank box, the message "New
Password is blank. Access level can be
changed without entering a password." is
displayed. Press [Yes].
When "Completing password change" is

displayed, press [Completed].
5 Appendix
162
▼ Initializing the password
3 Select "Initialize Password", select the
target access level, and press [Yes].
1 Basic Operations
When the initialization is completed
successfully, the following screen is
displayed. Press [Completed].
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
163
> Setting the Date and Time
1 When top area of the screen with date
and time is pressed, the input screen is
1 Basic Operations
displayed
2 Set Year, Month, and Day in the upper

column, and Time in the lower column.

When the text box is pressed, the keypad
is displayed. Enter a value and press
[OK].
Upper column:Year/Month/Day
Lower column:Hour:Minute:Second
After entering values, press [OK] to finish

setting.
Entering “Hour”
Unable to set Date and Time when history reaches to maximum number of recording.
In order to use function again, unseal the machine and clear the history.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
164
> Setting the Language
1 Press "Language" in the "Menu" screen.
Or press “?” icon, and select [Language].
1 Basic Operations
2 Select the language and press [OK].
Setting to English display
> Changing the Display Language
By registering the product names and the user names in two languages in advance, the
display language can be switched to suit each operator.

The display can be switched.
Registering product names in two languages. Displaying in the “Product list” screen.
* Access level 2 or higher is required to set.
1 In the “Menu” screen, select “Control

Panel”  “Regional and Language” 
4 Maintenance
“Standard language”.
5 Appendix
165
2 Select “Standard language” and press
[OK].
1 Basic Operations
The display language is switched

depending on the settings of “Standard
language” and “Display language”.
The following table shows an example when specifying Portuguese as [Disp Type1]
and English as [Disp Type2].
Setting of Standard
Auto Portuguese English
language
Setting of Language Portuguese English Portuguese English Portuguese English

Product Product Product Product Product Product
Display of Product Name Name Name name 2 name 2 Name
Name * Product Name is * The product name is switched between Product
always displayed. Name and Product name 2.
▪ When starting up, the display language is the one specified as standard language.When
specifying the standard language setting to “Auto”, the display language is the one specified
as the display language.
▪ Specify the product name to be displayed in either of the following methods:
(1) Disp Type1 and Disp Type2 in the “Enter Product Information” screen
 P. 37 Registering a New product – Step 4
(2) Product Name and Product name2 in the “Product information” screen
 P. 57 Product information
* For M5, use method (2) for setting.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
166
■ Switching display language on Product list and User list screens
When pressing [Fn] button on the lower right of the screen while the product list is
displayed in the language specified in [Product Name], [Product name change] appears
on top of the submenu list. Press [Product name change] to display the names in the
1 Basic Operations
language specified in [Product name 2]. To display the product names in the language
specified in [Product Name], follow the same procedure to switch the language from
[Product Name] to [Product name 2].
Switching display language (for product names)

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
167
> Setting Conveyor Speed
This is to set the conveyor speed of the main unit and rejector to be connected.
It is optional for M5.
1 Basic Operations
Set main conveyor

(Maintenance and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Conveyor  Set main
conveyor)
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default: _)
Sets the CW conveyor higher speed according to the
Main Conveyor 50 m/min
product settings.
Speed (High)*1 (0 to 120)
Unable to chang after machine sealing.
Sets the CW conveyor lower speed according to the
Main Conveyor 50 m/min
product settings.
Speed (Low)*2 (0 to 120)
Main Conveyor 50 m/min Set the common CW conveyor speed to all products.
Speed*3 (0 to 120) Unable to chang after machine sealing.
*1 and *2 can be set when the conveyor speed is “2 Speed”, and *3 can be set when the
conveyor speed is set to “Fixed”.
RJ conveyor settings
(Maintenance and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Conveyor  RJ conveyor
settings)
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default: _)
RJ Conveyor Speed 50 m/min
Sets RJ conveyor speed to high.
(High)*1 (0 to 120)
4 Maintenance
Sets RJ conveyor speed to low.

(Low)*2 (0 to 120)
50 m/min
RJ Conveyor Speed*3 Sets RJ conveyor speed.
(0 to 120)
*1 and *2 can be set when the conveyor speed is “2 Speed”, and *3 can be set when the
conveyor speed is set to “Fixed”.
5 Appendix
168
> Statistics Control
This is to make detailed settings for the statistics.
1 Basic Operations
Basic Statistics Setting
(Stats Control  Basic Statistics Setting)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Selects contents of printed/output statistics
Note: Automatically selected as PASS product with
EEC function.
All Prints statistics data for all products
All Prints and outputs the statistics for
Statistics Only Pass PASS products only (PASS statistics).
Only Pass
This applies to individual printing as
Both
well.
Prints and outputs both the total
statistics and PASS statistics (to serial
Both
I/O and USB memory). For individual
printing, the total statistics are printed.

This sets the statistics printing contents.
Prints dispersion range, maximum
weight and minimum weight at total
statistics print.
All Data
Range = Max – Min. Max and Min are
the maximum and minimum values of
all the data.
All Data
Statistics Print Select Prints mean dispersion, maximum
Batch Data
deviation, and minimum deviation at
total statistics print.
Range Mean indicates the mean value
4 Maintenance
Batch Data
of the range per batch.
Max D. and Min D. indicate the
maximum and minimum values of the
standard deviation per batch.
Sets statistics pattern
Note: B pattern cannot be specified with EEC function.
Pattern A At MDNG and EXNG, does not increment
Statistics Pattern Pattern A
Pattern B -NG, PASS and +NG counts
At MDNG and EXNG, increments -NG,
5 Appendix
Pattern B
PASS and +NG counts
169
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Selects Batch Cycle units
1 Basic Operations
Uses count as batch cycle units

For example, when the statistics batch is set
Count
Count to 10, statistics printing is performed at
Batch Cycle Unit
Hour every 10 weight measurements.
Uses time (minutes) as batch cycle units
For example, when the statistics batch is set
Hour
to 10, statistics printing is performed every
10 minutes.
Selects statistical process when weighed-product

count reaches 1 million
Does not display alarm even when
weighed-product count reaches 1 million.
The display count is cleared to 0 and the count
re-starts. Select “None” when the count
display is used without requiring all the
No statistical data. As a result, it is possible to use
the count display continuously without clearing
the count. However, count displays in the

“X-bar” screen and “Histogram” screen are not
cleared and statistical calculation in batch
stops.
No
Statistics Overflow Displays alarm "A006: STAT OVERFLOW"
Yes
when weighed-product count reaches 1
million.
The subsequent measurement results are not
saved in the statistics, and are not printed or
output individually unless the statistics are
cleared. Select “Yes” when all the statistical
Yes
4 Maintenance
data are required. To obtain correct total

statistics, always clear the statistical data
periodically before the count reaches 1 million.
When the “A006 alarm” is displayed, print the
total statistical data, and clear the data. The
CW will then start saving the measured weights
for statistics including total statistics again.
5 Appendix
170
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Specifies whether to clear the current statistics when
the product is changed.
1 Basic Operations
Product Change No The statistics are not cleared when the
No
Stats Clear Yes product is changed.
The current statistics are cleared when the
Yes
product is changed.
If "Yes" is set, statistics data is saved to USB when
statistics are cleared.
USB Stats Save At No Statistics data is not saved to USB when statistics are
Stats Clear Yes cleared from "Serial", "Ethernet", or "General I/O". It
cannot be used with "Smart Guide" or "Product
Change Stats Clear".
> Setting Weighcell

This is to make detailed settings for the weigh cell.
Zeroset settings
(Maintenance and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Weighcell  Zeroset

settings)
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default: _)
Selects zero-setting operation
Not necessary to change setting in normal use
Automatically set to “Auto” after machine sealing.
Auto Enables auto zero-setting function
Auto-zerosetting
External When the interval between products
Auto
increases during operation, auto 4 Maintenance
zero-setting is performed.
External Performs zero-setting by external input
1% Selects auto-zeroset range for weight range
Auto-zeroset Range
0.1% Select ±1% or ±0.1%.
Sets Zeroset Alarm Time
0 (minute) If auto zero setting cannot be performed for specified
Zero-setting Alarm
(0 to 99) time, “A011 Auto Zeroset Alarm” is displayed and “PRE
STOP” output signal outputs.
Zero-setting Alarm Nonstop
5 Appendix
Selects zeroset alarm stop processing ON/OFF

Processing Stop
171
Weighcell settings
(Maintenance and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Weighcell  Set weighcell)
Setting
Name Explanation
1 Basic Operations
(Default: _)
Sets whether or not to round the weight to the nearest
zero.
No
Zero Rounding When Yes is selected, weights near zero (within ±0.1%
Yes
of weight range) are displayed as 0 g.
Inputs Ultra Under Limit.
The Ultra Under Limit is used to exclude products that
are very much lighter than the reference value from the
0.00 statistics targets.

Ultra Under Limit (0 to Weight If a product is lighter than the Ultra Under Limit, it is
Range) neither included in the statistics data nor individual
printing (even if individual printing is set to “All”).
However, the rejection signal is output.
When "Abs. Value" is selected, the absolute weight
value is displayed at the "Home" screen.
Abs. Value When "Deviation" is selected, the deviation weight
Weight Value
Deviation value is displayed at the "Home" screen.
(Deviation weight = Absolute weight - Reference
weight)
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
172
> Security and Rules
This is to set prohibited items regarding the operation.
1 Basic Operations
Policy settings view
(Maintenance and Setting  Security and rules  Policy settings list)
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default: _)
Used to disable to change parameters during
Change Parameter Enable operation.
(ope.) Disable Automatically set to “Disable” after a certification seal
is affixed.
Used to disable to change product during operation.
Enable
Chg. Prod. (ope.) Automatically set to “Disable” after a certification seal
Disable
is affixed.
Selects CW conveyor operation at error
Automatically set to “Stop” after a certification seal is
affixed.
Does not stop conveyor. Products are
rejected in the direction set at the “ALARM

Nonstop
Nonstop direction” column on the “RJ direction
Processing Error
Stop settings” screen.
Stops conveyor. When the conveyor is
stopped, selection of “Stop” and “Nonstop”
Stop settings for the “NG Rate Alarm
Processing” and “Zeroset Alarm
Processing” alarms is enabled.
Selects operation for +NG products.
* If OK is specified, +NG product data is not
included in the PASS statistics.
Rejects +NG products or stop conveyor for
4 Maintenance
NG +NG products in accordance with setting for

NG
+NG Product “NG product”.
OK
Does not reject +NG products. +NG products
are classified as PASS products. At statistics
OK count they are calculated as +NG products.
Because +OVF product is not correctly
measured, it is +NG product evaluation.
5 Appendix
173
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default: _)
Selects checkweigher conveyor operation for NG
products.
1 Basic Operations
This setting is given to priority more than the setting

in the "RJ direction settings" screen when this setting
is "Stop" and the setting in the "RJ direction settings"
screen is given to priority when this setting is "Non
Stop".
* If the "NG Product" parameter is set to "Stop”, the
evaluation output is held even when the conveyor
Nonstop
NG Product*1 is stopped by NG product evaluation. The
Stop evaluation output is released when the [Stop]
button is pressed. "Stop" setting for RJ direction

parameter at the "RJ Direction Setting" screen
works in the same manner.
When it is set to “Stop”, the product may flow
downstream on the conveyor without stopping.
Does not stop conveyor. The rejector is
Nonstop
used to reject unacceptable products.
Stop Stops conveyor. The rejector is not used.
Selects the conveyor operation when the network

Stop at communication alarm occurs.
Nonstop
communication
Stop Nonstop Does not stop conveyor.
alarm
Stop Stops conveyor.
The errors/alarms cannot be released at
None
Error/Alarm Batch None once by pressing the [Stop] button.
Release [Stop] button [Stop] The errors/alarms can be released at
button once by pressing the [Stop] button.
Product reg. navi: Yes Displays HIS setting in the items of “Register new
HIS No product.” when “Yes” is set.
4 Maintenance
Product reg. navi:

Yes Displays FOCUS setting in the items of “Register
FOCUS
No new product.” when “Yes” is set.
Product reg. navi:

Yes Displays auto-limit setting in the items of “Register
Auto-limit
No new product.” when “Yes” is set.
The errors/alarms cannot be released at

None
Error/Alarm Batch None once by pressing the [Stop] button.
Release [Stop] button [Stop] The errors/alarms can be released at once
5 Appendix
button by pressing the [Stop] button.
174
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default: _)
Does not display the evaluation value in the
No “General” and “Sensitivity Adjustment”
1 Basic Operations
Evaluation value No screens.
display Yes Displays the evaluation value in the
Yes “General” and “Sensitivity Adjustment”
screens.
Sets whether to display the screen for selecting
whether to display the Confirmation at installation
At start/inst check No screen at system startup.
display Yes
No Do not display
Yes Display
The access level at power-on can be configured.
Auto The access level when the power is next
turned on depends on the access level
when the power was last turned off.
Access level at start Auto
Access level at Access level at
of work 1a power-off next power-on
1a 1a

1b, 2 1b
1a The access level at power-on is 1a.

This parameter is used to set a release limitation by a
(Max. password when releasing an alarm. The input of a
Alarm Reset
alphabetical18 password set here can release an alarm. An
Password
characters) erroneous input of a password cannot release the
password.
You are required to enter a password
Error/Alarm
Subject to set Error/Alarm to release errors and alarms.
password Error You are required to enter a password
Error
4 Maintenance
to release errors.
Auto Logoff Time automatically changes the access
level to 1a if the inspection system is not operated for
Auto Logoff Time 0 to 60 (Min.) a certain period of time after switching to the
manager level (Access level 2). If 0 is set, the auto
log-off time becomes invalid.
*1 “+NG Product” and “NG Product” are displayed when “Common” is specified for
“Common/By product”.
Common/By product
5 Appendix
(Maintenance and Setting  Security and rules  Common/By product)
175
Common/By product
(Maintenance and Setting  Security and rules  Common/By product)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default: _)
Setting related to +NG product processing.
Specifies that +NG product processing be
performed in the same way by all equipment.
Common
Sets +NG product processing in the policy
+NG Product Common setting list to NG or OK.
(operation) By product Specifies +NG product processing by product.
“Menu” → “Adjust registered products” → “RJ
By
operation adjustment” → “RJ Parameter list”

product
→ “+NG product process (by prod.)” and then
set.
Specifies settings related to the process of the NG (failed)
products.
Specifies the motion to process the NG
(failed) products as the common settings.
Common Specifies either “Stop” or “Nonstop” in “NG
product process” from the “Policy Setting List”
Common/ Common
screen.
By product By product
Specifies on how to process NG (failed)
products by registered product.
By “Menu” → “Adjust registered products” → “RJ
product operation adjustment” → “RJ Parameter list”
→ “NG product process (by prod.)” and then
set.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
176
> Specifying the installation check settings
Installation check setting
(Maintenance and Setting  Installation check  Installation check setting)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Sets whether to display the screen for selecting
whether to display the Confirmation at installation
At start/inst check No screen at system startup.
display Yes
No Do not display
Yes Display
This records whether "Cautions for safety" on the
Check cautions for Unfinished
Confirmation at installation screen has been
safety Finished
performed. This parameter cannot be changed.
This records whether "Handling caution 1" on the
Check handling Unfinished
caution 1 Finished
This records whether "Handling caution 2" on the
Check handling Unfinished
caution 2 Finished

This records whether "Installation precaution" on the
Check installation Unfinished
precaution Finished
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
177
> Other Functions
■ Photocell monitoring
(Maintenance and Setting  Functions  Photocell monitoring)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default: _)
Sets error detection operation of photocell for
measurement.
Photocell error occurs when product
ON interrupts photocell for time set at
ON "Photocell Error Time”.
Photocell Error Notify
ON/OFF In addition to the above error detection,
a photocell error also occurs when a

ON/OFF product moves onto the weigh
conveyor without interrupting the
photocell while the conveyor is running.
Inputs time that photosensor detects time error. The
error is generated when the interrupted time of the
photo sensor exceeds the set time. The default is 7 s.
7s The set time can be shortened if it is too long.
Photocell Error Time
(1 to 9s) However, do not set the time shorter than the product
interrupt time, because an error will occur each time

a product passes. When the EEC function is used,
this parameter is disabled and is not displayed.
Set how to release the following photocell errors.
Normally, a photocell error is automatically released
when the cause is improved. Set “Manual” when you
operate the equipment by entering the release
password.
▪ Photocell error E011
▪ RJ photocell error E352, A352
Auto ▪ Photocell of Metal detector unit error E511
4 Maintenance
Clear photo
tran/recverror Manual A photocell error is automatically
released when the cause is improved.
Auto You can release the error manually.
However, the photocell error persists if
the cause of the error is not improved.
When you find a photocell error, clear
Manual the cause and press the [//Reset]
button.
5 Appendix
178
■ Smart Guide setting
(Maintenance and Setting  Functions  Smart Guide)
Setting
Name Explanation
1 Basic Operations
(Default: _)
Sets ON/OFF of the function that displays operation
instructions to operate the checkweigher properly on
No
Smart guide the screen.
Standard
If the setting value is Standard, operation instructions
are displayed on the screen.
Displays the [Register new product] button in the
“Phase 2” screen when using smart guide.
No
Does not display the [Register new
1a No
Phase 2: Prod Reg. product] button.
1b
Displays the [Register new product]
2
1a to 2 button when the access level is equal to
or higher than the specified level.
Displays the [Adjust detection sensitivity] button in
the “Phase 2” screen when using smart guide.
No
Does not display the [Adjust detection
Phase 2: Detect. 1a No
sensitivity] button.

Sense. Adj. 1b
Displays the [Adjust detection sensitivity]
2
1a to 2 button when the access level is equal to
or higher than the specified level.
Displays the [Ope. Chk at prod.] button in the “Phase
4” screen when using smart guide.
No
Does not display the [Ope. Chk at prod.]
Phase 4: Ope. Chk 1a No
button.
at prod. 1b
Displays the [Ope. Chk at prod.] button
2
1a to 2 when the access level is equal to or
higher than the specified level.
4 Maintenance
If you are using the Smart Guide, this setting toggles

Print statistics at end No
the function to automatically print statistics data at
of production Yes
the end of production on and off.
Eva/RJ Confirmation No If "Yes" is set, tap [Others] button to display
Details Yes evaluation/rejection results of smart guide.
5 Appendix
179
■ Full detection
(Maintenance and Setting  Functions  Full detection)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default: _)
When using the “Full Detection” function, which
detects the full state at the box for NG products or
pass products, this sets the target for full counting
from input of the box-full signal input until the
conveyor stops.
Pass * This is enabled only when “FULL” is set at “Input
BoxFull Target
NG port” and “Output port” in the “I/O Setting” screen.
Stops conveyor when pass product
Pass
count reaches set full count.
Stops conveyor when NG product
NG
count reaches set full count.
Set the time from the full detection signal on to the
Box full monitoring 5 seconds occurrence of an alarm. Set the time so that no
time (1 to 10 seconds) product overflows from the NG box before an alarm
occurs.
An alarm occurs at full detection and
gives a warning. An error occurs and

stops the conveyor when a box-full
Error/alarm
quantity of products flows in the box.
Set 0 to 9998 for box-full quantity to
Error/alarm
At full detect generate an error.
Alarm
In the case of full detection, the
conveyor stops when alarm A070
Alarm occurs for warning and products for
“BoxFull Qty.” flow into the box. At this
time, E070 does not occur.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
180
Full Detection Input and Output
When boxes are installed at the weighed product classification outlet, products may not
be correctly classified or products may overflow if the boxes become full. Full detection
I/O avoids this problem.
1 Basic Operations
外部(ボックス)
External (box)
① 重量選別機
Checkweigher
② 外部(パトライト)
External
(Warning light)
Full count start

満杯個数カウント開始
Full detect input

満杯検出入力
満杯検出出力
Full detect output
"A070 Box FULL" display
「A070 ボックス FULL」表示
5s 1s 個数カウントリセット
Count reset alarm
アラーム表示解除
display released
Conveyor Start/Stop Start 運転

コンベア運転/停止状態
status 停止
Stop

［ストップ］ボタン後の
Operation restart by pressing
［スタート］ボタンで再運転
[Start] button
[1] Detection full input (signal name: FULL)

This input is for detecting the full status. When this input is continuously ON for more
than 5 seconds, the Indicator displays the “A070 Box Full” alarm to turn the Full
detection output to ON and full counting starts. When the count reaches the set full
count (except when it is set to 0 or 9999), the checkweigher conveyors will forcibly be
stopped. When Full Count reaches the set condition, the conveyor stops and
simultaneously displays the alarm. When Full Count does not reach the set condition,
the conveyor does not stop.
4 Maintenance
The input signal logic can be reversed by changing the input logic setting.
[2] Detection full output (Signal name: FULL)

This output goes ON when the Full detection input is ON for 5 seconds. It goes OFF
when the Full detection input is OFF.
5 Appendix
181
■ NG rate
(Maintenance and Setting  Functions  NG rate)
Setting
Name Explanation
1 Basic Operations
(Default: _)
Set whether NG rate alarm function available or not.
No The NG rate alarm is output when the NG rate in the
NG Rate
Yes NG rate batch exceeds the set value. Set the NG rate
(%) and NG rate batch at "Product settings”.
NG Rate Alarm Nonstop
Selects NG Alarm stop processing ON/OFF.
Processing Stop
NG Rate Alarm Output

This signal is output when a rate of faulty products (+/- NG. products) exceeds a certain
set value. It is used to monitor a line error such as an operation error of the preceding
filling machine.
Going back by the batch quantity for NG rate (100 pcs. if the batch quantity for NG rate is
100 or more) from the latest weighed products, the signal is output when the number of
faulty products exceeds the set NG rate (0 to 100%); its output continues until a rate of
faulty products drops below the set NG rate.
Example: When the batch quantity for NG rate is 10 and NG rate is 30%.
If 3 (10 x 30%) or more faulty products are included in the latest 10 pieces, an
NG rate alarm occurs.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
OK NG OK OK OK OK OK NG OK OK NG OK NG NG
○ △ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ △ ○ ○ △ ○ △ △
2 NG products
NG2 個
3 NG products
NG3 個
4 Maintenance
2NG2
NG products
個
3 NG products
NG3 個
4 NG products
NG4 個
不良率 NG
NG Rate 出力 OFF
Alarm
Output ON
If a rate of faulty products exceeds the set NG rate prior to reaching the batch quantity for
NG rate after starting operation, NG rate alarm output turns on. At power-on, or if
operation is suspended, the previous faulty product data is cleared. This function does not
5 Appendix
work if the NG rate or the batch quantity for NG rate is 0.
182
Timing Chart (When
タイムチャート suspended due to an error)
（異常時停止の場合）
・測
■ 定
Measurement
(T1 to evaluation time)
(T1～判定時間) NG Rate Alarm
↓不良率 NG と判断Output
1 Basic Operations
OFF
■ Evaluated as NG
・不良率 NG 出力 ON
Rate Alarm
■ Motor-ON Output
OFF
・モータオン出力 ON
・ブザー出力
■ Buzzer output OFF
ON
Operating Recovery Key
復帰キー操作 CE
■ Counter preset
(Maintenance and Setting  Functions  Counter preset)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Selects the counting target when “Counter preset”
PASS used.
Preset Pattern ALL PASS Only pass products

RJ1 to RJ5 ALL All products
RJ1 to RJ5 Products rejected to each RJ direction
■ Product check setting

(Maintenance and Setting  Functions  Product check setting)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Enables and disables the product check function.
The product check function is used to correct the
4 Maintenance
Product Check Yes phases of inspected products during metal

Function No contaminant inspection.
“Product check setting” is displayed on the Product
settings screen when this parameter is set to “Yes”.
Set the processing at the end of product check.
Stop Stop Stops the operation.
Product Check
Operation Operation Proceeds with production.
Finish Proc.
Stop Abnormal Stop Stops the operation if an error
Abnormal occurs.
5 Appendix
183
■ NGBox door monitoring time
(Maintenance and Setting  Functions  Electronic locked NGBox setting)
Setting
Name Explanation
1 Basic Operations
(Default: _)
This function is used to notify the alarm when the
unacceptable-product box that is installed to the
rejector is opened for the specified time or longer.
Yes
NGBox Lock Alarm can be released by the operation on the
No
screen. In addition, closing all of the
unacceptable-product boxes to be installed
automatically releases alarm.
This parameter is used to set a time for monitoring
NGBox Monitor 5 seconds the open status of an NG reception box. An A072

Time (1 to 30) NGBox Open alarm occurs when the open status
continues for more than the specified time.
Alarm Alarm An alarm occurs at NGBox open.
At NGBox open
Error Error An error occurs at NGBox open.
■ Auto-limit setting
(Maintenance and Setting  Functions  Auto-limit setting)
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default: _)
Sets the count to feed through products when using
the auto-limit setting while the conveyor is running.
20
Auto-limit count Statistics are counted because this operation is
(5 to 99)
performed while in the normal production state.
If a product is evaluated as NG, it is not counted.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
184
■ RJ check (optional)
(Maintenance and Setting  Functions  RJ Check Setting)
Setting
Name Description
1 Basic Operations
(Default: _)
Set how to generate the following RJ check error.
▪ Rejector operation error E015, A015
▪ OK not passed E031, A031
▪ NG product passed E032, A032
▪ NG product rejection error E033, A033
▪ OK product rejected E034, A034
▪ NG product rejection error E035, A035
▪ Non-evaluation rejecting E036, A036
▪ RJ3 acceptance path conveyance fail E081, A081
▪ Detection of uninspected prod. in RJ3 accept. path
E083, A083
▪ RJ1 reject path sort failure E084, A084
▪ Detection of uninspected prod. in RJ1 reject path
E086, A086

Alarm ▪ RJ5 reject path sort failure E088, A088
At RJ check error
Error ▪ Detection of uninspected prod. in RJ5 reject path
E089, A089
▪ Detection of uninspected prod. in RJ3 reject path
E283, A283
▪ RJ1 acceptance path conveyance fail E285, A285 4 Maintenance
E286, A286
E289, A289
▪ Excess product length detected by sorter E290,
A290
Alarm An alarm occurs at RJ check error.
5 Appendix
Error An error occurs at RJ check error.
185
> User Information
This is to specify the user information.
1 Basic Operations
User
(Maint. and Setting  Maintenance Information  User Information  User)
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default: _)
Company name and installation line name can be

User
entered (up to 15 characters).
> Setting Screen Brightness and Key Touch Operation

This is to specify the screen brightness, back light off, and key touch operation.
Display settings
(Control Panel  Display settings)
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default: _)
4, 3, 2, 1, 0, -1, Adjusts back light brightness.

Screen brightness
-2, -3, -4 The default "4" is the brightest setting.
Sets the time to turn off the screen light.
When it is set to 0, the screen will never turn off.
Back light out 0 to 30 (min)
To re-display the screen, touch the screen or press
the Home button.
Key touch operation

(Control Panel  Key touch operation)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
4 Maintenance
Sets ON/OFF of the touch sound at key/screen

Key Touch Sound ON/OFF
operation.
Specify the keyboard layout.
Displays the QWERTY screen. Note
Auto that the ABCDEF screen is displayed if
Auto
Keyboard Layout QWERTY the screen display language is
Japanese.
ABCDEF
QWERTY Displays the QWERTY screen.
ABCDEF Displays the ABCDEF screen.
5 Appendix
186
1 Basic Operations
QWERTY screen ABCDEF screen
> Entering Device Information

Enters the information for identifying the device.
Device Information settings
(Maint. and Setting  Device Information  Device Information settings)
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default: _)
0000
Line Name Sets "Line Name" to identify the checkweigher.
(up to 4 characters)

00
Sub-number Sets "Sub-number" to identify the checkweigher.
(00 to 99)
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
187
Options and Peripheral Devices
> Setting Signal Tower and Buzzer

If the optional signal tower or buzzer is installed, set it in the following steps.
1 Basic Operations
1 Select the "Menu" screen  "Maint. and Setting"  "Unit/connected device set." 
"Signal tower"  "Signal tower common Set."
2 In the "Signal tower common Set."

screen, set Signal Tower to "Yes". Set the
number of lights and the colors of the
lights by referring to the table below.
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default: _)
No Sets the presence of the signal tower or
Signal Tower
Yes buzzer.
3 Sets the number of lamps to 3.
Number of Lights
(0 to 3) For the buzzer, set Number of Lamps to 3.
Sets the color of the 1st lamp of the signal
One Red/Yellow/Green/Blue/White
tower.
4 Maintenance
Sets the color of the 2nd lamp of the signal

Two Red/Yellow/Green/Blue/White
tower .
Sets the color of the 3rd lamp of the signal
Three Red/Yellow/Green/Blue/White
tower.
Resetting the signal tower
Disabling buzzer sound only

Press the sound button at the top of the screen.
(lamps still illuminate)
5 Appendix
Disabling buzzer sound and lamps Press the [//] button at the top of the screen.
188
3 Select the item to set in the "Sig. tower
settings" screen and press [Input]. Set
the Op method and Op Time by referring
to the table below.
1 Basic Operations
Event
When the "Event" box is pressed, the input screen is displayed.
Event Operation timing Pulse Hold 1 Hold 2 Standard

None Disables the set event. - - - -
Stop Conveyor stopped Disable Disable Disable Enable
Operation Conveyor ON Disable Disable Disable Enable
Ope.Check Operation check Disable Disable Disable Enable
Error Error occurred Disable Disable Disable Enable
Alarm occurrs and product is
Alarm Disable Disable Disable Enable
discharged in alarm direction.
OK OK evaluation Enable Enable Enable Disable

All NG NG evaluation Enable Enable Enable Disable
Weight +NG +NG evaluation Enable Enable Enable Disable
Weight -NG -NG evaluation Enable Enable Enable Disable
Weight NG +NG or -NG evaluation Enable Enable Enable Disable
MDNG MDNG occurred Enable Enable Enable Disable
Conveyor NG D-Prod. evaluation or length
Enable Enable Enable Disable
(D-Prod. etc) exceeded
Length error of Metal detection
Product NG Enable Enable Enable Disable
unit (A505) occurred
External NG External NG evaluation Enable Enable Enable Disable
4 Maintenance
External NG 2 External NG 2 evaluation Enable Enable Enable Disable

According to the setting of OUTP1
OUTP1 Arbitrary Arbitrary Arbitrary Arbitrary
of general I/O output
For OUTP1 to 3, the operation method and operation time set on the I/O setting screen
5 Appendix
are used.
189
The settings specified in OUTP1 to OUTP3 of general I/O output can be used as a signal
tower event. OUTP1 to OUTP3 can be set in the I/O Output screen
Available events are shown in the table below.
1 Basic Operations
I/O output signal

RJ Alarm Direction
Upstream Stop
Measurable
NG Rate
+Mean alarm
-Mean alarm
RJ Check Error Output

Printer Paper Out Alarm
Counter Preset
Full Detection
Conveyor Error Output
Reference Value Alarm
Serial Communication
Alarm
USB Memory-Related
Alarm
READY
NGBOX OPEN RJ1
NGBOX OPEN RJ2
NGBOX OPEN RJ4
NGBOX OPEN RJ5
MD Conveyor Mode
Output
4 Maintenance
Op method
When the "Op method" box is pressed, the input screen is displayed.
Op method Operation
Standard Operates as described in the event.
Pulse Operates during the Op Time.
Hold 1 Operates until the end of evaluation of the next product.
Hold 2 Operates until the Reset button on the screen is pressed to reset.
5 Appendix
190
Illumination method
When the level box of the tower is pressed, the input screen is displayed.
Illumination method Operation
1 Basic Operations
Off Turns it off.
No change Does not affect the light.
On Turns it on.
Blink 1 Repeats short blinks.
Blink 2 Repeats long blinks.
Blink 3 Repeats short blinks with a break in between sets.
Beep method
When the top level box of the tower is pressed, the input screen is displayed.
Beep method Operation

Mute Turns off the sound.
No change Does not affect the beep sound.
Beep 1 Generates short beeps.
Beep 2 Generates long beeps.

Op Time
When the "Op Time" text box is pressed,
the input screen is displayed.
This is the time for which the signal tower
is operated when [Op method] is set to
[Pulse].
Op Time input screen

4 Maintenance
■ Adding a new event

To add a new event, select a blank line
as shown right, and press the [Input]
button.
5 Appendix
Selecting a blank event
191
■ Sequence change
Sets the lamp to highlight (give preference) at the upper tier.
1 Basic Operations
1 Press [Seq. chg] to set the lamp to

highlight (give preference) in an earlier
number.
(Example) Selecting the 2nd event
2 When the up arrow button in the right end

of the screen is pressed, the selected
event moves to the top.
Moves to the top
■ Delete event
Select the event and press the [Delete] button at the bottom of the screen.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
192
> Setting a Printer
This section describes the printer settings when the optional printer is installed.
1 Basic Operations
■ Setting a printer to use
Printer settings
(Menu → Maint. and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Printer  Printer
settings)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: _)
Sets printer disable or enable Data printer or
commercially used printer.
Disable Disable Not used
Excl. Use
Printer Excl. Use Optional Data printer used
General 1
General 2 Commercially manufactured printer
General 1,
used. For the model that can be used,
General 2
consult Anritsu Infivis.
■ Selecting printer output target product

1 In the "Menu" screen, select "USB
memory/printer"  "Output to printer”,
and press "Set”.
2 Select the products (all or one product) to

print out.
4 Maintenance
To select only one product, touch the text

box to display the Product Table screen.
Select the product and press [OK].
In the right screen, press [Printout] to
start printing.
To feed paper without printing, press [Feed].

5 Appendix
Output all product data during suspension. You cannot output the data during operation.
193
■ Settings for products other than print target products
(Menu → Maint. and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Printer  Printer output
settings)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Normal
Print Direction Sets the print direction.
Reverse
No Sets whether or not to print a histogram.
Histogram Print
Yes A histogram is printed at batch statistics printing.
No Sets whether or not to print time. Individual printing
Time Print
Yes contents depend on the setting of “Individual Print”.
Selects print contents for individual products.

* Individual print is not performed when "Statistics
Print" is set to "PASS and "Individual Print" is set to
"NG Prod. Only”. If "All" or "Only NG" is specified, be
sure to stop the conveyor before turning off the
system. If you turn off the system without stopping the
No conveyor, individual printing might not be performed
correctly.
All
Individual Print No Does not print individual data.
Only NG
MDNG Prints weights of all products
All
(PASS/UNDER/OVER).
Print only weights of +NG, -NG,

Only NG
MDNG, EXNG and Dbl. Prod products.
Prints only weights and MD evaluation
MDNG value of MDNG products but does not
print for separate MD.
Inputs individual product printing cycle (up to four digits
[0 to 9999]).
For the individual product printing cycle, specify the
interval for individual product printing in product counts.
At this time, make sure to specify a value less than that
1 specified for “Batch Print Cycle”. Individual statistics are
Each Print Cycle
(0 to 9999) not printed if a value equal to or greater than that
specified for “Batch Print Cycle” is specified.(If the
4 Maintenance
measurement speed is 300 ppm or more, specify 2 or

more for the individual product printing cycle.)
When 0 is specified, individual product printing is not
performed.
Specifies batch printing cycle (up to four digits [0 to
9999]).
0 For the batch printing cycle, specify the batch printing
Batch Print Cycle
(0 to 9999) interval in batch counts.
When 0 is specified, batch statistics printing is not
performed.
Sets ON/OFF for the function that automatically prints
5 Appendix
operation check results at the end of an operation

Print at Operation No
check.
Check End Yes
Operation Check …(Accuracy Check and Eva/RJ
Confirmation)
194
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
Print stats at No Specifys whether to print statistical data at the end of
production end Yes production when smart guide is being used.
1 Basic Operations
No Selects whether to print the evaluation result of the
Check Mode Print
Yes product fed in the check mode.
The print directions (Normal/Reverse) are as shown in the sample below.
Normal Reverse
Paper feed direction
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
195
■ Print contents and format
The checkweigher can print the following data with the optional printer installed.
Data Print contents

1 Basic Operations
Total Statistics Printing

Statistics Data
Batch Statistics Printing
Individual Print
Individual Data
Time Print
Eva/RJ Confirmation Printing
Operation Check Data Accuracy Check Print
Check Mode Print
For print samples, refer to the following.
Total Statistics Printing

At Total Statistics Printing, the statistics data after statistics clear is printed when the
[Print] button is pressed.
In addition, set values at each screen can be printed.
Print contents vary by the settings of "Menu"  "USB memory/Printer"  "Output to
printer" and "Menu"  "Stats Control"  "Basic Statistics Setting".

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
196
(All products statistics)
Statistics start time
(Time when the first product
was measured after the P001=== G.TOTAL ==== ALL
statistics data was cleared.) Start 2011-11-01 15:30 Statistics end time
End 2011-11-01 18:30
1 Basic Operations
Type approval
VERSION ---- 1.10.0001 Software version
Indicates how many times a P.Name -- Candy
batch measurement has been Lot No. ----- ABCD1234
performed since the start of
BATCH 2 Any products other than the
statistics.
-NG 4.9% 2 pass products are not printed
OK 87.8% 36 when pass product statistics
Metal NG count +NG 7.3% 3 is set.
MDNG 0.0% 0
MDNG, EXNG, EXNG2, and
External NG count EXNG 0.0% 0
D-Prod. are not printed if they
EXNG2 0.0% 0 are excluded from statistics.
Dbl. Prod 0.0% 0
TOTAL COUNT 41
Total count includes the
Indicates the number of number of D-Prod. products
products subject to statistics.
COUNT 41
TOTAL. W 1.79716 kg when double product print is
MEAN 43.8332 g set.
Only the pass products are STANDARD. D 9.3374 g
subject to statistics for pass The statistic contents to be
product statistics. printed can be selected by
Range 46.40 g Statistics Print Select on the
External NG products are
excluded from statistics even
Max 49.78 g Basic Statistics Setting screen,
for all product statistics. Min 3.38 g which is displayed by selecting
“Menu”  “Stats Control” 
REF.VALUE --- 46.00 g “Basic Statistics Setting”.
-LIMIT ------ -4.00 g All Data: Dispersion range,

Preset Tare +LIMIT ------ 4.00 g maximum weight,
PT ---------- 0.80 g and
Lower limit of histogram PRODUCT LENGTH-- 120 mm minimum weight
Batch Data: Mean dispersion,
Scale of histogram HISTO. -LIMIT - 43.69 g maximum deviation,
RANK PITCH --- 1.00 g and
minimum deviation
- * 2
7 0
The upper limit and lower limit
values are indicated by a
6 0
dotted line. 5 0
4 0
3 ---------------- 0 Statical Histogram
2 *************** 34 Indicating the Rank pitch in
1 0 vertical and the rank distribution
0 ---------------- 0
4 Maintenance
in horizontal with * marks. (Max
1 * 1
2 * 1 15 stars)
3 ---------------- 0
4 0
Indicates the count or time
per batch measurement. 5 0
The printed contents depend 6 0
on the Batch Cycle Unit on 7 0
the Basic Statistics Setting + ** 3
screen, which is displayed by
selecting “Menu”  “Stats BACTH COUNT ----- 20
Control”  “Basic Statistics BATCH PRINT C. -- 1
Setting”. ======4.60012E+11=======
Time: Batch cycle time
Count: Batch count
5 Appendix
Serial No.
197
Batch Statistics Printing
Printing of statistics results at every predetermined number of products or every
predetermined time is called batch statistics printing.
The printed contents vary by the parameter settings on the Printer output setting screen,
1 Basic Operations
which is displayed by selecting “Menu”  “USB memory/printer”  “Printer output setting”,

and settings on the Basic Statistics Setting screen, which is displayed by selecting “Menu”
 “Stats Control”  “Basic Statistics Setting”.
(All products statistics)

Statistics start time
Product No.
(Time when the first product
was measured after the Prod No. -------- 001
statistics data was cleared.) Start 2011-11-01 15:30 Statistics end time
End 2011-11-01 18:30 Prints when batch printing is
---- Batch aborted ----- executed by forced
VERSION ---- 1.10.0001
Indicates the number of batch counting.
measurements since the
P.Name -- Candy
start of statistics. Lot No. ----- ABCD1234 Type approval
BATCH 3 Software version
-NG 9.1% 2 Any products other than the
OK 90.0% 20 pass products are not printed
Metal NG count +NG 0.0% 0 when pass product statistics
MDNG 0.0% 0 is set.
External NG count EXNG 0.0% 0
EXNG2 0.0% 0 MDNG, EXNG, EXNG2, and

Dbl. Prod 0.0% 0 D-Prod. are not printed if they
Indicates the number of TOTAL COUNT 22 are excluded from statistics.
products subject to statistics.
COUNT 22
Total count includes the
WEIGHT 0.91432 kg number of D-Prod. products
Batch measurement results.
MEAN 41.5600 g when double product print is
Only the pass products are
subject to statistics for pass
STANDARD. D 12.8921 g set.
product statistics.
External NG products are Range 44.88 g
excluded from statistics even Max 45.64 g
for all product statistics. Min 0.76 g
REF.VALUE --- 46.00 g Vertically displays the ranks

-LIMIT ------ -3.00 g and horizontally displays the
4 Maintenance
Preset Tare +LIMIT ------ 3.00 g histograms of each rank with

PT ---------- 0.80 g up to 15 “*” marks.
------4.60012E+11-------
Serial No.
5 Appendix
198
The batch statistics are printed at the following timing.
▪ When products are measured the number of the batch cycle count
(when Batch Cycle Unit is set to “COUNT”)
For all product statistics, the batch statistics are printed when the measurement
1 Basic Operations
count reaches the batch count.
For pass product statistics, the batch statistics are printed when the number of pass
products reaches the batch count.
▪ When the batch cycle time has passed (when Batch Cycle Unit is set to “Time”)
▪ When the total statistics printing is executed in the middle of a batch measurement
Individual Print
Individual Print is used to print individual data of product.
In the example below, “46.05” next to “1” at the top left indicates the first data item of the
batch, followed by odd numbers (3, 5, 7,…). “46.08” to the right is the second data item,
followed by even numbers (4, 6, 8,…).
(All)
The measurement time is printed
Data of odd-numbered when Time Print is set to “Yes”.
products The measurement time is not
2011-05-17 16:43:34

printed when the products are
1 46.05+M 46.08 measured at the same time.
Note: Only the pass 3 46.60E 46.03
products are printed
when pass products 2011-05-17 16:44:03
statistics is set. 5 110.26+* -***.** W Data of even-numbered products
7 -***.** W +***.**
9 46.31e 43.89-*
The meanings of the characters and symbols printed to the right of the numeric data are
as shown below.
+* : +NG product (+***.** indicates a positive overflow)

4 Maintenance
-* : –NG product (+***.** indicates a negative overflow)

110.26 E, e : EXTNG, EXTNG2
Weight
W : Double product
M : MDNG
5 Appendix
199
(Only NG)
The time when an NG
Product No. 2011-11-17 13:44:44 product is measured is
P001 Snacks printed when Time Print is
Serial number (1 to 9999) 1 43.11-* set to “Yes”.
1 Basic Operations
The number restarts from 2011-11-17 14:06:51

1 when it exceeds 9999 Product
P001 Snacks
2 50.34+*
･･･
2011-11-17 15:24:18
P005 Candies
3 -***.** W
(Only MDNG)
The time when an MDNG

product is measured is
Product No. printed when Time Print is
2011-11-17 13:44:44
set to “Yes”.
P099 Snacks
Serial number (1 to 9999) 1 MDNG 58.725g Product
The number restarts from
1 when it exceeds 9999. Fe/SUS 5.70/ 5.0 Indicates the effect value
Ext 0.55/ 5.0 measured by the metal
detector. The printed
contents depend on the
evaluation mode selected.
The numeric value on the
right of the slash (/) is the
metal evaluation limit.

(Only MDNG)
Product No.
2011-11-17 13:44:44
P099 Snacks
Product
Serial number (1 to 9999) 1 MDNG 58.725g
The number restarts from
1 when it exceeds 9999 ML1 4.86/ 5.0 Indicates the effect value measured
ML2 2.87/ 5.0 by the metal detector. The numeric
value on the right of the slash (/) is
ML3 2.87/ 5.0 the metal evaluation limit.
ML4 2.87/ 5.0 Check metal contamination
ML1: Evaluation value
for ML1 side
4 Maintenance
for ML2 side

for ML3 side
for ML4 side
Check missing product
for ML1 side
5 Appendix
200
Operation Check Print
(Eva.RJ Confirmation/Procedure Fixed)
Product No.
===== EVAL/RJ Chk. ===== Product
1 Basic Operations
Access level of the user No.001 Candy
who performed the 2011-11-01 11:30:21 Time when the Eval/RJ
Eval/RJ check Access Level 1b check was performed
Individual data Res. OK
Indicates the evaluation 1 [ OK] OK 29.59 g Pass/fail result of the
reference value and result for Eval/RJ check
each evaluation.
The evaluation reference can
2 [MDNG]MDNG
be set by selecting “Menu” 
“Operation Check”  “Eval. & 3 [MDNG]MDNG
RJ check settings”.
Characters in [ ] indicates REF.VALUE --- 46.00 g
evaluation reference while -LIMIT ------ 49.00 g
those out of [ ] indicates +LIMIT ------ 43.00 g
evaluation result.
========================
(Eva.RJ Confirmation/Procedure Fixed)

Product No.
Product
Access level of the user ===Eva/RJ Confirmation===
who performed the Eval/RJ No.001 Confectionery

check 2011-11-01 11:30:21 Time when the Eval/RJ check
Access Level 1b was performed
Res. OK
1 [ OK] OK 29.59 g Pass/fail result of the Eval/RJ
check
ML1 ( 4.86/ 5.0)
Indicates the effect value measured
ML2 ( 2.87/ 5.0) by the metal detector.
ML3 ( 2.87/ 5.0) Check metal contamination
Individual data ML4 ( 2.87/ 5.0) ML1: Evaluation value
Indicates the evaluation 2 [MDNG]MDNG for ML1 side
reference value and result for ML2: Evaluation value
each evaluation. ML1 (14.86/ 5.0)
for ML2 side
The evaluation reference can be ML2 ( 2.87/ 5.0) ML3: Evaluation value
set by selecting “Menu”  ML3 ( 2.87/ 5.0) for ML3 side
“Operation Check”  “Eval. & RJ ML4 ( 2.87/ 5.0) ML4: Evaluation value
check settings”. 3 [MDNG]MDNG for ML4 side
4 Maintenance
Check missing product
Characters in [ ] ML1 (14.86/ 5.0)
indicates evaluation ML2 ( 2.87/ 5.0) for ML1 side
reference while those ML3 ( 2.87/ 5.0)
out of [ ] indicates ML4 ( 2.87/ 5.0)
evaluation result.
Reference value - 46.00 g
Lower limit --- 49.00 g
Upper limit --- 43.00 g
Test pieces Setting values for evaluation
Printed when using Size Fe φ 2.0
metal detector.
Size SUS φ 2.0
========================
5 Appendix
201
(Accuracy Check)
Product No.
===== Accu. Check ====== Product
Access level of the No.001 Candy
user who performed 2011-11-01 11:30:21
1 Basic Operations
Time when the accuracy

the accuracy check
Access Level 1b check was performed
Res. OK
Prem. Acc. 3.00 g Pass/fail result of the
Meas. Acc. 0.2364 g accuracy check
Product measurement count Count 10
Weight of master product Master 46.44 g
Mean value X-bar 46.3200 g
Standard deviation S 0.0388 g
Range R 0.12 g
Maximum value Max 46.38 g
Minimum value Min 46.26 g
1 46.30 g
2 46.38 g
3 46.34 g
4 46.32 g
Measured data of 5 46.36 g
products for the number of 6 46.34 g
times of measurement
7 46.26 g
8 46.32 g
9 46.32 g
10 46.26 g
========================
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
202
Check Mode Print
1 Basic Operations
Product No.
Product
P001 Check Mode
Start 2013-08-12 11:05:51 Time when shifting to the check
Evaluation result
[OK ] 1234.56 g mode screen.
Fe ( 4.86/ 5.0)
SUS ( 2.87/ 5.0) Indicates the effect value measured
by the metal detector. The printed
Individual data [MDNG ] 1234.56 g contents depend on the evaluation
Indicates the evaluation Fe ( 5.17/ 5.0) mode selected.
reference value and result for SUS ( 2.08/ 5.0) The numeric value on the right of the
each evaluation. [MDNG ] 1234.56 g slash (/) is the metal evaluation limit.
Fe (11.25/ 5.0)
SUS ( 9.95/ 5.0)
End 2013-08-12 11:07:25
Time when exiting the check
mode screen.
Product No. Product

No.001 Check Mode

Start 2013-08-12 11:05:51 Time when shifting to the check
Evaluation result [OK ] mode screen.
ML1 ( 4.86/ 5.0)
ML2 ( 2.87/ 5.0)
ML3 ( 2.87/ 5.0) Check metal contamination
ML4 ( 2.87/ 5.0) for ML1 side
[MDNG ] ML2: Evaluation value
Individual data ML1 (11.86/ 5.0) for ML2 side
Indicates the evaluation
ML2 ( 2.87/ 5.0) ML3: Evaluation value
reference value and result for for ML3 side
each evaluation. ML3 ( 2.87/ 5.0)
for ML4 side
[MDNG ] Check missing product
ML2 ( 2.87/ 5.0) for ML1 side
ML3 (22.87/ 5.0)
4 Maintenance
ML4 ( 2.87/ 5.0)

End 2013-08-12 11:07:25
Time when exiting the check
mode screen.
5 Appendix
203
> Using Smart Measurement Function (SMF)
■ SMF (optional)
If the intervals between fed products are small as in a high-speed line, a product may be
1 Basic Operations
put on the weigh conveyor before the previous measurement is completed. In this case, a
conventional checkweigher cannot measure the weight of each product correctly, so both
products are rejected as products unable to be measured.
This function improves the yield by automatically adjusting measurement conditions so
that the weight of each product can be measured when two products are put on the weigh
conveyor.
When two products are put on the weigh conveyor, the weight of each product can be
measured by automatically shortening the measurement time set previously. Decreasing

the limit range of the upper and lower limits according to the shortened time can prevent
+NG and -NG products from being evaluated as PASS products.
■ Using SMF
This function will not be displayed if it is not installed.

1 Perform settings to use SMF as a device.

In the "Menu" screen, select "Maint. and Setting"  "Functions"  "SMF”. Press
"Input" and set "SMF" to "Yes”.
2 Set SMF for each product using SMF.

In the "Menu" screen, select "Adjust registered products"  "Product settings" 
"SMF"  "SMF settings" screen. Set "SMF" to "Yes”.
3 In SMF allowance, enter the accuracy

4 Maintenance
allowance affected by the use of this

function.
Example:"0.5" if the measurement

accuracy is 0.5g (3)
Note that the original specification accuracy

cannot be obtained for the measured product SMF allowance Input screen
when this function is used.
5 Appendix
204
■ SMF Info screen
This screen displays the improvements in productivity caused by SMF.
The displayed improvement of the yield is based on a comparison with the values when
this function is not used.
1 Basic Operations
In the "Menu" screen, select "Stats Control"  "SMF info screen" to display this screen.
Total Total number of products inspected

Invld. D-Prod. Double products that could have occurred if SMF is disabled.
Valid D-Prod. Double products that occurred even if SMF is enabled.
Displays the improvement effect of use of SMF in count.
Save yield The weight value displayed at the right side of the screen is total
weight of products not rejected because of the improvement effect.
Percentage of double products reduced compared to the value when
Dbl. Cnt reduction
SMF is not used.
">>" in the left side of the screen

indicates that the SMF function is
enabled.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
205
> Setting Rejector
This is to make detailed settings for the rejector.
1 Basic Operations
Common set of RJ
(Maintenance and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Rejector  Common set
of RJ)
Setting
Name Description
(Default: )
39 m/min
RJ Conveyor Speed Sets the conveyor speed of the rejector.
(5 to 120)

(High) (5 to 120)
(Low) (5 to 120)
RJ belt speed detail 39.0 m/min
(High) (5 to 120.0)
RJ belt speed detail 39.0 m/min
(Low) (5 to 120.0)
This function detects product intervals resulting in

unstable rejection (detection distance: between the
back end of one product and the front end of the
following one) as RJ overcapacity and surely
No discharges the faulty products in the higher-priority
RJ Capacity
Yes NG direction to avoid unstable rejection. If this
Exceeded
* Read only function is used, the displayed NG count may not
match the number of faulty products discharged into
the NG box, because secure discharge is preferred.
It can be used when connected to the flipper or
dropout rejector.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
206
RJ Direction Settings
(Maintenance and Setting  Unit/connected device set.  Rejector  RJ Direction
Settings)
1 Basic Operations
Setting
Name Explanation
(Default: _)
Automatically set by RJ model.
This sets the gate standby position during operation
to PASS or NG.
* This function is enabled when the RJ output type
OK is "Pulse" and it is ignored when the RJ output
No Prod. Dir. type is "Hold”.
NG
OK Set gate to RJ3 direction after T4 termination.
Set gate to RJ1 or RJ5 direction after T4
NG termination depending on gate standby
position parameter.
Stop, RJ1, RJ2,
-NG Sets -NG rejection direction.
RJ3, RJ4, RJ5
Stop, RJ1, RJ2,
OK Sets OK rejection direction.
RJ3, RJ4, RJ5
Stop, RJ1, RJ2,

+NG Sets +NG rejection direction.
RJ3, RJ4, RJ5
Stop, RJ1, RJ2, Sets MDNG rejection direction.
MDNG
RJ3, RJ4, RJ5 (when metal detector is installed)
Stop, RJ1, RJ2,
EXNG Sets EXNG rejection direction.
RJ3, RJ4, RJ5
Stop, RJ1, RJ2,
EXNG2 Sets EXNG2 rejection direction.
RJ3, RJ4, RJ5
Stop, RJ1, RJ2, Sets the rejection direction for an alarm (A015, A031,
ALARM
RJ3, RJ4, RJ5 A051 to A055, and A504).
Stop, RJ1, RJ2, Sets Dbl. Prod and Length error (A039 Product
4 Maintenance
D-Prod.
RJ3, RJ4, RJ5 Length Exceeded) rejection direction.
Rejects the products forcibly in the specified
direction under the following conditions.
▪ Before the start of rejection of correctly evaluated
products since the machine starts running
RJ1,
▪ During auto-setting
Forced RJ2, RJ3,
▪ During HIS settings
RJ4, RJ5
▪ During the auto-limit (from the stop of running to
the start of rejection
5 Appendix
▪ During FOCUS settings

▪ After switching the product during running
207
▪ The initial setting of the rejection direction varies depending on the connected rejector.
▪ When the rejection direction is set to Stop, the product may flow on the conveyor to the
downstream without stopping.
1 Basic Operations
▪ D-Prod is the status in which the next product is placed on the weighing conveyor while the
weight of the previous product is being measured during rejection by weight.
■ Rejection direction
3-way classification (STD) (Top view)

RJ direction RJ direction
RJ5 RJ1
RJ3 RJ3
Flow RJ1 RJ5 Flow
5-way classification (option) (Top view)
RJ direction RJ direction
RJ5 RJ1
RJ4 RJ2
RJ3 RJ3
Flow Flow
RJ2 RJ4
RJ1 RJ5
2-way classification (STD)

Dropout (side view)
RJ direction
RJ3
Flow
RJ1
Air jet (top view)
4 Maintenance
RJ direction
RJ3
Flow
RJ1 Rejection direction
Set directions for each of the following: –NG, OK, +NG, ALARM, MDNG, EXNG, EXNG2,
DBL P.
5 Appendix
208
■ RJ test mode
The operations of the rejector can be checked.
1 Basic Operations
▪ In this mode, evaluation and rejection are not performed when a normal product is fed through.
▪ Be sure to stop the operation before using this feature.
1 Tap the [Start] button on the RJ direction

settings screen.
2 Select the "Above content
acknowledged" check box and then tap
[Operate].

3 The operation starts in RJ test mode.
4 Maintenance
4 Tap a button for the rejector whose

operation is to be checked, such as
[RJ1].
The rejector operates one second after

the button is tapped.
5 Appendix
209
5 Tap the [Stop] button to exit RJ test
mode.
1 Basic Operations
■ Evaluation Priority
When several NG statuses occur simultaneously, the priority rank is as follows:
優先順位
Rank
優先度が高い
Priority High 1 At アラーム判定（異常発生時）
error occurrence (ALARM)
2 金属 NG 判定
2 MDNG
3 外部 NG2
3 External 判定
NG2 (EXNG2)
4 外部 NG
4 External 判定
NG (EXNG)
5 2 個乗り判定
5 Double product (DBL P.)
6 アラーム判定（アラーム発生時）
6 Alarm evaluation (at alarm)
7 質量判定(軽量・過量)
7 Weight evaluation (-NG, +NG)
優先度が低い
Priority Low 8
8 Pass product in EXNGNG
良品振分用外部判定SPS)
(EXNG:
9 質量判定(正量)
9 Weight evaluation (PASS)
Rejection direction at alarm

At "A001 Dbl. Product”, a product is rejected to the DBL P. direction.
At "A039 Product Length Exceeded”, a product is rejected to the DBL P. direction.
When the Dbl. Product direction and ALARM direction occurred at the same time, the Dbl.
Product direction has priority.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
210
Other Useful Functions
> Using Smart Guide

Follow the instructions shown on the Smart Guide screen to prevent incorrect operation or
omission of steps.
1 Basic Operations
For equipment with the standard specifications, Smart Guide is set by default. To enable
Smart Guide after disabling it, follow the instructions below.
1 Select "Menu" screen  "Maint. and

Setting"  "Functions"  "Smart guide
settings", and tap [Input], and press [OK].
2 Select "Standard", and press [OK].
After the setting is changed from "No" to "Standard" as shown above, press the [Home]
button to display the Smart Guide initial screen. Follow the on-screen instructions to
specify the settings.

■ Selecting the manufacture date and manufacture unit
Select the manufacture date and manufacture unit by using the Smart Guide. By selecting
the manufacture date and manufacture unit, production can be performed based on date,
time, and user. Production information can also be checked in the form of a daily report
output according to manufacture date and/or manufacture unit.
Tap [Select Manufacture Date] on the "Phase 1" screen of the Smart Guide and select the
manufacture date and manufacture unit on the following screen.
■ Select [No Manufacture Unit] if you do
not want to set a production unit. 4 Maintenance
■ Select [Test] if you want to perform a

confirmation check before starting
production.
5 Appendix
211
■ Displaying a daily report
Information about production performed by using the Smart Guide can be displayed on
the Smart Guide in the form of a daily report.
The screen can be switched to the daily report screen by tapping the [Display Daily
1 Basic Operations
Report] button at the bottom of the screen.

The daily report displays information about the production of the manufacture unit
selected on the "Phase 1" screen of the Smart Guide, performed on the manufacture date
selected on the "Phase 1" screen of the Smart Guide.
The screen on the right is an example of a daily report that displays information about the
production of manufacture unit 3 that was performed on April 24.
■ Even if [No Manufacture Unit] or [Test]
has been selected, the information is

handled in the same was as if
manufacture units 1 to 3 were selected
and is displayed in the daily report as the
information of a single manufacture unit.
■ [Start Time] is the time at which the
pre-production operation check using the
test piece (both Fe and SUS) is first
completed successfully.
■ If production was not performed even
after the product type was changed, that
product type is not recorded in the daily
report.
(Example) No. 5 on the screen on the right
The meanings of the symbols in the pre-production/post production operation check

results displayed in the daily report are as follows:
4 Maintenance
Symbols Description
O Operation check successful
X Operation check failed
Blank Not implemented
- Canceled (stopped)
* Forcibly terminated
5 Appendix
212
■ Selecting the daily report to display
The daily report to display on the daily report screen can be selected by tapping the
[Select Daily Report] button at the bottom of the daily report screen.
Changing the daily report to display on the
1 Basic Operations
daily report selection screen does not change
the manufacture date or manufacture unit
selected on the "Phase 1" screen of the
Smart Guide.
The latest 200 daily reports can be displayed.
■ Saving daily report data
The data of the daily report showing the information of the selected manufacture date and
manufacture unit can be saved to a USB flash drive by tapping the [Save to USB] button
on the bottom of the daily report screen. The daily report data is recorded in a file called
"HDR_△△.csv" in the HIST folder.
Data is recorded to the USB flash drive in CSV format in the following order, with each
item delimited by a comma.
Item Remarks
ID Code History Type [4]

No. Serial number of daily report data for production of the specified
manufacture unit performed on the specified manufacture date
Product Product No.
Manufacture Date Specified manufacture date YYYY/MM/DD
Manufacture Unit Specified manufacture unit
No manufacture unit :-
Manufacture unit 1 to 3 : 1 to 3
Test :0 4 Maintenance
Start Time Time at which pre-production operation check first completed
successfully YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM
End Time Time at which post-production operation check first completed
successfully YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM (0/00/00 00:00 in the case of a
forcible termination)
Pre-production Results of three most recent pre-production operation checks
Operation Check Not implemented :0
Results Canceled (stopped) :1
Operation check successful :2
5 Appendix
Operation check failed :3

Production forcibly terminated :4
Work forcibly terminated :5
213
Item Remarks
Pre-production The name of the user who performed the pre-production operation
Operation Check User check (only available when the optional user management feature is
Name used)
1 Basic Operations
Post-production Results of three most recent post-production operation checks

Operation Check The numbers have the same meaning as the pre-production operation
Results check results.
Post-production The name of the user who performed the post-production operation
Operation Check User check (only available when the optional user management feature is
Name used)
Prod Count Conveyed item count
OK OK product count
MDNG Metal NG count

D-Prod. Double product count
■ Terminating a process forcibly

The operation according to the smart guide can be stopped and go back to the operation
at the beginning.
1 Select [Others] → [Terminate process].
2 Press [Yes] shown on the right screen to

display the initial screen.
4 Maintenance
Press the [Start] button to move to “1.

Start process”, in which products can
newly be produced.
5 Appendix
214
▪ The forcible termination can be performed by the authorized users assigned in the “Set Access
Authority” setting.
1 Basic Operations
▪ The forcible termination can be performed any time during smart guide operation. However,
when the conveyor is running, the display screen does not change and only the message is
displayed to indicate that the forcible termination is executed once the conveyor stops.
▪ Statistics from the start of work to forcible termination are cleared once the screen is moved to
[1. Work before commencing operations] in the Smart Guide and the manufacture date and
manufacture unit are selected.
> Displaying Product List
When "Display product list" is pressed in the "Menu" screen, a list of the product names
and reference weight values of registered products are displayed.
▪ The following marks are displayed to indicate the setting status of each product.
Mark Description
The inspection can be performed.

The minimum settings required for the inspection are completed.
Not registered.


The inspection cannot be performed since the product registration is not completed.
The auto-setting is not performed.
?
The inspection cannot be performed since the auto-setting is not performed.
The mode is conveyor mode, in which products are transferred without being
inspected.
When “CW conveyor mode” is “Yes”, weight measurement is not performed.
! The metal detection is not performed when “Yes” is specified for “MD conveyor
mode”. When [CW Conveyor mode] is [Yes (Force Motor ON)], weight evaluation,
MDNG (metal NG) evaluation, and EXNG (external NG) evaluation are not
performed.
For the products with “” or “?” displayed, perform inspection after product registration.
4 Maintenance
 P. 36 Registering a New Product

5 Appendix
215
■ By switching between 1 and 2 in [Display], the number of items displayed on a screen
can be changed (5 or 8 products).
1 Basic Operations
5 products/screen 8 products/screen
■ To change the product for production, select the product to change and press [Prod.
Chg.].
■ The "Show product list" is also displayed when the "Product" area is pressed in the
"General" screen.
> Copying and Deleting Registered Product

■ Copying a registered product to another product number

1 Select the product to copy from the product list screen.
2 Press the [Fn] button at the lower right of the screen, and select "Copy”.
3 Select the product number of the destination.
4 Press the [Fn] button at the lower right of
the screen and press "Paste".
4 Maintenance
■ Deleting from Product Table screen

1 Select the product to delete.
2 Press the [Fn] button and press "Delete”. When the "Confirm delete" screen is
displayed, press [Yes].
5 Appendix
216
> Clearing Statistics
1 Select "Others"  "Clear Stats”.
1 Basic Operations
2 When [Yes] is pressed, only the statistics
related to the currently selected product
are cleared.
This example is in the "General" screen,

but the statistics data is cleared in other
screens such as "Histogram" and
"Enlarge bar" simultaneously.
To clear the statistics of all the recorded

products, select "Clear all product Stats."

and press [Yes].
The statistics of all products cannot be

cleared from the screen or IO during
operation.
▪ When clearing statistics is performed, total statistics data are saved to an USB memory stick or
printed.
▪ When “Clear all product Stats.” is checked, all products having total statistics data are saved to
an USB memory stick or printed.
4 Maintenance
▪ When an USB memory stick is not inserted, or there is no printer available, clearing statistics
cannot be executed.
5 Appendix
217
> Setting All Products
This feature is used when specifying parameters of all products at once.
This feature improves the parameter setting efficiency when there are a lot of registered
1 Basic Operations
products.
1 Open the menu screen, and select “Fn”

 “All prod setting” on the bottom right of
the screen.
Select [Yes] when the confirmation dialog

box appears to start the all product
settings.
2 The “All prod setting” appears on the top

of the screen.
3 Open the screen that contains the

parameter to be set for all products, enter
the value to be changed, and then press
[OK].
4 Maintenance
Example: CW Belt Speed

5 Appendix
218
4 Press [//] (End) button on the top of the
screen.
Select [Yes] when the confirmation dialog
1 Basic Operations
box appears to notify the completion of
all product setting.
The processing to apply the changed

parameter to all the products starts. This
processing takes a while. Do not turn the
power off until the processing completes.
5 The main screen is displayed when the
all product setting completes.

> Customizing the Items Displayed in Submenu
The submenus displayed by pressing a button on the bottom of the “Home” screen can be
customized. This feature is used to reduce the items displayed on the submenu.
4 Maintenance
The items on the submenu that can be customized

5 Appendix
219
1 Select “Menu”, “Control Panel”, and then
“Home display settings”, and then select
the screen or menu to be customized.
1 Basic Operations
Example: When customizing

“Home screen disp. sel.”
2 Select the item to be hidden, press [Delete] and then [Yes].

Example: When hiding “Statis”
The field that “Statis” was displayed

becomes “-” and “Statis” disappears from
the submenu in the “Home” screen.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
220
■ Showing the hidden items
To show the hidden submenu items, select
the blank field and then press [Enter]. When
the menu selection screen is displayed,
1 Basic Operations
select items to be shown, and then press
[OK].
Example: When showing “Clear Stats.”

hidden from the “Pro Cntl” submenu
Only for the “Home” screen, the screen
image is displayed when selecting [Enter].
The screen image can be switched using
the [<] and [>] buttons.
When pressing [Back] while the target

screen image is displayed, the image is
displayed in the “Home” screen.
Example: When displaying “Statis”

“Smart guide” in the “Home” screen cannot be customized.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
221
> Using Conveyor Mode
If you do not perform weight measurement by product, set “CW Conveyor mode” to “Yes”.
If you do not perform metal detection by product, set “MD Conveyor mode” to “Yes”.
1 Basic Operations
When the conveyor mode is set to [Yes], the status of the equipment is as follows:
In CW conveyor mode (only the metal detector is used):
■ The Start button blinks during operation.
■ "-" will be shown in all the weight display and "OK" (green) will be shown in evaluation.
Product counting and weight data capture will not be performed.
■ For serial measured output and individual print, "0 g" will be output.
■ Products on the conveyor are not counted.
■ "CW Dbl. Product" will be ignored.

■ Auto calculation of measurement timing for weight measurement will not be performed.
Timing to capture EXNG and MDNG will automatically be set.
■ Enable “Yes (Forced motor ON)” setting when the sorting capability (processing
capability per minute) is high.
In MD conveyor mode (only the weighing function is used):

■ The metal detecting level bar does not light up.
■ Products are not counted during the conveyor mode.
Setting the conveyor mode

1 From the “Menu” screen, select “Adjust
registered products”  “Product settings”
 “Conveyor mode”.
2 Select either one of the two and then

4 Maintenance
press [Input].
3 Select “Yes” and press [OK].

The conveyor operates when the Start
button is pressed, and it stops when the
Stop button is pressed.
To change conveyor speed, refer to the following;
 P. 168 Setting Conveyor Speed

5 Appendix
222
■ Do not feed a product that has a weight exceeding the upper limit of the weighing range if you
set the CW conveyor mode. The weighing unit might be broken due to overload.
■ The conveyor belt speed does not change when the conveyor mode is changed from Yes to
1 Basic Operations
No.
■ In the MD conveyor mode, be careful that products are fed through downstream without
checking metal contamination and missing products.
■ When the conveyor mode is set to [Yes (Force Motor ON)], serial measured value output and
individual printing are not performed. Counting and RJ of MDNG, EXNG, EXNG2, MD Prod.
Length Alarm, and MD Dbl.Prod are also not performed.
> Using Multi-Range Function
Multi-range function breaks up resolution to improve the accuracy of the checkweigher.
Compatible models and selectable weight range are as follows.
Range capacity varies from models.
Checkweigher accuracy is affected by external disturbances (drafts, vibrations, etc.) and error
caused by dynamic measurement. Consequently, if the error due to these effects exceeds the

display scale interval, it is not possible to improve accuracy even by using the multirange function.
The SSV series of checkweighers display +Overflow and –Overflow alarms when external
disturbances such as vibration and mechanical shock are too large and prevent correct
measurement. When these alarms are displayed, change the weight range to the upper range (for
example, set a range of 3000 g for a model with a weight range of ~3000g). This may prevent the
alarm and reduce the effects of external disturbance. If the above alarms are generated even
when the maximum weight range is set, take vibration countermeasures.
4 Maintenance
When you use Multi-range function, perform sensitivity correction in all weight range before
machine sealing.
5 Appendix
223
■ Setting multirange
From the Main screen, select “Adjust
registered products” → ”Product settings”
→ ”Multi range”.
1 Basic Operations
From “Multirange Wt. Range”, selects weight

range to be used and press [OK].
> Viewing History

When "History" is pressed in the "Menu" screen, past equipment state and production
state are displayed.
Past events can be recorded, such as occurrences of NG products and operation
histories.
Select the target item and press [Set].

Viewing operation history
■ Alarm occurrence status

The types and numbers of errors or alarms that have occurred are listed. Select an error
or alarm and tap [Date/Time] to narrow down the list based on the event that caused the
selected error or alarm and display the operation history. The list of occurrence dates can
4 Maintenance
also be checked.
The number displayed on this screen is the result of counting the events in the operating
history.
Please note that this number might differ from the number recorded in the alarm history.
■ Ope. history
The operation history is displayed chronologically. The events shown in the operation
history include power-on, access level change, alarm occurrence and clearance, product
change, and other items. Select one of the events and tap [Info] to display a narrowed
5 Appendix
down history.
Tap [Expanded] to cancel the narrowed-down display.
224
■ Param. History
The target product No., parameter type, and details of change appear chronologically
every time a parameter is changed.
1 Basic Operations
■ NG history
NG histories are displayed in chronological order with the product name and description
of NG. Among NG products, only MDNG and EXNG products are displayed.
+NG and –NG products are not covered.To save data to the USB memory, press [Save].
■ Alarm History
Histories of error and alarm occurrences are displayed in chronological order. “No.” shows
the target product number, and “Details” shows the error code and error details. Tap the
[Info] button to show details of any errors. Note that some errors or alarms are not
recorded on this screen, such as a double product.

An example of "History details"
for Alarm History
■ Operation Check History

Implementation status of Accuracy Check and Eva/RJ Check are displayed in
chronological order. 4 Maintenance
■ Saving history
To save data, press [Save], select the data
(Operation History / Parameter History /
Approved Parameter History / NG History/
Alarm History / Operation Check History /
Fine Adj. History / Fine Adj. History After
Seal / Software Update History / Seal History
/ Time Change History), products (all or one
5 Appendix
product) to save, and output range (all data Saving operation check history to USB
or past 24 hours), and press "Save”.
225
■ Fine Adj. History
It will indicate only the latest data of [Fine adjustment] for each product before machine
sealing. No history will be recorded if you cancel the fine adjustment.
If you wish to save them into USB, select [Save to USB]
1 Basic Operations
■ Fine Adj. History After Seal

It will record the [History of fine adjustment after machine sealing] in chronological order.
No history will be recorded if you cancel the fine adjustment.
If you wish to save them into USB, select [Save to USB].
■ Time Change History
It will indicate the history of time setting in chronological order.
If you wish to save them into USB, select [Save to USB].
■ Software Update History

It will indicate history of software updating by USB memory in chronological order.
Software update will be done by a service technician.
■ Seal History
It will indicate the history of machine sealing in chronological order.
■ Number of history items that can be saved

Number of recordable history items are below.
Recordable
History
Number
Operation history 1000
4 Maintenance
Parameter History 1000

Approved Parameter History 3000
NG History 1000
Alarm History 1000
Operation Check History 1000
Fine Adj. History 200
Fine Adj. History After Seal 2000
Time Change History 1000
5 Appendix
Software Update History 1000

Seal History 3000
226
■ Clearing history
For "NG History" and "Operation Check History”, all data can be cleared by pressing the
[Fn] button on the button right of the screen.
1 Basic Operations
> Setting Access Level By Function
Unexpected parameter changes can be prevented by setting an access level for each
function.
1 In the "Menu" screen, select "Maint. and

Setting"  "Security and rules"  "Set
Access Authority" to open the following
screen.
2 The available access levels for functions

are displayed.
Select the function to set and press
[Input] to display the setting screen.

3 Select the access rights to the lowest
level. Press [OK] to complete setting.
The description above is an example of settings for "Product Registration".

4 Maintenance
When "1b" is set, operators of Level 1b and Level 2 will be allowed to access.
5 Appendix
227
The table below shows the operational limitations that can be specified for each item.
Item Description
Operate/Stop Limits the operation to operate/stop the equipment.
Chg Prod Limits the operation to change the product.
1 Basic Operations
Detect-lvl Chg. Limits the operation to change the detection limit parameters.
Limits the operation for performance check.
Ope. Check
Target: Eva/RJ confirmation
Limits the operations to register the products and to change
Prod Reg.
parameters of the products.
Clear Statistics Limits the operation to clear the statistics.
Limits the operation to change the parameters related to basic
Maintenance
operations of the equipment.
NG stop authority Limits the operation to release the NG stop state.
Forcible Limits the operation to stop the operation according to the smart
termination guide halfway through.
Limits the operation for lot number change.
It is enabled only on the following screens.
Lot No. Change • "Parameter adjustment screen" that can be selected from the
General screen
• Statis screen
Limits the operation for tare weight change.
Tare weight It is enabled only on the following screens.
Change • "Parameter adjustment screen" that can be selected from the
General screen
Fine Adjustment Execution authority for Fine Adjustment
Timing Adjust Execution authority for Timing Adjustment
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
228
> Using Check Mode
By using Check Mode, weight measurement or metal contamination/missing detection
can be done separately from nomal operation. This is used to check the accuracy of
1 Basic Operations
weighcell or recheck NG products.
▪ Can be used whenever needed, irrespective of steps set by Smart Guide.
▪ The confirmed results are not included in the statistics or history.
▪ The rejection directions are same as set for normal operation.
1 Select “Others” → “Check Mode”.

The check mode can be selected by
configuring the following settings.
The check modes can be displayed by

selecting [Menu] → [Control Panel] →
[Home display settings] → [Others], and
then adding Check Mode.
2 Press [Start] button and feed the product.

Tap [Back] to return to the operation
screen.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
229
> Registering Products Using Another Auto Setting Method
Use this when measuring a product to which auto settings have been applied (the
1 Basic Operations
properties are already known) or when changing a sensitivity mode determined by the full
automatic method.
■ Differences with the Full-auto method (recommended)

The Full-auto (recommended) method actually measures the master product and
automatically evaluates the product properties based on the measurement results. The
auto setting method described in this section skips the measurement of the master
product for evaluating properties by specifying the product properties in advance.

Merits: The number of times the master product needs to be fed to the
checkweigher is decreased.
Demerits: The acquired sensitivity may not be optimal if an appropriate property is
not specified. Difference in devices and installation environments may
not be considered.
■ How to change the auto setting method

1 Select “Make auto setting newly” on the

Selection of new or readjust screen and
press [Next].
See the following for starting auto setting.
 P. 36 Registering a New Product,

 P. 102 Auto Settings (Readjusting
registered products)
4 Maintenance
2 Select “Specifies sens mode.” (for metal

contamination check, missing product
check) or “Specify product property.” on
the Auto-set Method screen.
See the following for starting auto setting.
Select “Specifies sens mode.” on

the Auto-set Method screen.
5 Appendix
230
■ Specify Sens. Mode
A sensitivity mode can be automatically set by selecting “Specify Sens. Mode”.
Use this only when you have automatically set the same product with another product
number or another device that is the same model, and you know the sensitivity mode.
1 Basic Operations
1 Select “Specify Sens. Mode.” on the
Auto-setting method selection screen
and press [Next].
2 Select a sensitivity mode to be specified
on the Select Sens Mode (Fe-SUS)
screen.
There are 10 options. The initial setting is

[A-A] for unregistered products.
There are 3 options. The initial setting is

[B-B] for unregistered products.
4 Maintenance
For unregistered products, select the same setting as that of the sensitivity mode
determined by the other product number or other device that is the same model.
For registered products, the current setting is already selected.
5 Appendix
231
3 Perform auto setting.
 P. 46 Registering a New Product - step 18
1 Basic Operations
Master products are fed 5 times when

“Specify Sens. Mode” is selected (15
times for full automatic mode).
When auto setting finishes, the determined

sensitivity mode and the estimated
detecting sensitivity are displayed. Press

[Completed] to apply the new settings.
Press [Cancel] if you do not want to apply
the results of the auto setting.
Master products are fed 4 times and

missing products (NG samples) are fed
once when the sensitivity mode is
specified. (The master product is fed 8
times and missing product is fed 2 times
in the full automatic mode.)
4 Maintenance
When auto setting finishes, the determined sensitivity mode and the estimated
detecting sensitivity are displayed. Press [Completed] to apply the new settings. Press
[Cancel] if you do not want to apply the results of auto setting.
The selection criteria for the sensitivity mode are complex, and specialized knowledge is
required for determining the sensitivity mode of products to which auto setting has not been
performed and changing the sensitivity mode determined by auto setting. Perform the normal
auto setting in [Full-auto (recommended)].
5 Appendix
Contact an Anritsu or its distributor for service if you need to manually specify the sensitivity
mode to adjust the detection sensitivity, and do not perform the specification by yourself.
232
■ Specify prod. Type
The product properties can be automatically set by selecting [Specify prod. Type] if the
product properties are those shown in the following table.
However, this method cannot be used to check missing products.
1 Basic Operations
Property Example products
Dry Rice crackers, rice, flour, frozen foods, etc.
Wet Meat, cheese, sausage, salted fish products, etc.
Aluminum-evaporated Potato chips, products wrapped by metalized film
1 Select “Specify product property.” on the
Auto-setting method selection screen
and press [Next].

2 Select a property corresponding to the
product on the Select P-Effect screen.
Select either “Dry”, “Wet”, or “Al Evap.”

using the above table or the on-screen
guidance as a reference.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
233
3 Perform auto setting.
 P. 46 Registering a New Product - step 18
1 Basic Operations
Master products are fed 5 times when the

“Specify product property.” is selected
(15 times for full automatic mode)
When auto setting finishes, the

estimated detecting sensitivity are
displayed. Press [Completed] to apply
the new settings. Press [Cancel] if you do
not want to apply the results of the auto
setting.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
234
> Correcting the Phase based on Characteristic Change (Product check function)
The product check function corrects the phase of the metal detector immediately before
starting operation. This function is used only if the type of product is wet.
1 Basic Operations
If the phase of the metal detector deviates from the optimum setting value due to a reason
such as changes in the product or device temperature, the metal detection signal
fluctuates greatly and may lead to metal NG evaluation even if the product contains no
metal contamination. Use this function to suppress a false detection due to phase
dispersion by feeding the master product at the start of operation to correct the phase of
the metal detector.
▪ As a missing product check is not affected by temperature changes, the product check
function is not required.
▪ As dry products ( P. 233) are not prone to phase shifting, the product check function is not
required.
▪ The number of master products fed through during a product check is excluded from the
statistics.
■ Initial setting of a product check

1 From the Menu screen, select “Maint.

and Setting”  “Functions”  “Product
check setting” to open the Product check
setting screen.
2 Select “Yes” for “Product Check Function”.
3 From the Menu screen , select “Adjust

registered products.”  “Product settings” 4 Maintenance
 “Product check setting” to open the
Product check setting screen.
4 Set each parameter.

See the following for details on setting
the required parameters.
 P. 68 Product check
5 Appendix
235
■ How to use a product check
1 If a product matches the product check
conditions, press the [Start] button to
display the data collection screen shown
1 Basic Operations
to the right.
2 Feed master products the required

number of times. The screen then shows
the weight of the master product.
3 When you have corrected the phase, the

message “Completed normally” is

displayed. Press the [Start] button to start
production.
Confirm the following items if the message

“Not right product. Retry product check after
confirm the products.” appears.
▪ The product differs from the master

product.
 Set the correct product number.
( P. 36)
▪ The phase dispersion has exceeded the
correctable amount.
 Try auto setting again. ( P. 102)
▪ The product check has been performed on
dry products.
 Set the “Default Phase Correction” of
this product to [No] to avoid checking
this product.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
236
If "Bulk" is specified and the processing does not advance from the Data collection screen even
after a product is fed through several times, specify a smaller value for the settings below. The
effective value of a product that is fed through for a product check might be smaller than the value
1 Basic Operations
specified by auto-setting.
▪ Prod. Detection level (Fe), Prod. Detection level (SUS)
▪ Prod. Detection level (ML1), Prod. Detection level (ML2), Prod. Detection level (ML3), Prod.
Detection level (ML4)
 P. 68 Product check
* The default value is 0.8. Do not specify a smaller value. Adjust the setting value so that
detection is performed only when a product is fed through.
If the problem is not resolved even after performing the adjustment described above, perform
auto-setting using the procedure below and then perform a product check again.
(1) Select "Menu", "Adjust registered products", and "Auto-set" to open the Auto-set screen.
(2) Select "Make auto setting by using current settings" to perform auto-setting.
> Changing the Metal Detection Sensitivity

The evaluation reference value for the metal contamination (or missing products) check
are automatically determined by the auto setting function.
Metal contamination check: Evaluation limit magnification 5.0 (MDNG resulted if the effect

value is more than 5 times that of the master product)
Missing product check: Evaluation limit magnification 0.7 (missing product NG resulted if
the effect value is 70% or less than that of the master product)
You can use these settings under normal conditions. For further stability or sensitivity,
change the metal detection sensitivity by using the following procedure.
After you have changed the metal detection sensitivity, be sure to check the detection
performance of the control sensitivity reference test piece (or the reference contaminants).
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
237
■ How to call the Sensitivity Adjustment screen
Touch the metal detection level bar on the Basic display or press [Set/Adj] button and
select [MD sensitivity adjustment].
1 Basic Operations
You can restrict the access level. The access level is set to 1b or higher at factory shipment.
The screen on the right appears.

By tapping the [Display] button, the screens to adjust the detection sensitivity can be
switched.
1: Sensitivity Adjustment screen
2: Sensitivity Adjustment 2 screen
3: Product effect monitor screen

4: Noise monitor screen
There are two sensitivity adjustment screens: the "Sensitivity Adjustment" screen and the
"Sensitivity Adjustment 2" screen.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
238
■ Sensitivity Adjustment screen (for a metal contamination check)
You can adjust the detection limit by checking the metal effect value on the bar graph. At
the same time, you can check the estimated detection sensitivity after changing the
setting.
1 Basic Operations
< button > button
Press to decrease the detection Press to increase the detection Evaluation limit magnification
sensitivity (the evaluation limit sensitivity (the evaluation limit Press here to enter a numeric
magnification increases). magnification decreases). value directly.
Upper:
Fe detection sensitivity*
Sens mode
Shows the determined
mode by Auto-set.
Lower:
SUS detection sensitivity* Effect value display bar
Shows the effect value
in real-time.

[H]: Displayed for products for Blue line
which the sensitivity Indicates the relative effect
value of the master product Inverted triangle ()
improved after setting HIS. saved by auto-set, as the
Indicates the relative
Displays algorithm 1, 2 for < and > buttons are pressed.
position of the evaluation
the adjacent number. limit.
Estimated detection sensitivity
[T]: Displayed for products for
(displayed automatically)
which autotracking is used.
[P]: Displayed for products for
which the product check
function is used.
4 Maintenance
* Ext (Effect value display bar intended contaminants other than Fe and SUS) may be
displayed. Ext is detected by either the circuit of Fe or SUS.
5 Appendix
239
[F]: Displayed for products that set the FOCUS

setting
[T]: Displayed for products for which
1 Basic Operations
autotracking is used. Effect value indicator
[P]: Displayed for products for which the Indicates the real-time Estimat detection
product check function is used. effect values. sensitivity
Sensitivity mode
(Displays the
predetermined
auto-setting values.) Inverted triangle
(▽)
ML1 detection sensitivity Indicates the
ML2 detection sensitivity relative evaluation
ML3 detection sensitivity limit position.
ML4 detection sensitivity
< button > button Evaluation limit magnification

Decreases the detection sensitivity Increases the detection sensitivity value
(the evaluation limit magnification (the evaluation limit magnification Tap this to directly input
value increases). value decreases). values.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
240
■ Changing the detection sensitivity (for a metal contamination check)
▪ To decrease the detection sensitivity
Increase the evaluation limit magnification if the effect of a product that has no metal
contaminant exceeds the evaluation limit due to a wide variety of effect of the product
1 Basic Operations
or the effect value is increased due to changes in the components of the product.
▪ To increase the detection sensitivity
Decrease the evaluation limit magnification if the effect of a product that has no metal
contaminant has a sufficient margin for the evaluation limit due to a small variety of
effect of the product or the effect value is decreased due to changes in the
components of the product.
Example: Product effect value (reference) for stably use
Decrease the evaluation limit magnification so that the average of the product
effect value will be a third of the evaluation limit and may not exceed a half of
the maximum evaluation limit.
1 Feed master products several times and check the maximum deflection of the
detection sensitivity.
2 If the deflection is within 2 scales, go to step 3.

If the deflection is 3 scales or more, increase the value of the evaluation limit
magnification of Fe or SUS and repeat steps 1 and 2 until the deflection falls within 2
scales.
If the deflection is 3 scales or more, increase the value of the evaluation limit
magnification and repeat steps 1 and 2 until the deflection falls within 2 scales.
: The evaluation limit magnification of Fe or SUS
: The evaluation limit magnification of ML1, ML2, ML3 or ML4
4 Maintenance
Increasing the deflection of the detection sensitivity display increases the detection sensitivity.
However, this increases the possibility of false detection due to the shape of the product and the
differences in components.
3 Attach a test piece (or contaminant) to the master product, feed it through several
times, and adjust the evaluation limit magnification to ensure NG detections.
4 Attach a test piece (or contaminant) to different positions on the product and adjust the
evaluation limit magnification to ensure NG detections for any position.
5 Feed master products several times and make sure that NG is not detected. If the
5 Appendix
master product is evaluated as NG, return to step 2 and make adjustments.
241
If a false detection occurs when you feed only the master product, Fe and SUS test pieces as
well as contaminants such as rust cannot be detected.
1 Basic Operations
■ Changing the detection sensitivity (for a missing product check)

Although the setting screen differs, the procedure to adjust the detection sensitivity of a
missing product check is the same as that of an adjustment for a metal contamination
check. See the following figure for the main differences.
< button > button

Press to increase the detection Press to decrease the detection
sensitivity (the evaluation limit sensitivity (the evaluation limit
magnification increases). magnification decreases).
Common bar graph

to adjust (Fe/SUS)
Stabilization index R
(fixed value)
Stabilization index R
(fixed value)
Sens mode
Shows the determined
4 Maintenance
mode by Auto-set.
Common bar graph

to adjust (ML1)
< button > button

Press to increase the detection Press to decrease the detection
5 Appendix
sensitivity (the evaluation limit sensitivity (the evaluation limit

magnification increases). magnification decreases).
242
1 Feed master products several times and check the maximum deflection of the
detection sensitivity.
2 If the deflection is 3 red scales or more (right side of ), go to step 3.
1 Basic Operations
If the deflection is within 2 red scales, decrease the value of the evaluation limit
magnification and repeat it until the deflection reaches 3 red scales or more.
3 Feed a missing product (NG sample) several times.

If the deflection is 3 green scales or more, increase the value of the evaluation limit
magnification and adjust the deflection so that it will be within 2 green scales.
4 Change the orientation to feed the missing product (NG sample) and adjust the
evaluation limit magnification to ensure NG detections at any orientation.
If there is a problem with NG detection at a certain orientation, feed a missing product
(NG sample) at that orientation and adjust the evaluation limit magnification again
according to step 3.
5 Feed the master product several times and make sure that NG is not detected.
If the master product is evaluated as NG, return to step 2 and make adjustments.

If a false detection occurs when you feed the master product only, a missing product check
cannot be performed.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
243
■ Sensitivity Adjustment 2 screen (for a metal contamination check)
Latest/Latest 10 tab Estimated detection

sensitivity
1 Basic Operations
Latest: Displays the latest item only.

Latest 10: Displays latest 10 items. (displayed ˄ button
automatically) Increases the evaluation limit
magnification value (the detection
Left: Right: sensitivity decreases).
Fe detection sensitivity* SUS detection sensitivity*
Evaluation limit
magnification value
Tap this to directly input
Indicates the
values.
relative
evaluation limit ˅ button
position. Lowers the evaluation limit
If this line is magnification value (the
exceeded, the detection sensitivity
product is increases).
evaluated as NG.
Packaged type products:

The screen is switched Indicates the effect value of the last-inspected product.
by tapping the Bulk type products:
Latest/Latest 10 tab. The maximum value every 10 seconds is indicated by the white part, and
the changing value updated in real time is indicated by the green part.
Restore the evaluation

limit magnification value to
its former value that was
changed by this display.
4 Maintenance
Performs auto-setting.
Packaged type products:
Indicates the effect values of the latest 10 products.
Bulk type products:
The maximum values of the previous 9 products every 10 seconds
and the maximum value of the latest product every 10 seconds are
indicated by the white frame, and the changing values updated in
real time are indicated by the green part.
5 Appendix
* Ext (effect value display bar for metal contaminant other than Fe and SUS) may be
displayed. Ext can be detected by the Fe or SUS circuit.
244
ML1/ML2, ML3/ML4 tab

ML1/ML2 tab: Displays the detection sensitivity for ML1
1 Basic Operations
and ML2.
ML3/ML4 tab: Displays the detection sensitivity for ML3
and ML4. ˄ button
Increases the evaluation limit
Estimated detection magnification value (the detection
sensitivity sensitivity decreases).
Evaluation limit
Indicates the
magnification value
relative Tap this to directly input
evaluation limit values.
position.
If this line is ˅ button
exceeded, the Lowers the evaluation
product is limit magnification value
evaluated as (the detection sensitivity
NG. increases).

Packaged type products: Performs auto-setting. Restore the evaluation limit
Indicates the effect values of the magnification value to its
latest 10 products. former value that was
4 Maintenance
Bulk type products:

The maximum values of the previous 9 products every 10 seconds and the maximum value
of the latest product every 10 seconds are indicated by the white frame, and the changing
values updated in real time are indicated by the green part.
5 Appendix
245
■ Sensitivity Adjustment 2 screen (for a missing product check)
Latest/Latest 10 tab ˄ button

1 Basic Operations
Latest: Displays the latest item only. Stabilization index R Increases the evaluation limit
Latest 10: Displays latest 10 items. (fixed value) magnification value (the detection
sensitivity increases).
Evaluation limit
Indicates the magnification value
relative Tap this to directly input
evaluation limit values.
position.
If the value falls ˅ button
below the line, Lowers the evaluation limit
the product is magnification value (the
evaluated as detection sensitivity
NG. decreases).
Indicates the effect value of the last-inspected product.
The screen is switched

by tapping the
Latest/Latest 10 tab.
Restore the evaluation limit

magnification value to its
4 Maintenance
former value that was

Performs auto-setting.
Indicates the effect values of the latest 10 products.
5 Appendix
246
˄ button
magnification value (the detection Stabilization index R
1 Basic Operations
sensitivity increases). (fixed value)
Evaluation limit
magnification value
Indicates the
Tap this to directly input
relative
values.
evaluation limit
position.
If the value falls ˅ button
below the line, Lowers the evaluation
the product is limit magnification value
evaluated as (the detection sensitivity
NG. decreases).
Performs auto-setting. Restore the evaluation limit

Indicates the effect values of the magnification value to its former
latest 10 products. value that was changed by this
display.

> Chronologically Viewing the Effect Value of the Product (Product effect monitor)
The value of effect from products and metal contaminants can be checked by viewing the
effect value history of the last 100 weighed products on the Product effect monitor screen.
The detection sensitivity can also be changed from this screen.
However, the screen displays the value affected during measurement when metal 3 (for a
product that does not block the photocell) is selected.
■ How to call the Product effect monitor screen 4 Maintenance
Tap the [Adjust sensitivity.] button on the "Basic display" screen and then select 3 of
“Display”.
You can also directly tap the metal detection level bar and then select 3 of “Display”.
* Access level 2 or higher (not changeable) is required to use this function.
5 Appendix
247
■ Description of the Product effect monitor screen
(for a metal contamination check)
1 Basic Operations
White horizontal line ^ button Evaluation limit magnification

Indicates the relative position Increases the evaluation limit Press here to enter a
of the evaluation limit. magnification (the detection numeric value directly.
sensitivity decreases).
Upper: Fe detection sensitivity

Lower: SUS detection sensitivity
Effect value display

The effect values of up to the last 100 [Clear] button
products are chronologically displayed. Clears the display

The latest value is on the rightmost. of all effect values.
Green bars indicate no metal
contamination, and red bars indicate
MDNG.
v button
Decreases the evaluation limit
[Stop] button magnification (the detection sensitivity
Temporary stops updating of effect value increases).
history display and fixes the display. Press
this button again to release stopping of the White vertical dotted line
effect value display update (the effect values Indicates the point where the detection sensitivity
of the products that have been fed while (detection limit magnification) is changed
updating is stopped are displayed at once).
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
248

ML1/ML2 tab: Displays the detection sensitivity ^ button
1 Basic Operations
for ML1 and ML2.
ML3/ML4 tab: Displays the detection sensitivity Estimated detection magnification (the detection
for ML3 and ML4. sensitivity sensitivity decreases).
White horizontal
line
Indicates the
Evaluation limit
relative position
magnification
of the evaluation
Press here to enter a
limit.
numeric value directly.
v button
Decreases the
White vertical dotted line evaluation limit
Indicates the point where the magnification (the
[Clear] button
detection sensitivity (detection detection sensitivity
Clears the display of
limit magnification) is changed. increases).
all effect values.

Effect value display [Stop] button
The effect values of up to the last 100 products Temporary stops updating of effect value history display
are chronologically displayed. The latest value and fixes the display. Press this button again to release
is on the rightmost. stopping of the effect value display update (the effect
Green bars indicate no metal contamination, values of the products that have been fed while
and red bars indicate MDNG. updating is stopped are displayed at once).
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
249
■ Description of the Product effect monitor screen (for a missing product check)
^ button v button
1 Basic Operations
Increase the evaluation limit magnification Decrease the evaluation limit magnification
(the detection sensitivity increases). (the detection sensitivity decreases).
Common bar graph

to adjust (Fe/SUS)

Green bars indicated no missing products,
and red bars indicate missing product NG.
^ button
Stabilization index R Increase the evaluation limit magnification
(fixed value) (the detection sensitivity increases).
Common bar graph

to adjust (ML1)
4 Maintenance
Effect value display v button

Green bars indicated no missing products, Decrease the evaluation limit magnification
and red bars indicate missing product NG. (the detection sensitivity decreases).
5 Appendix
250
> Checking the Effects such as External Noise (Noise monitor)
You can view metal detecting signals in real-time on the Noise monitor screen to check
whether disturbance noise is present and the value of effect from products and metal
1 Basic Operations
contaminants. The detection sensitivity can also be changed from this screen.
■ Differences between the Noise monitor screen and the Product effect monitor
screen
The Noise monitor screen displays the effect value from the metal detected by the metal
detector head even when the system is paused or when products are not being fed. This
function is useful to monitor the noise level from the surrounding area, which might cause
a false detection, and check the value of effect from a product that does not block the
photocell.
■ How to call the Noise monitor screen

Tap the [Adjust sensitivity.] button on the "Basic display" screen and then select 4 of
“Display”.
You can also directly tap the metal detection level bar and then select 4 of “Display”.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
251
■ Description of the Noise monitor screen
Although the figure below shows a screen for a metal contamination check, the screen
display for a missing product check is the same except that a common bar graph to adjust
1 Basic Operations
(Fe and SUS) is displayed.
White horizontal line Evaluation limit magnification and evaluation limit adjust buttons
Indicates the relative position * Same function as that on the Product effect monitor screen
of the evaluation limit. ( P. 248).
Upper: Fe detection sensitivity
Lower: SUS detection sensitivity


The effect values are displayed [Clear] button
chronologically in the cycle of 0.1 second. Clears the display of all effect values.
The latest value is on the rightmost.
[Stop] button
Temporary stops updating of effect value history display and fixes the display. Press this
button again to release stopping of the effect value display update (the effect values of the
products that have been fed while updating is stopped are displayed at once).
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
252

^ button
ML1/ML2 tab: Displays the detection sensitivity
1 Basic Operations
for ML1 and ML2.
Estimated detection magnification (the detection
ML3/ML4 tab: Displays the detection sensitivity
sensitivity sensitivity decreases).
for ML3 and ML4.
White Evaluation limit

horizontal line magnification
Indicates the Press here to enter a
relative numeric value directly.
position of the
evaluation
v button
limit.
Decreases the
evaluation limit
Effect value display [Clear] button magnification (the
The effect values are displayed Clears the display of all detection sensitivity
chronologically in the cycle of 0.1 second. effect values. increases).
T he latest value is on the rightmost.

[Stop] button
Temporary stops updating of effect value history display and fixes the display. Press this button again to
release stopping of the effect value display update (the effect values of the products that have been fed
while updating is stopped are displayed at once).
Although the figure below shows a screen for a metal contamination check, the screen
display for a missing product check is the same except that a common bar graph to adjust
(ML1) is displayed.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
253
> Using HIS Setting Function
The HIS setting function increases the detection probability by registering the properties
of OK products and NG products into the metal detector and automatically specifying the
1 Basic Operations
settings suited for the test pieces to be detected. The target metal can be detected with
higher probability by performing the HIS setting function after auto-setting.
Be sure to prepare the following before executing the HIS setting function.
 If an inspection product does not interrupt the photocell axis, interrupt it by hand when
the product reaches the detector head.
 Usually, place NG products so that the test piece passes around the center of detector
head, where the detection probability becomes lowest, in order to increase the
detection probability for metal contaminants at any position in inspected products.
 The detection sensitivity can be increased by performing the HIS setting several times.
 The HIS setting function might not always increase the detection probability for any metal.
The detection results might be the same as those after auto-setting, depending on the type of
the inspection products (dimensions, shape, conductivity, etc.), metal type (material, shape,
etc.), and the installation environment of the system.
 Estimated improvement rate after performing the HIS setting varies depending on type of test
piece or inspected products.

 0% of the estimated improvement rate indicates no improvement compared with the detection
sensitivity obtained at auto-setting.
 If evaluation mode is “Check missing product”, HIS setting function is not available.
 By newly performing the auto-setting ( P. 45 Registering a New Product – step 16), HIS
setting is restored to the default value.
 For the M5 type, the HIS setting can be adjusted when performing the auto setting again.
 Set “Algorithm auto selection” and “S1 auto selection” to “Yes” in advance.
 P. 69 HIS setting details
 In the case of a false detection after executing the HIS setting, perform the auto setting again
4 Maintenance
by using the product causing the false detection. If "H2" is displayed on the detection
sensitivity adjustment screen, perform the following procedures for the related product.
(1) Adjust the flow direction and angle of the product causing a false detection, and execute
the HIS setting again.
(2) Select [Restore the default algorithm] on the HIS setting execution method selection
screen, and execute the HIS setting again.
(3) Set “Algorithm auto selection” to "No", and execute the HIS setting again.
5 Appendix
254
To assure stable metal detection, warm up the system after power-on

Caution for at least 60 minutes before performing the HIS setting function.
However, if the target product is packaged in aluminum-evaporated
1 Basic Operations
materials or has a high salt concentration, warm up the system for at
least 90 minutes.
For M5, turn the power on, and wait for 10 minutes or longer before
executing the HIS setting.
The rejector does not operate during HIS setting. Do not feed OK or
Caution NG product to the downstream.
■ Items to be prepared for HIS setting
Use the metal contaminant to be used as the metal-control criteria (the material
Test piece
provided by Anritsu is included).
Indicates average characteristics (dimension, weight, component, and package
state) of the products to be fed through on the normal line. If the characteristics
OK product
differ, prepare the multiple number of products. The results obtained after an
OK product is fed through 5 times will be taken as the measurement data.

An NG product is made by attaching a test piece to an OK product. To make the
detection sensitivity at an appropriate level, use all the prepared NG products.
NG product
The results obtained after an NG product is fed through 6 times will be taken as
the measurement data.
The following shows a place to attach a test piece:

Horizontal center of Attach a test piece Vertical center of
detector head opening here. detecor head opening Attach a test piece at the top.
OK
product
OK
product
4 Maintenance
Conveyor belt Conveyor base plate

Detector head
If the OK product is taller than the vertical If the OK product is shorter in height than
center of detector head opening the vertical center of detector head opening
5 Appendix
255
■ Setting
1 Press [Others] when the operation
stopped and press [HIS Setting] on the
right screen.
1 Basic Operations
The [HIS Setting] menu can be displayed

by pressing [Menu] → [Control Panel] →
[Home Screen Setting] → [Other Menu]
and adding “HIS Setting”.
2 Press [Next] on the “Start of HIS Setting”

screen
3 Select [Specify new HIS settings] and

press [Next].
[Restore the default algorithm] and

[Restore the default HIS settings]
become available when setting the next
time.
Selecting [Restore the default algorithm],

restores the algorithm to the default
value.
Selecting [Restore the default HIS
4 Maintenance
settings] restore the HIS settings to the

default settings (those before HIS setting
is performed).
4 Prepare the items required for the

settings (test piece, OK product, and NG
product) and press [Next].
5 Appendix
256
5 Press the [Start] button to feed the OK
product.
1 Basic Operations
6 Feed the OK product 5 times.
If multiple OK products are prepared,
feed them all.
Do not feed a product while ‘Wait for a
while.’ is displayed.

7 The screen shown to the right appears
after the product is fed 5 times. Press
[Next].
4 Maintenance
8 Feed the NG product 6 times.

5 Appendix
257
▼ When the message “The effect from the
NG product is too small” appears
The test piece attached to the NG product

1 Basic Operations
is not detected. If there are multiple types

of test piece, feed the product with the test
piece one-size larger than that used.
▼ When the message “The effect from the

NG product is too large” appears
The test piece attached to the NG product

has already been detected. Check

whether the correct test piece is attached.
9 The “End of HIS setting” screen appears

after the setting is correctly completed.
Press [Completed].
The value enclosed in brackets ([ ]) on

the screen indicates the estimated
improvement rate of the detection
sensitivity compared with that obtained at
auto-setting.
The estimated improvement rate of the detection sensitivity is not a guaranteed value but an
indication. Always check the detection sensitivity after executing the HIS setting function.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
258
> Using Auto-Limit-Setting Function
The auto-limit-setting function automatically sets the optimum evaluation limit based on
randomness in inspected products and test piece effects. This function reduces
1 Basic Operations
misdetection and assures stable inspection.
If performing the HIS setting and auto-limit-setting functions at the sametime, perform the
HIS setting function first.
■ Items to be prepared for auto-limit-setting function

Use the metal contaminant to be used as the metal-control criteria (the
Test piece
material provided by Anritsu is included).
Indicates average characteristics (dimension, weight, component, and
OK product package state) of the products to be fed through to the normal line. If the
characteristics differ, prepare the multiple number of products.
An NG product is made by attaching a test piece to an OK product. To set
NG product
appropriate detection sensitivity, use all the prepared NG products.
■ Setting method selection

There are two methods to set auto-limit-setting function.

To set the function, in whichever method, an inspected product should be fed through 5 to
99 times. The more the product is fed, the less incorrect detection occurs which leads to
more stable inspection.
(1) Feeding OK product only

Select this method if no test piece used as a reference for detection is prepared.
The appropriate evaluation limit is set in consideration of variation of OK product only.
(2) Feeding OK and NG products

Select this method if a test piece to be referenced for detection is prepared.
The appropriate evaluation limit is set in consideration of variation of OK and NG
4 Maintenance
products.
If the difference between evaluation values of OK and NG products is small, incorrect
detection frequently occurs. In such case, select method (1) to set the function.
5 Appendix
259
The method to feed OK products only can be set during operation.

 In the “General” screen, select [Set/Adj] → [Auto Limit Setting], and specify the setting
according to the instructions on the screen.
1 Basic Operations
 If a product is evaluated as NG during setting, the data of the product is not reflected on the
setting, and the product is rejected as an NG product.
 Set the count to feed an OK product during operation in [Auto-limit count] in advance.
 P. 184 Auto-limit setting
 If the inspected product is bulk type, the parameter [MD Ultra under limit] must be set.
 P. 58 Ins. condition set
■ Setting
1 Press [Others] with the operation
stopped and press [Auto Limit Setting] on

the right screen.
The [Auto Limit Setting] menu can be

displayed by pressing [Menu] → [Control
Panel] → [Home Screen Setting] →
[Other Menu] and adding “Auto Limit
Setting”.
2 Press [Next] on the “Start of auto-limit

setting” screen.
3 Select the execution method of auto-limit

4 Maintenance
setting and press [Next].

5 Appendix
260
4 Prepare OK or NG product according to
the instructions on the screen.
1 Basic Operations
5 If the product feeding orientation is
unstable during production, feed the
product appropriately to the possible
situation to obtain the correct settings.
6 Press the [Start] button.

7 Feed OK or NG product according to the
instructions on the screen and settings.
4 Maintenance
8 When “Auto-limit setting finished.”

appears, press [Completed].
5 Appendix
261
> Using FOCUS Setting Function
The FOCUS setting is the function to attempt an enhancement of the detection sensitivity
for metallic foreign materials such as metallic wire that are not different from Fe- or SUS-
1 Basic Operations
metallic balls to be used as a normal metallic contaminant. By registering the properties

of OK products and NG products into the metal detector, and the settings suited for the
test pieces to be detected is done automatically.
* The FOCUS setting function might not always increase the detection probability for
any metal. The detection results might be the same as those after auto-setting,
depending on the type of the inspection products (dimensions, shape, conductivity,
etc.), metal type (material, shape, etc.), and the installation environment of the system.
* The FOCUS setting overwrites the setting details determined by Auto-setting. The
FOCUS setting corresponds to the characteristics of metallic foreign materials.
Therefore, the sensitivity for test pieces that can be detected in accordance with
Auto-setting may decrease. After setting, check the detection sensitivity using a test
piece. If Auto-setting is required again, do not use the current settings but configure
Auto-setting.
 P. 102 Auto Settings (Readjusting registered products – Step 3)

Be sure to prepare the following before executing the FOCUS setting function.
■ Performs auto-setting before the FOCUS setting function.
■ If an inspection product does not interrupt the photocell axis, interrupt it by hand when
the product reaches the detector head.
■ Usually, place NG products so that the t metallic contaminant passes around the
center of detector head, where the detection probability becomes lowest, in order to
increase the detection probability for metal contaminants at any position in inspected
products.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
262
■ The detection sensitivity can be increased by performing the FOCUS setting several times.
■ Estimated improvement rate after performing the FOCUS setting varies depending on type of
metallic contaminant or inspected products.
1 Basic Operations
■ If evaluation mode is “Check missing product”, FOCUS setting function is not available.
■ If an NG product that has been used in the FOCUS setting cannot be set, the FOCUS setting
is not available.
■ By newly performing the auto-setting ( P. 39 Registering a New Products – step 7),
FOCUS setting is restored to the default value.
■ The FOCUS setting can be adjusted when performing the auto setting again.
■ In the case of a false detection after executing the FOCUS setting, perform the auto setting
again by using the product causing the false detection.
To assure stable metal detection, warm up the system after power-on
Caution for at least 10 minutes before performing the FOCUS setting function.
The flipper-type, dropout-type, or carrier-type rejector rejects OK

Caution

products and NG products used for the FOCUS setting in the forced
rejection direction. Other rejectors do not function for the FOCUS
setting. Be careful to prevent OK products and NG products to be
used from flowing to the downstream.
■ Items to be prepared for FOCUS setting

Metallic
Use the metal contaminant to be used as the metal-control criteria.
contaminant
Indicates average characteristics (dimension, weight, component, and package
state) of the products to be fed through on the normal line. If the characteristics
OK product
4 Maintenance
differ, prepare a multiple number of products. The results obtained after an OK
product is fed through 5 times will be taken as the measurement data.
An NG product is made by attaching a metallic contaminant to an OK product.
To make the detection sensitivity at an appropriate level, use all the prepared
NG product
NG products. The results obtained after an NG product is fed through 6 times
will be taken as the measurement data.
The following shows a place to attach a metallic contaminant:

5 Appendix
263
Center width of metal Center height of metal
detector head opening Attach here detector head opening Attach here
OK OK
product product
1 Basic Operations
Conveyor belt Transport belt plate Detection Head
OK product height ＞ Center height of metal OK product height ≦ Center head of metal
detector head opening detector head opening
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
264
■ Setting
1 Press [Others] when the operation
stopped and press [FOCUS Setting] on
the right screen.
1 Basic Operations
The [FOCUS Setting] menu can be
displayed by pressing [Menu] → [Control
Panel] → [Home Screen Setting] →
[Other Menu] and adding “FOCUS
Setting”.
2 Press [Next] on the “Start of FOCUS
Setting” screen

3 Prepare the items required for the
settings (metallic contaminant, OK
product, and NG product) and press
[Next].
4 Maintenance
4 Press the [Start] button to feed the OK

product.
5 Appendix
265
5 Feed the OK product 5 times.
If multiple OK products are prepared,
feed them all.
1 Basic Operations
Do not feed a product while ‘Wait for a

while.’ is displayed.
6 The screen shown on the right appears

after the product is fed 5 times. Press
[Next].
7 Feed the NG product 6 times.

4 Maintenance
▼ When the message “The effect from the NG product is too small” appears
The metallic contaminant attached to the

NG product is not detected. If there are
multiple types of test piece, feed the
product with the test piece one-size larger
than that used.
5 Appendix
266
▼ When the message “The effect from the NG product is too large” appears
The metallic contaminant e attached to the

NG product has already been detected. If
1 Basic Operations
there are several types of metallic
contaminants, attach a smaller metallic
contaminant to a product and feed it.
8 The “End of FOCUS setting” screen

appears after the setting is correctly
completed. Press [Completed].
Always check the detection sensitivity after executing the FOCUS setting function.

■
■ If an impact of the NG product is poorly checked, the detection sensitivity may decrease.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
267
This chapter describes the installation method of the checkweigher
and the connection method with external equipment.
Selecting Installation Location and Transportation 269
Installation 270
Connecting External Equipment 273
How to Seal 276
Connecting Power Supply and Grounding, Turning On the Power 279

268
Selecting Installation Location and Transportation
Selecting Installation Location and Transportation
■ Installation location
Install the Checkweigher in a location meeting the following conditions.
• Where the temperature range is within 0 to 40°C
1 Basic Operations
• Where the relative humidity is within 30% to 85% with no condensation.
• Where it will not be exposed to direct sunlight or radiant heat from a stove or heater.
• Where the power supply voltage does not fluctuate more than +10%, -15%.
• Where there is little or no vibration. Where vibration is not easily generated.
• Where the air is clean and dust free.
500 mm
• Where there are no flammable, active gases or salt sprays. Back
side
• Where it will not be exposed to drafts from an air
conditioner, etc.
Checkweigher
• Where the location will not be affected by
noise from the checkweigher.
500 mm
Front
(The noise level of the checkweigher side
does not exceed 70 dB (A).)

• Where the space shown in the figure (shaded area) can be reserved to support
operations and maintenance.
■ Transportation
When transporting the checkweigher, keep it so that there is no more

Warning than 10 degrees of tilt in any direction to prevent it from falling.
■ DO NOT apply a strong force or mechanical shock to the weigh

Caution
4 Maintenance
conveyor, otherwise the weighcell may be damaged.

■ Lock the weighcell before moving the checkweigher.
 P. 270 Installation
1 Using a fork lift for transportation

Insert the fork beneath the round pipe.
Round pipe
5 Appendix
Correct
places of fork
269
Installation
Installation
If excessive force is applied, the equipment may tip over and cause
Warning personal injury. Use the optional anchors to secure the equipment to
the floor.
1 Basic Operations
Before installation, make sure that all four rubber feet protectors have been removed.
1 Releasing the lock on the weighcell
▼ KWS6XXX type
Change the position of the lock spring of the

weighcell.
(1) Remove the 4 screws on the weighcell
unit with the provided spanner, and
remove the cover.
The weighcell cover is on the exit side of Lock spring
the weigh conveyor.

(2) Adjust the lock spring to the release

position.
Condition Lock spring position

Released
In use
When shipped, transported, or Locked

when not used for a long time
(3) Install the weighcell cover.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
270
Installation
▼ KWS5XXX type
Replace the screw on the bottom of the

weighcell.
1 Basic Operations
(1) Remove the screw in the LOCK part.
Loosen the lock nut with the spanner, LOCK part ← part
and remove the screw with a Phillips
screwdriver.
Lock nut
(2) Remove the screw in the ← part with a Long screw
Phillips screwdriver.
Sealing washer
(3) Replace the LOCK part screw and the Short screw
← part screw.
Make sure to attach the sealing
washers.
Condition LOCK part ← part
In use

When shipped, transported, or
when not used for a long time
(4) Make sure that the lock nut is fully tightened.
2 Installing
Do not set any one of the 4 foot bolts too high or too low. It may cause
Warning the checkweigher to topple.
4 Maintenance
■ When adjusting foot bolts, do not hold the thread part by hand. Your
Caution hand may be injured by the edges of the thread.
■ When adjusting the height of the carrying belt surface, be careful so
that your finger does not get caught between the checkweigher and
upstream/downstream conveyors.
5 Appendix
271
Installation
(1) Loosen the lock nut of the foot bolts with Foot bolt adjustment
Lock nut
a spanner. Raise bolt Lower belt
surface surface
1 Basic Operations
Foot bolts (4 locations)
(2) Adjust the foot bolts to align the conveyor belt heights with the production line.
• Place a level on the weighcell conveyor section to make sure it is level.
• Make sure that the checkweigher does not come into contact with the
upstream/downstream devices.
• The foot bolts should not come off the floor.

• Products should be carried smoothly.

Flow
No unevenness
Downstream conveyor
Infeed conveyor Weigh

Upstream conveyor conveyor Adjust within 0 to 2 mm
depending on products.
Should not come off the floor and should be stable (4 locations). 0 to 2 mm
You may need to lower the carrying belt surface of the downstream conveyor by 0 to 2
mm, depending on the product being measured.
(3) Tighten the lock nut of the foot bolts with a spanner.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
272
Connecting External Equipment
Connect the checkweigher with I/O and external equipment.

For applicable cables and I/O specifications, refer to “External I/O Specifications”.
 P. 381 External I/O Specifications
1 Basic Operations
To connect the Anritsu rejector, refer to the operation manual of the rejector.
Do not connect the power plug to the socket until the connection is
Warning complete. If you connect the cables while the power is connected,
there is a risk of receiving an electric shock, or of damage to the
electronic components. Connect the devices and cables correctly,
following the descriptions below. Connection errors may result in
losing the waterproof and dustproof properties of the equipment.
After connecting the equipment, turn on the power and set the I/O signals.
 P. 127 Setting External I/O Signals
> SSV-h/f Series

1 Remove the back panel of the indicator.
Loosen the 6 screws with a spanner, and
remove the back panel.
2 Route the external connection cable.

(1) Loosen the screw with a hex key wrench, 4 Maintenance
and remove the cable cover.
(2) Run the cable through the cable inlet.

MPU2010
(3) After connecting the cable to the
connector, connect the connector to X53 GPIO
X53
(GPIO) of the MPU2010.
 P. 381 External I/O Specifications
(4) Route the cable as shown in the figure.

5 Appendix
(5) Close the cable cover, and tighten the Cable cover
Cable inlet
screw with a hex key wrench.
273
3 Attach the back panel.

Attach the back panel of the indicator,
and tighten the 6 screws with a spanner.
1 Basic Operations
> SSV-i Series
Caution Be careful of burrs after punching out the knockout parts.

Loosen the 6 screws with a spanner, and

remove the back panel.
2 Punch cable wiring holes.

Knockout part
Punch out the knockout parts with a (dent)
punch and a hammer.
Punch out
3 Route the external connection cable.

Cable clamp
(1) Loosen (A) of the cable clamp, and run (B)
(C) (A)
the cable as shown in the figure.
4 Maintenance
(2) After connecting the cable to the

Cable
connector, connect the connector to X53 MPU2010
(GPIO) of the MPU2010.
GPIO
 P. 381 External I/O Specifications X53
(3) Insert (B) into the knockout part, hold it

Cable clamp
securely with (C) from the inside of the
indicator, and tighten (B).
5 Appendix
274
(4) Route the cable as shown in the figure.
(5) Tighten (A) fully.

Pull the cable lightly to make sure it will
1 Basic Operations
not come off.
4 Install the back panel.

Install the back panel of the indicator, and tighten the 6 screws with a spanner.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
275
How to Seal
How to Seal
The contents of this chapter are for maker use.

Explains how to use the Sealing Navigation and where seal needs to be applied.
1 Basic Operations
> Apply a Seal

When you seal the machine, apply a seal shown below. ([1] to [7])
[1]
Seal
Weighcell
[2]
Weighcell
Weighcell Screw
[3]
Seal
[4] Base screw

Seal
[5]
Seal
4 Maintenance
[7]
[6]
MPU board
screw
Compact Flash
5 Appendix
276
How to Seal
> Sealing the Machine

This explains on how to use Sealing the machine.
Some functions and setting will have limited access after sealing.
1 Basic Operations
1 Change access level
Change access level to [3: Service engineer level]
2 Go to [Menu] → [Maintenance/Setting] →
[Maker Setting] → [Machine sealing]
3 Select the content.
Select [Seals the machine] and press
[Next]

For unsealing, select [Unseals the
machine]
4 Set [upper limit of the main conveyor speed] and [upper limit of the weight range].
Enter the certified value into [upper limit of the main conveyor speed] and [upper limit
of the weight range]. You will not be able to enter setting above those values.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
277
How to Seal
5 Sealing the machine

Check in the box for acknowledgement and press [YES]. Sealing process will begin.
It will take 1 to 2 minute to be completed.
1 Basic Operations
When sealing is completed, press

[completed] to end the navigation.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
278
Connecting Power Supply and Grounding, Turning On the Power
Connecting Power Supply and Grounding, Turning On the Power
■ Class D grounding must be performed. Turning on the power

Warning without grounding may cause an electric shock that leads to an
injury or death.
1 Basic Operations
■ Make sure that the power supply voltage is within the specified
range. Running the checkweigher while the power supply voltage is
out of the specified range might cause failure or fire.
1 Check the specified power supply voltage range indicated on the checkweigher
nameplate.
2 Connect the power supply and grounding.
Make sure to ground the earth terminal.
▼ 100V specification
Standard power supply plug
Connect the power supply plug to the socket.

If the power supply plug cannot be used,
remove the tip of the plug and connect the Ground terminal

wires to the plug to be used. Brown
Blue Power supply
Green/yellow Ground terminal
▼ 200V specification
Brown
Connect the power supply cable. Blue Power supply
Green/yellow Ground terminal
3 Turn on the power switch.

⇒ The [Start] screen is displayed. ON
4 Maintenance
OFF
5 Appendix
279
4 Maintenance
This chapter describes the maintenance of the checkweigher and
troubleshooting.
Daily Maintenance 281
Cleaning 283
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series) 287
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-i series) 300
Check Items for Failure 309
Error Messages and Solutions 325
Adjusting Photocell 356

4 Maintenance
280
Daily Maintenance
Daily Maintenance
When inspecting the conveyor while operating, be careful not to touch

Caution the roller belt. When operating the conveyor with a separately installed
indicator (optional), make sure no one is around the conveyor.
1 Basic Operations
Do not operate the conveyor if the conveyor belt is misaligned. If the
Caution conveyor belt is misaligned, correct the alignment before starting
operation. The end face of the conveyor belt may touch the drive belt
and generate wear debris, which may contaminate the product.
> Daily Maintenance
(1) Before operation
Check the following items before starting operation.
■ Touching parts
Check that the checkweigher and upstream/downstream conveyors are not touching
with each other.
■ Misalignment of the conveyor belt
Make sure that the belt is not misaligned.

■ Parameters
Check that the reference weight, upper limit, and lower limit settings are correct.
■ Accuracy
Feed a master product and check the displayed weight. Repeat this ten times to
confirm the accuracy.
■ Checking the detection sensitivity
Feed a master product or a master product with test pieces attached (or defective
master product) and make sure that they are correctly detected. 4 Maintenance
■ Rejection (only when rejector connected)

Feed OK, +NG, -NG, and MDNG products to check the rejection.
(2) After operation

Clean the checkweigher after operation is ended. After cleaning, check the following.
■ Remove residues near the weighcell.
■ Remove conveyors to clean both belt surfaces.
■ Clean the equipment.
5 Appendix
281
Daily Maintenance
If products cannot properly be rejected by the rejector, check the following points. After the
check and the adjustment, operate the rejector to check if products are properly rejected.
– Checkweigher and rejector –
1 Basic Operations
Conveyor
▪ The transfer timing for products is not deviated due the transfer error.
▪ The belt tension for conveyor belt and drive belt are strong enough.
▪ The timing belt and roller are not abraded.
▪ The transfer speed for products is not temporarily slowed down due to the collision between
the gate and the warpage or the ravel of the belt.
▪ The air cylinder or the actuator operates properly at the first run after non-working day.
– Rejector –
Drive unit
▪ The air pressure is sufficient enough.

▪ The voltage is not lowered.
Actuator
▪ The tightening screws on the gates are not loosened.
▪ The gate drive unit is not abraded.
▪ The bearing is not abraded.
Pusher type
▪ Two products are not placed closely on the conveyor at the same time (double product).
Carrier type
▪ The connection shaft is not stained.
Air jet type

▪ The direction of the air blow is appropriate.
Others
▪ The downstream conveyor is not full of products and the products do not contact each other.
> Weekly Maintenance

Check the following items once a week.
■ Conveyor belt
Detach the conveyor belt and check that there is no fraying on the edges.
4 Maintenance
■ Motor, Rollers, and Conveyor belt

Run the conveyor to check for abnormal noise or belt meandering.
5 Appendix
282
Cleaning
Cleaning
DO NOT apply a strong force or mechanical shock to the weigh

Caution conveyor section, otherwise the weighcell may be damaged.
1 Basic Operations
> SSV-h/f Series
Do not wash the checkweigher with water. Make sure to turn off the
Warning power switch before cleaning.
■ Wipe off stains with a cloth soaked in water or a mild detergent.
Never use a metal brush.
■
■ Do not use organic solvents, such as thinner and toluene.

■ Clean the carrying belt, roller, and detection head according to the waterproof
specifications (IP66).
> SSV-i Series

Before cleaning, make sure to turn off the power. Before washing the
Warning checkweigher with water, make sure to pull out the power plug.
After using the equipment, the conveyor rollers, conveying surface,

Caution conveyor belt, tension roller and the opening of the metal detecting
unit should be thoroughly cleaned and/or washed with water for the
next usage. If the equipment is used without being cleaned or washed
thoroughly, mold may develop on the conveyor belt.
4 Maintenance
(1) Weigh/Infeed conveyor section
Wipe off stains with a cloth soaked in water or a mild detergent.

For severe stains, remove and clean the conveyor. The quick-release part of the conveyor
can be sterilized with boiling water. The estimated lifespan is as follows:
Condition: Washed with water at 100°C for 5 minutes once per day after normal use
(8 hours per day).
■ Conveyor belt life: 6 months
■ Roller: 1 year
5 Appendix
The life depends on the usage. Use above figures as a guideline.
283
Cleaning
(2) Conveyor belt
After operation, remove the conveyor belt and wash it thoroughly. Mold
Caution might grow if you continue using the conveyor belt with remnants from
1 Basic Operations
previous operations left on the conveyor. In addition, the metal detector

may detect the remnant.
Clean the conveyor belt thoroughly and dry it. If you cannot reserve
Caution enough drying time, keep a spare belt. Never use a dryer.
Remove the conveyor belt from the conveyor unit and clean it.
Examples of required cleaning

■ Wash off remains of products using neutral detergent and rinse the belt with water.
■ Immerse the belt in boiling water (100°C) for 5 minutes max.

■ Wash the belt in a solution of hypochlorous acid (200 ppm) and rinse it with water
(5 minutes max.).
■ Naturally and thoroughly dry the conveyor belt.
■ When using neutral detergent or a solution of hypochlorous acid, always rinse the belt with
water, otherwise mold may grow and packings may deteriorate in early stages to disturb
operation.
■ Do not use a soft plastic brush to clean the conveyor surface. It may accelerate wear of the
belt surface. If you continue using a worn roller for a long period, the metal detection unit
might yield false detections due to the influence of wear debris. Thoroughly clean and remove
the wear debris on the conveyor belt.
■ Never use a dryer to dry the belt.
(3) Roller
4 Maintenance
The alumite-treated roller surface improves corrosion resistance. If the treated surface is
damaged due to a scratch on the roller, corrosion may occur from the damaged area.
Accordingly, take care not to scratch the roller.
Additionally, the alumite-treated surface may corrode if not cleaned properly. Clean the
roller according to the instructions in the table below.
If the roller is badly stained, remove and clean it. Do not soak or boil the roller when
cleaning.
5 Appendix
284
Cleaning
Cleaning methods
Alkaline detergent ×
Organic solvent such as thinner or toluene ×
Solution of hypochlorous acid (*1) △
1 Basic Operations
Neutral detergent (*2) ○
* ○: Can use, △: Can use but corrosion resistance lowered, ×: Cannot use
*1 Clean the parts with a 200 ppm or lower hypochlorous acid solution, and fully wash
it off after cleaning.
*2 Use of neutral detergent for cleaning is recommended.
(4) Metal detection unit
Clean the areas around the detector head periodically. Mold might
Caution grow if you continue operating with residues from previous operations
left on that area. In addition, the metal detector may detect residues as
contaminants.
Resin or packing in the area around the detection head opening deteriorates earlier in
accordance with how to wash it. Wash it in accordance with the following table.

Cleaning method
Organic solvent such as thinner or ×
toluene
Alcohol △
Solution of hypochlorous acid (*1) △
Neutral detergent (*2) ○
* ○: Can use, △: Can use but corrosion resistance lowered, ×: Cannot use
*1 Clean the parts with a 200 ppm or lower hypochlorous acid solution, and fully wash
it off after cleaning.
4 Maintenance
*2 Use of neutral detergent for cleaning is recommended.
(5) Main Unit
The main unit is rated IP66 using the Ingress Protection Rating.
What is IP66?
The main unit is protected against intrusions of dust and water to the interior.
It can withstand water projected in powerful jets (12.5mm nozzle) at 100 liters per minute from all
5 Appendix
directions from a distance of 2.5-3m. (IEC 60529)
285
Cleaning
■ Clean the checkweigher using water that is up to 60°C. Clean the metal detector with
water that is 40°C or lower.
■ Before cleaning with water, check that the indicator cover, cover of optional printer etc.,
1 Basic Operations
are completely closed.

■ Use a soft plastic brush or cloth to clean. Use a cloth to clean the surface of the
conveyor belt. If you use a soft plastic brush, you may accelerate the wear of the belt
surface. Never use a metal brush.
■ Use neutral detergent for cleaning. Never use solvents such as thinners or toluene.
■ Do not wash with steam.
Wash the checkweigher gently by running water from a hose. Do not apply water
pressure from a horizontal direction on the side plate of the weigh conveyor section.
Doing so may cause a weighcell failure.
■ The tube under the weighcell is an air breather; take care not to allow water to enter
the end of the tube.
■ The signal tower (optional) mounted on the side of the indicator is equivalent to IP54
and has a splash-proof structure. Do not to spray it with water.
> Maintenance of Stainless Steel

Stainless steel is very rust-resistant, but it is not completely rust-free under all conditions.
It can sometimes become soiled or rusty depending on the environment and usage
conditions. Periodic maintenance is required.
When any stain or rust appears, clean it by using the following methods. After cleaning,
wipe it thoroughly with water to wipe off all chemicals used.
Conditions Cleaning method

4 Maintenance
Wipe off with a sponge or cloth soaked in a mild detergent or

soapy water.
Palm and fingerprint deposits
If the stain still remains, wipe off with a sponge or cloth soaked in
an organic solvent (such as alcohol, benzene, or acetone).
Rust
Wipe off with a sponge or cloth soaked in a mild detergent or
(due to rust-promoting ferrous
soapy water.
particles or salts)
5 Appendix
286
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-h/f series)
> Removing the Weigh Conveyor Unit
Before following these procedures, make sure that the power switch
Warning
1 Basic Operations
is turned to the OFF position.
When removing the catch clip, be careful so that your finger does not
Caution get caught.
Caution Be sure not to drop the conveyor removed from the equipment.
■ KWS6XXX, KWS52XX, and KWS54XX types
Remove the product guide or optional cross plate in advance if they are being used.
1 Loosen the knurled screw with a

flat-bladed screwdriver and remove the
belt cover.

Knurled screw
Belt cover
2 Remove the two catch clips.
4 Maintenance
Catch clip
Weigh conveyor unit

3 Remove the weigh conveyor unit from
Lift
the weigh conveyor section.
Drive belt
(1) Lift the weigh conveyor unit and remove
the drive belt.
5 Appendix
(2) Remove the weigh conveyor unit.
287
■ KWS55XX type
Remove the product guide or optional cross plate in advance if they are being used.
1 Basic Operations
1 Remove the roller cover and belt cover.

(1) Loosen the two screws with a Phillips
screwdriver and remove the two roller
covers. Roller
cover
(2) Loosen the screw (at one location) with a
Phillips screwdriver and remove the belt
Belt cover
cover.
2 Loosen the four screws with a spanner.
Screw
3 Remove the weigh conveyor from the

Weigh conveyor section.
(1) Lift the weigh conveyor unit and remove

the drive belt.
Weigh conveyor unit
(2) Remove the weigh conveyor unit.
Lift
Drive belt
4 Maintenance
Pull toward
you to
remove
5 Appendix
288
> Installing the Weigh Conveyor Unit
Warning
1 Basic Operations
is turned to the OFF position. For your safety, make sure to install the
belt cover and roller cover before operation. Contact Anritsu if any of
these components are broken.
Make sure that all catch clips are firmly locked before starting
Warning operation.
Caution Be careful of your fingers when locking the catch clip.
■ KWS6XXX, KWS52XX, KWS54XX type
1 Install the weigh conveyor unit to the

Weigh conveyor unit
weigh conveyor section.
Lower

(1) Mount the weigh conveyor unit and Drive belt
install the drive belt.
(2) Lower the weigh conveyor unit slowly to

fit it onto the weigh conveyor section.
2 Lock the two catch clips.
4 Maintenance
Catch clip
3 Install the belt cover and tighten the

knurled screw with a flat-bladed
screwdriver.
Knurled screw
5 Appendix
If you are using a product guide or optional

cross plate, install it at the end. Belt cover
289
■ KWS55XX type
1 Install the weight conveyor to the weigh Weigh conveyor unit
conveyor section.
1 Basic Operations
Lower
(1) Mount the weigh conveyor unit and
Drive belt
(2) Lower the weigh conveyor unit slowly to
fit it onto the weigh conveyor section.
2 Tighten the four screws with a spanner.
Screw
3 Install the roller covers and belt cover,

and tighten the screws.
(1) Install the two roller covers and tighten

the two screws with a Phillips Roller
screwdriver. cover
(2) Install the belt cover and tighten the

Belt cover
screw (at 1 location) with a Phillips
screwdriver.
4 Make sure that the screws in Steps 2 and 3 have been tightened.
4 Maintenance
If you are using a product guide or optional cross plate, install it at the end.
5 Appendix
290
> Removing the Infeed Conveyor Unit
Warning
1 Basic Operations
is in the OFF position.
Caution Be careful of your fingers when removing the catch clip.
Remove the product guide and optional cross plate in advance if they are used.
1 Remove the catch clip and the belt cover.
▼ For a belt width of 160 mm or 250 mm

(1) Remove the two catch clips (one on

each side).
(2) Loosen the knurled screw with a

flat-blade screwdriver and remove the
belt cover.
Catch clip
Belt cover
Knurled screw 4 Maintenance
▼ For a belt width of 350 mm

(1) Remove the four catch clips (two on
each side).
(2) Remove the belt cover.

5 Appendix
Belt cover
Catch clip
291
2 Remove the infeed conveyor unit from the
weigh infeed section.
(1) Lift the infeed conveyor unit to remove

1 Basic Operations
the drive belt.
(2) Remove the infeed conveyor unit.

Lift
Drive belt
Pull toward
you to
remove
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
292
> Installing the Infeed Conveyor Unit
Warning
1 Basic Operations
is in the OFF position. For your safety, make sure to install the belt
cover before starting operation. Contact Anritsu if any of these
components are broken.
Before starting operation, make sure that all the catch clips are fixed
Warning securely.
Caution Be careful of your fingers when locking the catch clips.
1 Install the infeed conveyor section to the

infeed conveyor unit.
(1) Mount the infeed conveyor unit and


(2) Lower the infeed conveyor unit slowly to
fit it onto the infeed conveyor unit.
Infeed convey unit
Lower
slowly
Drive belt
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
293
2 Install the belt cover and lock the catch clip.
▼ For a belt width of 160 mm or 250 mm

1 Basic Operations
(1) Install the belt cover and tighten the

knurled screw with a flat-blade
screwdriver.
(2) Lock the two catch clips (one on each

side).
Catch clip
Belt cover
Knurled screw
▼ For a belt width of 350 mm

(1) Install the belt cover.
(2) Lock the four catch clips (two on each

side).
Belt cover
Catch clip
4 Maintenance
If you are using a product guide or optional cross plate, install it at the end.
5 Appendix
294
> Removing the Conveyor Belt/Roller
The removal procedure is the same for both the weigh conveyor and the infeed conveyor.
1 Basic Operations
For your safety, remove the conveyor belt on a workbench with
Caution sufficient space. Be careful not to drop the rollers.
■ Weigh conveyor unit

1 Remove the weigh conveyor unit from the
conveyor section.
 P. 287 Removing the Weigh Conveyor Unit
2 Loosen the two adjusters by hand.
Adjuster
Loosen Tighten
3 Pull out the conveyor belt and remove it.

Pull out
Be careful not to drop the rollers. Pull out
Carrying
belt
Drive roller
Driven roller
Drive belt 4 Maintenance
■ Infeed conveyor unit

1 Remove the infeed conveyor unit from the
infeed conveyor section. Pull out
Pull out
 P. 291 Removing the Infeed Conveyor Unit
Carrying belt
2 Pull out the conveyor belt and remove it.
Be careful not to drop the rollers. Drive roller
5 Appendix
Driven roller
Drive belt
295
> Installing the Conveyor Belt/Roller
For your safety, remove the conveyor belt on a workbench with

Caution
1 Basic Operations
sufficient space. Be careful not to drop the roller.
■ Weigh conveyor unit

1 Install the conveyor belt and rollers. Carrying belt
(1) Put the drive belt on the drive roller. Drive

roller
(2) Install the drive roller and driven roller
onto the conveyor surface.
(3) Install the conveyor belt. Driven roller

Frame Drive belt
The flow of products should match the
direction indicated inside the belt.
Install
2 Adjust the tension of the conveyor belt

with the two adjusters.
Adjuster
Loosen Tighten
3 Install the weigh conveyor unit to the weigh
conveyor section.
 P. 289 Installing the Weigh Conveyor Unit
4 Check the conveyor belt for belt misalignment.

4 Maintenance
 P. 298 Adjusting Belt Alignment

5 Appendix
296
■ Infeed conveyor unit
1 Install the conveyor belt and rollers. Carrying belt
(1) Put the drive belt on the drive roller.

Drive roller
1 Basic Operations
(2) Install the drive roller and driven roller
onto the conveyor surface.
(3) Install the conveyor belt. Driven roller

Frame
The flow of products should match the Drive belt
direction indicated inside the belt.
Install
2 Install the infeed conveyor unit to the infeed
conveyor section.
 P. 293 Installing the Infeed Conveyor Unit


4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
297
> Adjusting Belt Alignment
Check the conveyor belt for belt misalignment after the conveyor belt is removed from the
conveyor unit and installed again or is replaced with a new belt.
1 Basic Operations
The procedure for adjusting belt misalignment is the same for both the weigh conveyor
and the infeed conveyor.
■ Weigh conveyor section

1 Operate the conveyor and check the belt misalignment state of the conveyor belt.
If the belt is misaligned, adjust the tension of the conveyor belt with the two adjusters.
Adjust them so that the gaps on the roller ends are equal.
Adjuster 2
Misalignment state
Adjustment
(conveyor viewed from above)
Flow
The gap on the adjuster 2 side is Tighten adjuster 1 or
wide. loosen adjuster 2. Adjuster 1
Adjuster 1 Adjuster 2
Loosen
Flow
Gap
Tighten
Carrying belt A gap on the roller ends
The gap on the adjuster 1 side is Loosen adjuster 1 or

wide. tighten adjuster 2.
Adjuster 1 Adjuster 2
Flow
Gap
Carrying belt
4 Maintenance
2 Feed a product with a weight approximately 2 times the maximum weight range.
If it cannot be carried, adjust the tension of the conveyor belt with the two adjusters.
3 Operate the checkweigher for 2 to 3 minutes and then check the conveyor belt for belt
misalignment.
5 Appendix
Be careful not to put too much tension on the conveyor belt. It may damage the roller or cause
uneven rotation.
298
■ Infeed conveyor section
1 Operate the conveyor and check the belt misalignment state of the conveyor belt.
If the belt is misaligned, adjust the tension of the conveyor belt with the two adjusters.
Adjust them so that gaps on the roller ends are equal.
1 Basic Operations
Misalignment state
Adjustment
(conveyor viewed from above)
The gap on the knob 2 side is Tighten knob 1 or
wide. loosen knob 2.
Loosen
Flow
Gap
Knob 1 Knob 2
Knob 1 Knob 2 Tighten

Carrying belt
A gap on the roller ends
The gap on the knob 1 side is Loosen knob 1 or

wide. tighten knob 2.
Flow
Gap

Knob 1 Knob 2
Carrying belt
2 Feed through a product.

If it cannot be carried, adjust the tension of the conveyor belt with the two adjusters
(one on each side).
4 Maintenance
3 Operate the checkweigher for 2 to 3 minutes and then check for belt misalignment.
Be careful not to put too much tension on the conveyor belt. It may damage the roller or cause
uneven rotation.
5 Appendix
299
Installing/Removing Components (SSV-i series)
> Removing the Weigh Conveyor Unit
Warning
1 Basic Operations
is turned to the OFF position
When removing the optional product guide or pulling out the motor, be
Caution careful that your finger does not get caught by the catch clip.
When pulling out the motor, be careful that your fingers do not caught
Caution between the motor and the indicator.
1 Remove the motor. Motor

Catch clip
(1) Remove the two catch clips on the motor
Pull out
while holding it by hand.
(2) Pull out the motor.

If it is difficult to pull out the motor, gently
shake it to pull it out.
Drive roller
2 Remove the two catch clips of the

conveyor.
Catch clip
4 Maintenance
Remove the product guide or optional cross plate

now if they are installed.
Weigh conveyor unit

3 Lift the weigh conveyor unit and remove
it.
Lift
5 Appendix
300
> Installing the Weigh Conveyor Unit
Warning
1 Basic Operations
Warning securely.
1 Install the weigh conveyor unit to the Weigh conveyor unit
weigh conveyor section.
Mount the weigh conveyor unit, and lower Lower
slowly
it slowly to fit it onto the weigh conveyor
section.

2 Lock the two catch clips of the conveyor.
If you are using a product guide or optional cross plate,

install it now. Catch clip
3 Install the motor. Motor

Catch clip
4 Maintenance
(1) Insert the coupling into the drive roller.
If it is hard to insert, push and rotate the Insert
conveyor belt while inserting it.
Drive roller
5 Appendix
301
(2) Lock the two catch clips on the motor by
holding the motor by hand.
Remove the gap between the motor and
drive roller, and lock the catch clips.
1 Basic Operations
When installing the motor, make sure there is no No gap

gap, as shown in the figure. If any gap exists, install
it again. A motor that is not installed correctly may
cause the coupling to wear quickly or poor weighing
accuracy.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
302
> Removing the Infeed Conveyor Unit
Warning
1 Basic Operations
is turned to the OFF position
When removing the optional product guide or pulling out the motor, be
Caution careful that your finger does not get caught by the catch clip.
1 Remove the motor. Motor
Catch clip
(1) Remove the two catch clips on the motor
Pull out
while holding it by hand.
(2) Pull out the motor.

If it is difficult to pull out the motor, gently
shake it to pull it out.
Drive roller

2 Remove the two catch clips of the
conveyor.

Catch clip
3 Remove the infeed conveyor unit from

4 Maintenance
the infeed conveyor section.
(1) Lift the infeed conveyor unit to remove

the hook. Infeed conveyor unit
(2) Remove the infeed conveyor unit.
Lift
Hook
5 Appendix
Remove
303
> Installing the Infeed Conveyor Unit
Warning
1 Basic Operations
Warning securely.

1 Install the infeed conveyor unit to the

infeed conveyor section.
(1) Mount the infeed conveyor unit and lock

in place with the hook.
(2) Lower the infeed conveyor unit slowly to

fit it to the infeed conveyor section.
Lower
slowly
Hook
lock
2 Lock two catch clips on the conveyor.

4 Maintenance

Catch clip
5 Appendix
304
3 Install the motor. Motor
Catch clip
(1) Insert the coupling into the drive roller.
If it is hard to insert, push and rotate the Insert
1 Basic Operations
conveyor belt while inserting it.
(2) Lock the two catch clips on the motor by Drive roller
holding the motor by hand.
Remove the gap between the motor and
drive roller, and lock the catch clips.
When installing the motor, make sure there is no No gap
gap, as shown in the figure. If any gap exists, install
it again. A motor that is not installed correctly may
cause the coupling to wear quickly or poor weighing
accuracy.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
305
> Removing the Conveyor Belt
The removal procedure is the same for both the weigh conveyor section and the infeed
conveyor section.
1 Basic Operations
1 Remove the weigh/infeed conveyor from

the weigh/infeed conveyor section.
 P. 300 Removing the Weigh Conveyor Unit

 P. 303 Removing the Infeed Conveyor Unit
2 Pull the knob to turn the driven roller part.

Knob
Driven roller part

Turn
3 Pull the conveyor belt out to remove.

Pull out
Pull out
Carrying
belt
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
306
> Installing the Conveyor Belt
The installation procedure is the same for both the weigh conveyor section and the infeed
conveyor section.
1 Basic Operations
1 Align the protruding profile inside the belt
Carrying belt
to the groove of the roller, and install the
conveyor belt.
Profile inside
carrying belt
Conveyor groove
2 Open the driven roller part while pulling the knob.
Knob
Driven roller

part Turn
3 Install the weigh/infeed conveyor unit to
the weigh/infeed conveyor section.
 P. 301 Installing the Weigh Conveyor Unit

 P. 304 Installing the Infeed Conveyor Unit

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
307
> Adjusting Belt Alignment
Check the conveyor belt for belt misalignment after the conveyor belt is removed from the
conveyor unit and installed again or is replaced with a new belt.
1 Basic Operations
The procedure for adjusting belt misalignment is the same for both the weigh conveyor
section and the infeed conveyor section.
■ The water-proof conveyor normally does not require belt alignment adjustments because the
profile attached to the conveyor belt serves as a mechanism that prevents belt misalignments.
■ The belt might become misaligned if the checkweigher is used with foreign material
accumulated on the back of the conveyor belt. Using a misaligned belt for a long time may
shorten the lifespan of the profile. Clean the front and back surfaces of the conveyor belt and
roller periodically.
1 Operate the conveyor and check if the belt is misaligned.

If the belt is misaligned, adjust the tension of the conveyor belt by turning the tension
bolts with a spanner. Adjust them so that the gaps on the roller ends are equal.
Tension bolt
A gap on the roller ends

4 Maintenance
2 Feed through a product.

If the product cannot be carried on the conveyor belt, adjust the tension by turning the
tension bolts with a spanner.
3 Operate it for 2 to 3 minutes and then check the conveyor belt for belt misalignment.
5 Appendix
Be careful not to put too much tension on the conveyor belt. It may damage the roller or
cause uneven rotation.
308
Check Items for Failure
(1) If a failure occurs, check the following items first.

■ Are the settings correct according to the operation manual?
■ Are the connectors, cables and signal wires connected correctly?
1 Basic Operations
■ Are the codes disconnected, and is the wiring short-circuited?
■ Check that all screws and parts are secured tightly.
■ Is any part of the checkweigher damaged?
■ Is any part of the checkweigher rusty or dirty?
(2) Refit removed connectors and parts at their original locations after check.
(3) If sudden environmental changes, lightning, power failure due to abnormal voltage,
mechanical shock, or unusual usage are the direct causes of the fault, overall
inspection is necessary.
(4) If the operation unit or controller is faulty, use this belt as a conveyor for forced
operation.
 P. 322 Forced Operation

> Troubleshooting
This section describes how to resolve troubles.
If the problem is not resolved after taking the appropriate actions, or if the problem occurs
again, contact Anritsu Infivis. At this time, Anritsu might ask you to submit support data.
■ Cannot Turn On Power
The lock knob (yellow) of the power NO Push in the knob.

switch is fully pushed. The power switch cannot be turned
4 Maintenance
on when the knob is not pushed in.

YES
NO
Voltage is supplied to the power
Check the power source.
receptacle.
YES
Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the power turns off immediately after it is
turned on, request a repair.
5 Appendix
309
■ The Screen Becomes Blank
YES
Tap the touch screen. Does the The blank screen was caused by a
screen return to the original state? function that turns off the back light
1 Basic Operations
when no operation is performed for a

NO
period of time. This is not a failure.
Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the screen is not displayed, request a repair.
■ Conveyor Does Not Move/Conveyor Motor Error (E141) Occurs
The Stop button was pressed after NO After an error occurs, press the Stop button
the error message occurred. once before starting the checkweigher. This is
not a failure.
YES
YES Adjust the installation location so that the

The checkweigher is in contact with
the upstream/downstream equipment. checkweigher does not come into contact with
the upstream/downstream equipment, and
NO operate it again.
NO
The conveyor belt can be moved Check the installation of the conveyor unit,
smoothly by hand. conveyor belt, and rollers. Clean the conveyor if
it is soiled, and operate it again.
YES
Both the Start button and Stop Internal system error. Turn off the power and
YES
button lamps light. turn it on again. If the problem persists, ask us
for a repair.
NO
4 Maintenance
Turn off the power and turn it on again. If the problem persists, request a repair.
5 Appendix
310
■ NG Products Not Rejected
Compressed air is supplied NO Check the air source.

(pneumatic rejector).
1 Basic Operations
YES
YES
There is a stain or foreign object on Clean the rejector and make sure it
the rejector. moves smoothly.
NO
NO
Operation timing of the rejector is in Adjust the conveyor system to obtain
sync with the passing of products. a stable conveyor state, or adjust the
RJ timing manually ( P. 101).
YES
■ Poor Measurement Accuracy

Wind or vibration is affecting the YES Change the direction of the air conditioner.
checkweigher. Install the checkweigher away from the
machine generating vibrations.
NO
Products are transferred smoothly NO Adjust the height and gap of the
from/to the upstream/downstream
upstream/downstream equipment.
equipment.
YES
YES 4 Maintenance
Adjust the conveyor speed to obtain a

Products slip or jump while being YES
stable conveyor state, or adjust the
carried.
weighing timing manually ( P. 100).
NO
5 Appendix
311
■ Product Length Exceeded (A039)/Dbl. Product Alarm (A001)/CW Capacity
Exceeded (A012) Occurs
Photocell Error (E011) Occurs
NO
Product length is set correctly. Set the product length correctly in
1 Basic Operations
the product registration.

YES
Products slip or jump while being YES Adjust the conveyor speed to obtain
carried. obtain a stable conveyor state.
NO
Products block the photocell Check the photocell position and

NO
completely. detection state ( P. 356), or use
the optional sensor for transparent
YES products.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
312
■ Manual Zero-set Error (E008) / External Zero-set Error (E009) Occurs
Zero-setting Error (E040) / W. cell contact detection (E049) / -OVF occurrence
(E116) Occurs
1 Basic Operations
NO
Weighcell lock is released. Release weighcell lock.
YES
Adjust the installation location so that
The checkweigher is in contact with the YES
the checkweigher does not come into
upstream/downstream equipment.
contact with the upstream/downstream
NO equipment, and operate it again.
There is a stain or foreign object on YES
Clean the equipment.
the weighcell or weigh conveyor.
NO
Change the direction of the air
Wind or vibration is affecting the YES
conditioner.
checkweigher.
Install the checkweigher away from the
NO machine generating vibrations.

YES
The system is recovered by Place an item whose weight is known
performing sensitivity correction
on the weighcell and make sure that
( P. 96).
the sensitivity is normal.
Also, make sure that Operation check
NO could be performed successfully.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
313
■ Operation Check Fails
Pass products and NG products are NO Perform an operation check in the

being fed in the correct order. correct order by following the
1 Basic Operations
YES
The weight of the sample product NO Perform an operation check in the

for the operation check is correct. correct order by following the
YES
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
314
■ General check items about troubles in relation to metal detection
The metal detector is susceptible to electromagnetic waves and vibrations from the
surrounding area and metal. Install the equipment in a place that is subject to as little of
these external influences as possible. Contact Anritsu for a consultation on specific
1 Basic Operations
measures.
Major items to be checked
Item Effect on the metal detector Example actions
The power system used is the Electromagnetic noise
same as that of another piece of enters through the power Use another power system.
equipment. line.
The element responds to
A device equipped with an Change the carrier frequency
the electromagnetic noise
inverter is placed nearby. of the inverter.
of the inverter.
The magnetic fields
Multiple metal detectors (or Change the sensitivity mode *.
generated by the metal
checkweighers with a metal Change the installation
detector interfere with each
detector) are used nearby. location.
other.
The element responds to Change the sensitivity mode *.
High-voltage wire and railroad
the electromagnetic noise Change the installation
lines are nearby.
issued from the wire. location.

The heights of devices before
Adjust the conveyor surface to
and after the line differ from that The magnetic field is
install the equipment at a
of the conveyor surface, or the disrupted by vibrations
distance that prevents the
conveyor unit touches these when the product is put.
conveyor from touching it.
devices.
Set a neutralization apparatus
The product is prone to The product discharges to
or use the earth of the main
accumulating static electricity. the checkweigher.
unit.
* Contact Anritsu to change the sensitivity mode.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
315
The detection performance becomes YES Use a different power system from
stable if an upstream, downstream, that for the peripheral devices, or
or peripheral device is stopped (or install the equipment away from the
turned off).
1 Basic Operations
peripheral devices.
NO
The metal bar graph reaches red at

YES
a certain interval while the Clean the conveyor belt or replace it.
checkweigher is running, even
though no product is fed.
NO
Adjust the height of the conveyor

surface level to the upstream and
The metal bar graph reaches red YES
downstream devices. Also make
when a product is moved onto the
sure that the inspected product is
MD conveyor.
not charged with static electricity.
NO
YES Remove metal products such as

The metal bar graph reaches red
watches or cellular phones.
when a person passes by.
■ A test piece is not detected or a pass product is incorrectly evaluated as an

NG product.
The characteristics of the inspected Perform the auto-setting again (
product (such as temperature, YES P. 102).
moisture content, and shape) Also correct the initial phase by the
changed after auto-setting. product check function ( P. 235).
NO
4 Maintenance
The detection sensitivity is not YES Perform “Make auto setting newly”.
improved even after performing The current setting might not be
“Make auto setting by using current optimum if the characteristics of the
settings”. inspected product have changed.
NO
The position of the products and NO Adjust the carrying unit so that the
product feeding interval are stable. product conveyance status is stable.
YES
5 Appendix
316
■ The bar graph reaches red, but the product is not evaluated as MDNG.
The product consistently blocks the NO

Make sure that the position and
photocell on the metal detector. detecting status of the photocell on
1 Basic Operations
the metal detector are correct.
YES
Note: When measuring a product that does not block the photocell
on the metal detector, select “No” when you are asked
whether to block the photocell during product registration.
Use under the mode of [Metal 3] ( P. 42).
■ The number of products rejected as MDNG is not the same as the MDNG
quantity displayed in the statistics.
Measurement is performed in Metal YES

MDNG Count indicates the number
3 mode ( P. 42). of products for which metal
contamination is detected, and that
NO
does not necessarily match the

number of NG products.
A double product is detected when products are fed through at an interval of less
than 280 mm.
When a double product is detected, two products might be rejected for each D-Prod.
NG detection.
If the rejection performance is not high, two products might be rejected with one
rejecting operation.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
317
■ One of the following metal detector errors has occurred: Dbl. product (A501),
Capacity exceeded (A504), Defective MD product length (A505), or Photocell
error (E511).
NO
1 Basic Operations
The set product length is correct. Set the correct product length at
product registration.
YES
The product slips or bounces while YES Adjust the conveyor speed so as to
it is being conveyed. make the conveyance status
stabilized.
NO
The product consistently blocks the NO Make sure that the position and
photocell on the metal detector. detecting status of the photocell on
the metal detector are correct (
YES
P. 356).
Or, use a transparent sensor
(optional).
NO Perform auto-setting at product

Auto-setting has been performed.

registration.
YES
■ Auto balance adjustment amount error (E543) or balance error (E544) has
occurred.
There is a large metal object near YES Remove the metal object near the
the metal detector. metal detector.
4 Maintenance
NO
There is a person who has a metal YES

item such as a watch, cellular Keep metal items away from the
phone, and tool near the metal metal detector.
detector.
NO
5 Appendix
318
■ Other Unexpected Problems Occur
Is there any wind or vibration YES Change the direction of the air conditioner.
affecting the checkweigher? Install the checkweigher away from the
1 Basic Operations
machine generating vibrations.
NO
YES
The products are electrically charged. Install a static eliminator.
NO
> Outputting support data
If a problem occurs in the system, support data for recovery can be output.
If an Anritsu sales engineer requests you to submit support data, output it to a USB
memory and send the USB memory to the sales engineer at Anritsu.
Problem occurred
↓ ←If the problem is not resolved even after troubleshooting

Contact an Anritsu sales engineer
↓ ←If an Anritsu sales engineer requests you to submit support data
Output support data
Support data output method

1 Tap the [Home] button to go to the General screen.
2 Tap the [Help] button, select 4 Maintenance
"Saving data for service tech.", and then

tap [Save] under "Support data".
5 Appendix
319
3 Tap [Yes]. If [No] is tapped, the support data will be saved but a status check will not
be performed.
1 Basic Operations
If [No] is selected
4 Select the [Check the weighcell state]

check box, and then tap [Yes].
5 On the Save to USB memory screen,

select "Support data" and then tap [Save].
6 The following file is output to the USB memory.

4 Maintenance
SUPPORT_Model_SN_Software version_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.pwy
(Example: SUPPORT_KWS6001AF04_4600000001_V01010001_20121108122346.pwy)
5 Appendix
320
7 Compress the output file for submission.
File compression method
Example: Windows 7
1 Basic Operations
Right-click the file to be output. From the drop-down menu, select "Send to" and then
"Compressed (zipped) folder". A zip-format file is saved in the same folder, with the
same name as the original file.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
321
> Forced Operation
The forced operation must be performed by a person in charge of

Caution
1 Basic Operations
equipment maintenance only.
The forced operation must be performed in an unavoidable case only,

Caution such as a failure of the operation unit, as an emergency measures
until completion of repair.
Normal start/stop operation is invalid during the forced operation. The
operation can be started or stopped only by using the power switch.
– The conveyor starts running immediately after the power-on.

– The conveyor does not stop by pressing the stop button.
<If the emergency stop switch is provided>
During the forced operation, the conveyor starts running immediately
after the emergency stop switch is released.
Stay close to the checkweigher during the forced operation.

Caution If you leave the checkweigher for an unavoidable reason, turn the
power switch off and lock it. This prevents the power switch from
being operated by mistake.
<How to lock the power switch>
Turn the power switch to the off position, pull out
the yellow knob at the top edge of the handle, and
then lock it using a commercially available
padlock.
4 Maintenance
Evaluation (OK/NG) and rejection are not performed during the forced operation.
■ Forced operation setting
1 Turn off the power switch.
2 Remove the rear cover of the indicator.

5 Appendix
 P. 273 Connecting External Equipment
322
3 Set the dip switches S3-1 and S3-2 of the MPU2010 unit to ON.
1 Basic Operations
Dip switch S3
X9 S3
Printer
X17
S3-1
1:MANU
PAT 2:SELF
S3-2
MPU2010A UNIT
4 Install the rear cover.
■ Forced operation/stop of conveyor

(1) Operation
Make sure that there is no person around the conveyor. The conveyor
Caution starts running when the following procedure is performed.
If the conveyor does not start running by turning on the power switch,
Caution the motor control unit is faulty. Turn off the power switch immediately. 4 Maintenance
(2) Stopping
5 Appendix
323
■ Releasing forced operation

1 Basic Operations
2 Remove the rear cover of the indicator.

3 Set the dip switches S3-1 and S3-2 of the MPU2010 unit to OFF.
Dip switch S3
X9 S3
Printer
S3-1
X17 1:MANU
PAT 2:SELF S3-2
MPU2010A UNIT
4 Install the rear cover.

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
324
Error Messages and Solutions
For information on how to reset errors and alarms, refer to "Handling Errors and Alarms".
 P. 73 Handling Errors and Alarms
E: Error, A: Alarm
1 Basic Operations
Code Screen message Details
Controller FLASH Turn the main power on again. If this error occurs again,
E001 ROM Error the parts must be replaced. Call Anritsu or its distributor
for service
Backup Battery Error Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
Detected again, the parts must be replaced. Request repair.
* The set values disappear a few hours after turning the
E003
power supply off. To continue production, press the
error release key, set the relevant values, and use the
equipment without turning the power supply off.
Controller RAM Error Turn the main power on again. If this error occurs again,
E004 the parts must be replaced. Call Anritsu or its distributor
for service
Controller EEP ROM Turn the main power on again. If this error occurs again,
E005 Error the parts must be replaced. Call Anritsu or its distributor
for service

Low 24 V Power Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E006 Supply Voltage again, the parts must be replaced. Request repair.
Detected
Incorrect software update was detected.
Incorrect software
E007 Production cannot be started until the error is cleared.
update detected
Call SE.
A zero-set error Zero-setting might have been performed while a product
occurred due to the was placed on the weigh conveyor.
screen operation. Perform zero-setting while nothing is being fed through
on the weigh conveyor.
4 Maintenance
Is the weigh conveyor touching the photocell cables or

motor cables?
Remove the weigh conveyor to check the cable
E008
arrangement. The weigh conveyor might be touching
the cables due to bumping.
Are all the parts attached to the weigh conveyor?
Check that all the parts are attached to the conveyor,
referring to the instruction manual.
If the problem is not resolved even after checking the
5 Appendix
above, call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
325
A zero-set error has Zero-setting might have been performed from the
occurred due to external device while a product was placed on the weigh
external device conveyor.
1 Basic Operations
control. Check the input timing of the external zero-set signal.

Perform zero-setting while nothing is being fed through
on the weigh conveyor.
E009 Is the weigh conveyor touching the photocell cables or
motor cables?

Photocell signal is not Is there any product or something interrupting between
detected. the photocell and reflection plate?
If so, remove them.
Are the photocell and reflection plate clean?
If they are dirty, clean them.
Is the green LED on the photocell lit?
If it is not lit, the photocell might be faulty or a cable

might be disconnected. Call Anritsu or its distributor for
service and request repair.
* If using a custom-made photocell, check the
documentation for that product before making
E011 adjustments.
Does only the green LED on the photocell light up when
a product is being fed through?
Adjust the photocell so that the following is observed.
4 Maintenance

adjustments.
Are the anchoring brackets for the photocell and
reflection plate tightened?
Fix the brackets in place.
5 Appendix
326
A mass was detected A product might have been fed through on the weigh
without the photocell conveyor without interrupting the photocell. Adjust the
being interrupted. photocell so that the following is observed.
1 Basic Operations
adjustments.
▪ When a product is fed;
LED (Gr): On
LED (Or): Off
▪ When no product is fed;
LED (Gr): On
LED (Or): On
Did your body or clothes come into contact with the
weigh conveyor? Be careful not to touch the weigh
conveyor when operating the equipment.
Are the in-feed, weigh, and RJ conveyor belts warped or
frayed? If so, replace the belt or cut the fraying so that
the frayed part of the belt does not interrupt the weigh
E013
conveyor photocell.

Is a conveyor or cable contact the weigh conveyor? A
conveyor or cable might contact the weigh conveyor if
the weigh conveyor is bumping. Adjust so that nothing
contact the weigh conveyor.
Are the in-feed, weigh, and RJ conveyor belts dirty? If
they are dirty, clean them.
Is vibration produced by other devices or caused by
conveying items being transmitted to the equipment?
Prevent vibration from being transmitting to the
equipment. If the equipment is unstable, adjust the
adjustable feet to minimize bumping.
4 Maintenance
Is there vibration produced due to dirt, worn-out, or

deflection of the roller? Adjust or replace the roller to
avoid vibration.
Is wind from an air-conditioner or other devices blowing
to the equipment? Avoid wind from blowing to the
equipment.
RJ Operation Error Products might have been detected incorrectly. Stop the
Detected conveyor, and take measures to recheck the product.
E015
To prevent recurrence, check whether the rejector is
5 Appendix
A015
operating correctly. If this alarm occurs again, contact
your dealer's customer support.
327
RJ Error Detected Check the connection with the rejector. After checking
the connection, turn the motor on and then off again or
E016 turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
1 Basic Operations
again, contact your dealer's customer support.

* For details, see the operation manual of the rejector.
RJ Output The circuit protector of the rejector output contact has
Overcurrent Error been activated to protect the device from overcurrent.
Detected Turn the main power supply off, and check that the
connection to the rejector is appropriate.
When connecting to devices other than those
E017
manufactured by Anritsu, check that the device is being
used at the rated voltage.

After checking this, restore the circuit protector. If this
error occurs again, contact your dealer's customer
support.
RJ Motor Overcurrent Check that the conveyor is not overloaded. After
Error Detected checking this, turn the motor on and then off again or
E018
turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
RJ Motor Speed Error Check that the conveyor is not overloaded. After
Detected checking this, turn the motor on and then off again or
E019
turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
RJ Error Detected An error has occurred in either the gate drive solenoid,
control board or connection cable of the rejector. Turn
E020 the motor on and then off again or turn the main power
supply on again. If this error occurs again, contact your
dealer's customer support.
RJ Air Pressure Error Check the air pressure by using the rejector manometer,
Detected and adjust it to the normal value. After adjusting it, turn
4 Maintenance
E021 the motor on and then off again or turn the main power
RJ DC Power Voltage Turn the motor on and then off again or turn the main
E022 Error Detected power supply on again. If this error occurs again, the
parts must be replaced. Request repair.
RJ Gate Operation Check whether the gate is overloaded or the power
Error Detected supply of the rejector is on. After checking this, turn the
motor on and then off again or turn the main power
E024
5 Appendix
supply on again. After starting the rejector, check its

operation. If this error occurs again, contact your
328
RJ CPU Error Turn the main power on again. If this error occurs again,
E025
Detected call Anritsu or its distributor for service
1 Basic Operations
Rejector Setting Error Re-adjustment of the rejector is required. Call Anritsu or
E026
its distributor for service
RJ Gate Actuator Turn off the main power supply and wait at least 15
Overheating Error minutes then turn it on again. If the RJ Gate does not
Detected work after power-on, contact your dealer's customer
support.
E027 * This error occurs when the gate is opened and closed
too frequently. The frequency of opening and closing
can be decreased by changing the rejection method
from Pulse to Hold or by lowering the production
capacity.
Overcurrent Error RJ is emergency stop mode. The parts in the controller
Detected at RJ Output unit must be replaced. Contact your dealer's customer
E028 Contact support.
* This error occurs when the fuse for the rejector output
contact blows.
+/- Limit Setting Error The current product setting is incorrect.

Check the following condition.
E029 ▪ +Limit >= -Limit
▪ Reference Value + -Limit >= 0
▪ Reference Value + +Limit <= Weight Range
RJ Alarm Products may be stuck in the rejector or OK products
may have been rejected incorrectly. Take measures to
recheck the product.
E031
To prevent recurrence, check whether the rejector timing
A031
and rejector operation are correct.
* This appears if an OK product has not passed
through the photocell on the PASS side.
4 Maintenance
NG Prod. RJ Error NG products may have been fed in the OK direction.

Stop the conveyor, and take measures to recheck the
product.
E032
A032
* This appears if an NG product has passed through
the photocell on the PASS side.
5 Appendix
329
No Eval. Prod. NG products may have been fed in the OK direction.

Passed Stop the conveyor, and take measures to recheck the
product.
1 Basic Operations
E033 To prevent recurrence, check whether the rejector timing

A033 and rejector operation are correct.
* This appears if a product that has not been evaluated
yet has passed through the photocell on the PASS
side.
RJ Alarm OK products may have been rejected by mistake. Take
measures to recheck the product.
E034 To prevent recurrence, check whether the rejector timing
A034 and rejector operation are correct.

* This appears if an OK product has passed through
the photocell on the NG side.
NG Prod. RJ Error Products may be stuck in the rejector or NG products
may have been fed in the OK direction. Stop the
conveyor, and take measures to recheck the product.
E035
A035
* This appears if an NG product has not passed

through the photocell on the NG side.
No Eval. Prod. OK products may have been rejected by mistake. Take
Rejected measures to recheck the product.
E036
A036
* This appears if a product that has not been evaluated
yet has passed through the photocell on the PASS
side.
Zero-set Error Auto-zero setting might have been performed while a
product was placed on the weigh conveyor.
4 Maintenance
Check that products have not been fed through

incorrectly and there is no product on the weigh
conveyor.
E040
motor cables?
5 Appendix
330
Fine Adjust. Error Check that the measurement timing is correct, the
master product weight matches the setting value, and
the measured value is within the range in which
1 Basic Operations
E041
adjustment can be performed.
* The range in which adjustment can be performed is
usually 3%, or 30% if product weight is 50g or less.
Tare Overflow Remove the product and clear the tare storage count.
Check that the product blocks the photocell and product
E042 interval is kept.
Tare Underflow Remove the product and clear the tare storage count.
Check that the product blocks the photocell and product
E043 interval is kept.
The zero-point Is the weigh conveyor touching the photocell cables or
deviates widely. motor cables?

Check that nothing is placed on the weigh conveyor.
E049 After checking, perform zero-setting.
referring to the instruction manual. After checking,
perform zero-setting.
above, call Anritsu or its distributor for service. 4 Maintenance
Parameter Error Unable to measure as product length input too long or
conveyor speed setting too fast.
E051 Check a setup of product length. If correct, reduce
conveyor speed.
* This error occurs when T1+T2 exceeds 13000.
Incorrect parameter Incorrect software update was detected.
E052 update detected Production cannot be started until the error is cleared.
Call SE.
Equipment was The power was turned off without resetting the
5 Appendix
powered down without error/alarm. Click the reset button [//] on the top right of
E053
resetting the the screen and enter the password.
error/alarm.
331
Air Pressure Error Check the air pressure by using the manometer, and
Detected adjust it to the normal value. After adjusting it, turn the
E061 motor on and then off again or turn the main power
1 Basic Operations

NGBox Full NGBox has become full. NG products may not be fed
E070
correctly while NGBox remains full during production.
A070
Empty NGBox.
E072 NGBox Open NGBox is unlocked. Lock it.
A072
No detection of Product may be stuck in select area, or may have been

product in the RJ3 incorrectly sent onto other than the RJ3 path. Stop the
E081 acceptance path conveyor and move the product sent onto the RJ3 path
A081 back to the beginning for re-inspection.
* Appears when the RJ3 path light receiver did not
detect a product that should not be on the RJ3 path.
Detection of product in Product may have been incorrectly sent onto the RJ3
the RJ3 acceptance path. Stop the conveyor and move the product sent onto
E082
path the RJ3 path back to the beginning for re-inspection.
A082
* Appears when the RJ3 path light receiver detects a

product that should not be on the RJ3 path.
Detection of prod. in Product not inspected may have been sent onto the RJ3
the RJ3 acceptance path. Stop the conveyor and move the product back to
E083
path for prod. not the beginning for inspection.
A083
inspected * Appears when the RJ3 path light receiver detects a
product not yet inspected on the RJ3 path.
E084 reject path conveyor and move the product sent onto the RJ1 path
4 Maintenance

the RJ1 reject path path. Stop the conveyor and move the product sent onto
E085
the RJ1 path back to the beginning for re-inspection.
A085
the RJ1 reject path for path. Stop the conveyor and move the product back to
E086
5 Appendix
prod. not inspected the beginning for inspection.

A086
332

1 Basic Operations
E088
A088
E089
A089
Weighcell Error Check connectors and cables between weighcell and
indicator. After checking, turn the main power on again.
E101
If this error occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor for

service
Zero Calibration Error Check the weighcell for the following and perform
sensitivity correction again.
▪ Nothing is placed
▪ No dirt or foreign objects are adhering
E102
▪ It is not touching the upstream/downstream conveyors
▪ All the parts are attached
Sens Correction Error Check that the weight of the master weight matches the
specified weight, and retry sensitivity correction.
4 Maintenance
E103
service
Auto-sensitivity Turn the main power on again. If this error occurs again,
E107
Correction Error call Anritsu or its distributor for service
Weighcell Connection Check connectors and cables between weighcell and
Error indicator. After checking, turn the main power on again.
E108
service
5 Appendix
333
Weighcell Error Check connectors and cables between weighcell and

E109
1 Basic Operations
service
The zero-point The weighcell might be locked. Check that the lock is
deviates widely in the released.
negative direction. For how to release the lock, see the instruction manual.
After checking, perform zero-setting.
motor cables?

E116 the cables due to bumping.
After checking, perform zero-setting.
referring to the instruction manual. After checking,
perform zero-setting.

Overload of the Is the upstream conveyor touching the equipment?
carrying conveyor was The motor might have received an excessive load due
detected. to contact with the upstream conveyor. Keep the
equipment away from the upstream conveyor.
Is there any dirt between the belt and support plate?
If there is dirt, wipe it off.
Is the conveyor belt tension is correct?
Adjust the belt tension by rotating the tension
E141 adjustment knob.
4 Maintenance
Is the belt leaning to one side?

Adjust the center of the belt to that of the conveyor.
Are the rollers, gears, or couplings worn out?
Adjust or replace the moving parts (such as rollers or
motors).
After checking, turn the main power on again.
service
5 Appendix
334
Carrying UNIT Error Carrying unit error. Remove all products from the
carrying unit, and check if there is a problem.
E161
1 Basic Operations
After checking, turn the main power on again. If this
error occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor for
service
E282
A282
Detection of product in Product not inspected may have been sent onto the RJ3
the RJ3 reject path for path. Stop the conveyor and move the product back to
E283
product not inspected the beginning for inspection.
A283

E285
4 Maintenance
A285
E286
A286
5 Appendix
335

1 Basic Operations

E288
A288
E289
A289
Product length was Sorter detected a product length longer than the result
not correctly detected of multiplying the product length by the maximum
E290 by the sorter product length detection ratio. Multiple products may be
A290 sent onto the conveyor without any gap between them.
Make sure products are separated when placed on the
conveyor.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
336
RJ Photocell Alarm Is there anything (a product or other object) between the

photocell and reflection plate?
1 Basic Operations
If there is, remove it.
Is the green LED on the photocell on?
If it is not on, the photocell may be faulty or a cable may
be disconnected. Request repair.
documentation for the photocell before performing
adjustment.
Does only the green LED on the photocell turn on when
a product is being fed through? Adjust the photocell,
E352 checking the following.
A352 * If using a custom-made photocell, check the
adjustment.
LED (Gr): On

LED (Or): Off
LED (Gr): On
LED (Or): On
Are the installation angle brackets of the photocell and
reflection plate stable?
Make sure that they are stable.
above, contact your dealer's customer support.
Network Connection Functions such as data recording cannot be performed
4 Maintenance
Disconnected during production. Check whether the power supplies of

the PC and hub are on, the network cable is connected,
E401
and the network settings are correct. If this error occurs
again after checking the above, contact your dealer's
customer support.
MD Head Error Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E509
5 Appendix
337
Photocell Error Is there anything (a product or other object) between the

photocell and reflection plate?
1 Basic Operations

Is the green LED on the photocell on?
If it is not on, the photocell may be faulty or a cable may
be disconnected. Request repair.
adjustment.
E511
Does only the green LED on the photocell turn on when
a product is being fed through? Adjust the photocell,
checking the following.
adjustment.
Are the installation angle brackets of the photocell and
reflection plate stable?
Make sure that they are stable.

MD Head Sys. Error Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E524
MD TRX Unit Tuning Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E528
Reg. Error again, contact your dealer's customer support.
MD Send Output Error Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E541
4 Maintenance
MD Send Coil Current Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E542
Error again, contact your dealer's customer support.
5 Appendix
338
MD Auto-balance Is there a large metallic object near the metal detector

Correction Error head?
1 Basic Operations
MD Head Sys. Error If there is, remove it.
This error may also occur when doing the following.
Check the situation.
E543 ▪ Inserting the product guide in and removing it from the
metal detector head
▪ Removing the conveyor part for cleaning, etc.
After checking this, turn the main power supply on
again. If the problem is not resolved even after checking
the above, contact your dealer's customer support.
MD TRX Unit Tuning Is there a large metallic object near the metal detector
Reg. Error head?
This error may also occur when doing the following.
Check the situation.
E544 ▪ Inserting the product guide in and removing it from the
metal detector head
▪ Removing the conveyor part for cleaning, etc.

After checking this, turn the main power supply on
again. If the problem is not resolved even after checking
the above, contact your dealer's customer support.
MD Send Output Error Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E545 * This error occurs if setting conditions that exceed the
send output specifications continue for 10 or more
minutes.
Auto-setting Error The effect of the product fed in auto setting is too large.
Check the product does not contain any metal. After
4 Maintenance
E549 checking, perform auto setting with a normal product. If

this error occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor for
service
5 Appendix
339
No Connection with Abnormal connection with detection head. Check cables

MD Head and connectors. Toggle power off and on and if error not
recovered, call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
1 Basic Operations
(Check the type of MD head and confirm that the

MD-SIG02 is set below.
E550 ▪ M5 S1:2, S2:6
▪ M6 S1:2, S2:4
If the setting is also correctly recurs when this error
occurs again, there is a possibility that the model of the
MD head software does not match. Set S4-4 of
MD-SIG02 to ON and download the head software.
No Communication Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E551
with MD Head again, contact your dealer's customer support.
No Communication The connection with the detector head is incorrect. The
with MD Head connection cable and connector may not be connected.
E552
Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
No Sync. with MD Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
E553
Head again, contact your dealer's customer support.
E554
E555
E556
E557
E558
4 Maintenance
No Communication Detection might have been affected by external noise.

E559 with MD Head Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
Communication with The detection operation may be affected by external
the metal detection noise and others. Turn ON the main power again. If this
E560
head cannot be made. error occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor for
service.
5 Appendix
340
MD Head Temp. Error The metal detector head temperature exceeds the
permitted limit. Inspection cannot continue.
If this equipment is used in an environment in which the
1 Basic Operations
temperature exceeds the upper limit (40ºC), lower the
E571 operating environment temperature or move the
equipment to another location. Turn the power supply
off, cool down the equipment sufficiently, and then start
using it again. If this error occurs again, contact your
MD Head Power Turn the main power supply on again. If this error occurs
Voltage Error again, the parts must be replaced. Request repair.
E572
* This error occurs due to a failure in the main power
supply.
E573
* This error occurs due to a failure in the power supply
to the board (PRE, POW).
E574

* This error occurs due to a failure in the power supply
for the SIG internal digital.
E580 with MD Head again, contact your dealer's customer support.
E581
* This error occurs when missing metal detector head
transmission data is detected.
MD Model Name Abnormal connection with detection head.

Incorrect The connected metal detector head is not available in
4 Maintenance
this device.
Check whether the model name of the metal detector
head is correct.
E590 MD-SIG02 is set below.
▪ M5 S1:2, S2:6
▪ M6 S1:2, S2:4
5 Appendix

341
No Communication Abnormal connection with detection head. Check cables

with MD Head and connectors. Toggle power off and on and if error not
recovered, call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
1 Basic Operations

MD-SIG02 is set below.
E609 ▪ M5 S1:2, S2:6
▪ M6 S1:2, S2:4
EXT-I/O(A) unit Check connectors and cables between EXT-I/O unit and
connection error. the indicator. After checking, turn the main power on
again. If this error occurs again, the unit might have
E621
failed. Call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
* If "EXT-I/O(A):connect check" is "No", the machine
regards the unit as an unused one.
EXT-I/O(B) unit Check connectors and cables between EXT-I/O unit and
connection error. the indicator. After checking, turn the main power on
again. If this error occurs again, the unit might have

E622
failed. Call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
* If "EXT-I/O(B):connect check" is "No", the machine
CW-TPC/BCD unit The function of option (External prod input, Trend
connection error. control, Measured value output) does not work. Turn the
main power on again. If this error occurs again, the unit
E623 might have failed. Call Anritsu or its distributor for
service.
* If "CW-TPC/BCD:connect check" is "No", the machine
4 Maintenance
MOT-CONT unit Ext conveyor does not work. Turn the main power on
connection error. again. If this error occurs again, the unit might have
E625 failed. Call Anritsu or its distributor for service.
* If "MOT-CONT:connect check" is "No", the machine
Network Connection Data accumulates until reconnection because the
Disconnected network is disconnected. Check whether the power
supplies of the PC and hub are on, the network cable is
E930
connected, and the network settings are correct. If this
error occurs again after checking the above, contact
5 Appendix
342
Dbl. Product Alarm The next product moved into the weighcell before the
product weight was measured.
A001
1 Basic Operations
The alarm is canceled automatically when the product
interval becomes normal.
RJ Capacity The interval between products exceeds the rejection
Exceeded. capacity. The alarm is released automatically when the
A002 interval is adjusted to the correct value. If this alarm
occurs frequently, expand the interval between
products.
Average(+) Alarm The average value exceeds the batch + limit.
A003 The alarm is canceled automatically when the average
value falls within the range.
Average(-) Alarm The average value is less than the batch - limit.
A004 The alarm is canceled automatically when the average
value falls within the range.
Mean weight of pass The mean weight of pass products is less than the
product is less than reference weight.
A005
ref. Value. This alarm is released automatically when the mean
weight becomes the reference weight or more.

Statistics Overflow More than 1 million products cannot be registered in the
A006
statistics. Clear the statistics.
NG Rate Alarm The specified NG rate is exceeded. The alarm is
A007 released automatically when the NG rate falls below the
specified value.
Checkweigher Remove all products from the conveyor, and reset this
A010 operation has been alarm.
stopped.
Auto zero-setting The alarm is canceled automatically when the product
A011
Alarm interval becomes longer. Widen the product interval.
4 Maintenance
CW Capacity If this alarm frequently occurs, widen the product

Exceeded interval.
A012 * This alarm occurs when 10 or more products are
tested simultaneously until rejection starts after the
product is evaluated.
Backup Battery Alarm The backup battery must be replaced. Contact your
A014
Watchdog Alarm Turn the main power on again. If this alarm occurs
A016 again, the parts must be replaced. Call Anritsu or its
5 Appendix
distributor for service
343
Ope. Check Operation cannot be started since an operation check

A018
Untouched has not been performed. Perform an operation check.
1 Basic Operations
Controller Comm. Turn the main power on again. If this alarm occurs
A023
Timeout again, call Anritsu or its distributor for service
The product length is A product that is shorter than "Product Length x
short. P.Len.Detection Multi.(-Lim)" is detected. The number of
product packs might not match the specified number.
(For example, 2-pack products are fed while the setting
is 3.) Check the packing machine.
The products might have become misaligned while
A037 being conveyed. Either attach a product guide to align

the products, or change the settings below to specify a
minimum product length that is equal to or more than a
value of "Product Length x P.Len.Detection Multi.(-Lim)".
▪ Product length
▪ Prd.Det.Multi.(-Lim)
▪ Prd.Det.Multi.(+Lim)
The product length is A product that is longer than "Product Length x
exceeded. P.Len.Detection Multi.(+Lim)" has been detected. The
products might have been conveyed too close together.

Keep sufficient gaps between products when conveying
them.
The packing might not have been removed properly.
Check the packing machine.
A038 Product was processed as failed product because it

reached the rejector before its back edge was detected.
Either attach a work guide to minimize balance loss, or
change the settings below to specify a maximum
product length equal to or less than "Product Length x
P.Len.Detection Multi.(+Lim)".
4 Maintenance
▪ Product length
▪ Prd.Det.Multi.(-Lim)
▪ Prd.Det.Multi.(+Lim)
5 Appendix
344
Can not recognize the The products might have been conveyed too close
product Length together. Keep sufficient gaps between products when
conveying them.
1 Basic Operations
The product length setting might be too long. Check if
the length is proper.
▪ Product length
A039
If the stop measurement option is used, the product
length setting might be too short. Check if the length is
proper. If the specified product length is too short, the
measurement stop timing becomes too fast to be
performed correctly.
▪ Product length
CW Capacity Turn the main power supply on again. If this alarm
Exceeded occurs again, contact your dealer's customer support.
A051 * This alarm occurs if 50 or more products have been
fed through during the time between T2 (Scale
balance time) and T3 (Rejector delay time).
CW Capacity If this alarm occurs frequently, expand the interval
Exceeded between products.

A052
* This alarm occurs if 10 or more products have been
fed through during T2 (Scale balance time).
fed through during T3 (Rejector delay time). This
A053
alarm occurs if 10 or more products have been fed
through between T3 (Rejector delay time) and T4
(Rejector operation time) when the ranking shift
function (option) is used.
4 Maintenance

fed through during T4 (Rejector operation time). This
A054
alarm occurs if 10 or more products have been fed
through during T4 (Rejector operation time) or T7 (RJ
check delay time) when the RJ check function
(option) is used.
5 Appendix
A055 * This alarm occurs if 10 or more products are

inspected at the same time between product
evaluation and the start of rejection.
345

A061
Exceeded interval.
1 Basic Operations

A062
Exceeded interval.
I/O Output signal On An I/O output signal whose output type is set to Hold 2
A071 has turned on. When this alarm is reset, the I/O output
signal turns off.
A101 Comm. Alarm Check connectors and cables between weighcell and
A102
If this alarm occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor
A103
for service
A104
A105
CW Capacity Turn the main power on again. If this alarm occurs
A106
Exceeded again, call Anritsu or its distributor for service
CW Capacity Turn the main power on again. If this alarm occurs
A107
Exceeded again, call Anritsu or its distributor for service
A111 Weighcell Alarm Check connectors and cables between weighcell and

A112
If this alarm occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor
A113 for service
A114
A115
- Overflow Alarm Overflow occurred at measurement or during
zero-setting. When the multi-range function is used,
select the larger weight range.
A121
If the largest range is already selected or the multi-range
function is disabled, call Anritsu or its distributor for
service
4 Maintenance
+ Overflow Alarm Overflow occurred at measurement or during

zero-setting. When the multi-range function is used,
select the larger weight range.
A122
If the largest range is already selected or the multi-range
function is disabled, call Anritsu or its distributor for
service
Printer Paper Out The printer is out of recording paper. Refill the printer
A152
with paper.
Printer error Check whether the printer is connected. After checking,
5 Appendix
A153 turn the main power on again. If this alarm occurs again,
call Anritsu or its distributor for service
346
Printer Performance ▪ The printer performance may have been exceeded.

Capacity Exceeded Increase the print interval by increasing the statistics
batch size, etc.
1 Basic Operations
A154 ▪ Printing may have been attempted while there was no
paper.
Printer Performance ▪ The printer performance may have been exceeded.
Capacity Exceeded Increase the print interval by increasing the statistics
batch size, etc.
A155 ▪ Printing may have been attempted while there was no
paper.
Printer Error (Paper Check that no paper jam occurred and paper is in place.
Out) After checking, turn the main power on again. If this
A156
alarm occurs again, call Anritsu or its distributor for
service
Printer Connection Check that the printer is connected. After checking this,

A157 Error turn the main power supply on again. If this alarm occurs
Serial A, B Comm. Check that all serial cables and connectors are
Alarm connected correctly. After checking this, turn the main
power supply on again. If this alarm occurs again,
A303
contact your dealer's customer support.
* This is an error that occurs during the communication
process.
4 Maintenance
A304 contact your dealer's customer support.

* This alarm occurs if the received data is incorrect or if
the data is received at a time when the device cannot
handle the data.
A305
* The transmission capacity was exceeded during
spontaneous output.
5 Appendix
347
1 Basic Operations
A306
response.
A307
* This alarm occurs if the flow control is RTS, and CTS
is inactive.
Barcode Data Error Reading barcode data failed or unregistered barcode
A308
data was read. Check the barcode data.
Barcode Data Error Reading barcode data failed or unregistered barcode
A309
data was read. Check the barcode data.
Serial 2 (A) Comm. Check that the serial 2 (A) connection cables and
Alarm connectors are connected correctly. After checking this,
turn the main power supply on again. If this alarm occurs
A311

spontaneous output.
A314
is inactive.
4 Maintenance
A315 turn the main power supply on again. If this alarm occurs
* The serial I/O unit is disconnected.
Serial 3 (B) Comm. Check that the serial 3 (B) connection cables and
A321
spontaneous output.
5 Appendix
348
1 Basic Operations
A324
is inactive.
A325 turn the main power supply on again. If this alarm occurs
* The serial I/O unit is disconnected.
Serial 2 (A)/3 (B) Check the connection of the KWU2507A. After checking
A332 Connection Error this, turn the main power supply on again. If this alarm
occurs again, contact your dealer's customer support.
Serial Comm. Send The data cannot be sent due to a send buffer overflow.
Error Check that all serial cables and connectors connecting
the KWU2507 and external devices are connected
A333
correctly. After checking this, turn the main power supply
on again. If this alarm occurs again, contact your

Emergency Stop The emergency switch was pressed. Return the switch
A361
Switch Pressed to its original position to start production.
RJ Emergency Stop The emergency switch of the rejector was pressed.
A362 Switch Pressed Return the switch to its original position to start
production.
USB Memory Access Check that the USB memory conforms to the equipment
Error standards and is securely inserted, and that it is not
A370 faulty. After checking this, turn the main power supply on
again. If this alarm occurs again, contact your dealer's
customer support.
4 Maintenance
No USB Memory Insert a USB memory.

A371
Inserted
USB Memory Read Check that the USB memory conforms to the equipment
A373
faulty. If this alarm occurs again after checking the
USB Memory Write Check that the USB memory conforms to the equipment
A374
faulty. If this alarm occurs again after checking the
5 Appendix
349
No USB Memory Free There is no free space for writing data to a file in the
Space USB memory. Increase the free space of the USB
A375
memory by taking measures such as transferring the
1 Basic Operations
data on the USB memory to another location.

USB Memory Access The files are either not in the USB memory, the number
Error of files exceeds the number that can be stored in the
A376
directory, or the file attributes are invalid. Clean up the
data in the USB memory.
USB Memory Output Check USB Memory is not faulty, and make output
A380 buffer full occurs setting again. If this alarm occurs again, call Anritsu or
its distributor for service
USB Memory Full Transfer data while there is still free space in the USB
A381
memory.
USB Memory Format Check that the USB memory is securely inserted and
Error that it is not faulty. If this alarm occurs again after
A382
checking the above, contact your dealer's customer
support.
No USB Memory The operation stopped because a USB memory is not
A383 Inserted inserted. Insert a USB memory, and then restart the
operation.
No USB Memory Free The operation stopped because there is not enough free
Space space on the USB memory to write a file. Increase the
A384 free space of the USB memory by taking measures such
as transferring the data on the USB memory to another
location, and then restart the operation.
Ethernet Comm. Check that all cables and connectors are connected
Alarm correctly. After checking this, turn the main power supply
A403
4 Maintenance
A404 dealer's customer support.
* This alarm occurs if the received data is incorrect or if
the data is received at a time when the device cannot
handle the data.
A405
5 Appendix

spontaneous output.
350
1 Basic Operations
A406
response.
A407
* This alarm occurs if Ethernet connections are not
established at transmission.
Network Connection Functions such as data recording cannot be performed
Disconnected during production. Check whether the power supplies of
the PC and hub are on, the network cable is connected,
A411
and the network settings are correct. If this alarm occurs
again after checking the above, contact your dealer's
customer support.
NTP Time Sync Error A time lag may have occurred between the main unit
and PC, adversely affecting functions such as data

recording. Check whether the power supply of the NTP
A430 server is on, the network cable is connected, and the
network settings are correct. If this alarm occurs again
after checking the above, contact your dealer's
customer support.
MD Dbl. Product Feed products so that the interval is 280 mm or more.
Alarm The alarm is released automatically when the product
interval is adjusted to the correct value.
A501
* This alarm occurs if the next product is fed through
before evaluation is performed when performing a
missing product check.
4 Maintenance
MD Performance If this alarm occurs frequently, expand the interval

Capacity Exceeded between products.
A504
* This alarm occurs if 11 or more products are fed
through before rejection is performed.
5 Appendix
351
An MD Prod. Length Exceeded error has been detected

at the MD head photocell. The products might have
been conveyed too close together. Keep sufficient gaps
1 Basic Operations
between products when conveying them.

Products cannot be inspected correctly immediately
after operation is started or the product is changed. Wait
for a while (noise mask time) before feeding products.
A product might have been fed on the weigh conveyor
without interrupting the MD head photocell. Adjust the
MD head photocell so that the following is observed.
Can not recognize the

A505 documentation for that product before making
MD product length
adjustments.
LED (Gr): On
LED (Or): Off
LED (Gr): On
LED (Or): On
Are the in-feed, weigh, and RJ conveyor belts warped or

frayed? If so, replace the belt or cut the fraying so that
the frayed part of the belt does not interrupt the weigh
conveyor photocell.
High MD Head Temp. If this equipment is used in an environment in which the
temperature exceeds the upper limit (40ºC), lower the
operating environment temperature or move the
A570
equipment to another location. If this alarm occurs
No Recognition of Evaluation failed because the product length was not

4 Maintenance
A604 Prod. Length correctly recognized. Specify a product length longer

than the actual length.
Prod Jam or Length The products may have been conveyed too close
NG Error together. If this alarm occurs frequently, expand the
interval between products.
The products may have become misaligned while being
A605 conveyed. Attach a product guide to align the products,
or specify a product length longer than the actual length.
Check and adjust the RJ delay time.
5 Appendix
* This error occurs if evaluation is not completed by end

of T3 (Rejector delay time).
352
Prod. Eval. Error Products might have been fed through immediately after
the start of operation. Take measures to prevent
products from being fed through for about 1 second after
1 Basic Operations
A606 the start of operation (noise masking time), and then
restart production.
* This error occurs if the photocell is blocked during the
noise masking time.
RJ Interlock Error The side cover or an optional safety device such as the
conveyor cover may be open. Check that the covers are
A906 in their proper positions. After checking this, turn the
motor on and then off again or turn the main power
supply on again.
Network Connection Check whether the power supplies of the PC and hub
Disconnected are on, the network cable is connected, and the network
A930 settings are correct. If this alarm occurs again after
checking the above, contact your dealer's customer
support.
Data Accum. Start at Data accumulates until reconnection because the
Network Disconnect network is disconnected. Check whether the power
supplies of the PC and hub are on, the network cable is

A955
connected, and the network settings are correct. If this
alarm occurs again after checking the above, contact
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
353
■ Using the E017 RJ Output Overcurrent Error
(When RJ-I/F unit option is used)
When overcurrent flows at the RJ Output Contact, the circuit protector is actuated and
E017 error is display. Restore status the circuit protector by the following steps.
1 Basic Operations
Warning is turned to the OFF position.

2 Check the connection of rejector, confirm that the load at RJ Output is within the rated
current.
 P. 385 RJ Output Specification
Rectify the causes if any faulty connection or overload at contact point is observed.
3 Push button at protector Q1. Back Panel opened

RJ-I/F unit
⇒ Restored from overcurrent trip 1234 Q1
status.
RJ-I/F
Button
Q1 Q1
Pushed
Overcurrent Normal
trip status status

4 Maintenance

6 Check rejector operation by feeding OK/NG products.
If the rejection is not properly done, or actuates when RJ Output is OFF, request a
repair.
5 Appendix
354
■ Handling of the E003, A014
The life of the memory backup battery of this checkweigher is approximately 5 years.
When “E003 Backup Battery Error” or "A014 Backup Battery Alarm" is displayed, the
1 Basic Operations
memory backup battery needs to be replaced. Contact Anritsu Infivis promptly for a
replacement.
■ If the checkweigher is operated continually with a low memory backup battery, the memory
may get lost.
■ A graphite fluoride lithium battery is used as a memory backup battery. For replacement,
contact Anritsu Infivis.
■ The memory backup battery is a recyclable resource. After use, please return to Anritsu
representative.
Warning Before removing the battery, make sure to turn the power off.
(For equipment maintenance personnel)


 P. 273 Connecting External Equipment When the back panel is removed
Memory
backup
2 Remove the connector from X1 of the battery
MPU2010 unit.
X1 Connector
3 Open the battery holder, and remove the MPU2010 unit

memory backup battery.
MPU2010 Open
unit
After the memory backup battery is removed, install a new

4 Maintenance
one immediately. Otherwise, the memory may get lost. Battery holder
4 Install a new memory backup battery to the battery

Close
holder, and close the battery holder.
Battery holder
5 Insert the connector to X1 of the MPU2010 unit.

5 Appendix
355
Adjusting Photocell
Adjusting Photocell
The photocell does not need to be adjusted because it is adjusted to the appropriate
position when shipped.
Its response when a product is detected and when it is not detected are as follows:
1 Basic Operations
Operation indicator lamp (orange)

Detection state Photocell state
Operation button
Detection (the product is blocking optical axis)

Stability indicator
Lamp
Reflection lamp (green)
Photocell Product plate* Green:
ON
Orange:
OFF
No detection (no product exists)

Lamp
Photocell Reflection plate*
Green:
*
ON
Orange:
ON
*: Install the reflection plate and photocell parallel to each other.
■ To perform fine-tuning according to the characteristics of a product, perform the "Advanced

Adjustments".
 P. 358 Advanced Adjustments
■ If the stability indicator lamp (green) is off, perform the "Adjustments When the Photocell Does
Not Operate".
 P. 357 Adjustments When the Photocell Does Not Operate
■ If the operation indicator lamp (orange) is off while there are no products on the conveyor,
4 Maintenance
align the phototransmitter and reflection plate so that they are parallel to each other.
■ If both the stability indicator lamp (green) and operation indicator lamp (orange) are off while
there are no product on the conveyor, the photocell may be defective, or the photocell cable
connector may be disconnected. Contact Anritsu Infivis.
5 Appendix
356
Adjusting Photocell
■ Adjustments When the Photocell Does Not Operate
1 Initialize the photocell.
Press the operation button, and hold it until the stability
indicator lamp (green) starts to blink.
1 Basic Operations
Operation button
Green
⇒ The settings have been initialized. lamp
Orange blinks
lamp
blinks
2 Set the output state of the signal.
Press the operation button 5 times; the orange
operation indicator lamp will start blinking.
Orange
lamp
Photocell state Setting
blinks
Orange lamp blinks ON upon entrance of light

Press the operation button
5 times to toggle the setting.
Green lamp blinks ON upon blocking of light

3 Adjust the sensitivity.
Orange
lamp
(1) Press the operation button, and hold it until the operation blinks
indicator lamp (orange) starts to blink.
(2) Press the operation button once.

Green:
⇒ After the operation indicator lamp (orange) and stability ON
indicator lamp (green) turn off, the stability indicator Orange:
ON
lamp (green) and operation indicator lamp (orange)
turns on.
4 Maintenance
4 Check the photocell operation.

Make sure that the orange operation indicator lamp turns off when a product blocks
the optical axis.
Confirm that the photocell operates correctly when the product is at the front, center,
and back of the conveyor.
5 Appendix
357
Adjusting Photocell
■ Advanced Adjustments
For shiny or highly transparent products, or when detection is unstable, make
adjustments based on the characteristics of the products being measured.
1 Basic Operations
Operation button
1 Perform the settings.
(1) Press the operation button, and hold it until the operation Orange lamp
blinks
indicator lamp (orange) starts to blink.
Green lamp
(2) Press the operation button, and hold it until both the operation blinks
indicator lamp (orange) and stability indicator lamp (green) start Orange
lamp blinks
to blink.
(3) Block the photocell with the products, and press the operation Off
Off
button.
⇒ The operation indicator lamp (orange) and stability indicator lamp (green) turn off.
2 Check the photocell operation.

Make sure that the operation indicator lamp (orange) turns off when a product blocks
the optical axis.
Confirm that the photocell operates correctly when the product is at the front, center,
and back of the conveyor.
If the operation indicator lamp (orange) is blinking after the adjustment, perform the adjustment
again as the detection is still unstable. If the situation cannot be improved by the adjustment, use
of an area sensor or transparent body sensor (optional) is recommended. Contact Anritsu Infivis.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
358
1 Basic Operations 2 Advanced Operations 3 Installation and Connection 4 Maintenance 5 Appendix
359
Memo
5 Appendix
Consumables 361
Spare Parts 368
Connecting the Terminal Block Connector and Push-Type Terminal Block 380
External I/O Specifications 381
RJ Output Specification 385
RJ-I/F Unit (Optional) RJ I/O Specifications 386
Ethernet Connection 389
Timing Chart 391
Specifications 392
Copyright, etc. 566
CE Conformity Marking 567

5 Appendix
360
Consumables
Consumables
Use the Product number to place an order Product number.
■ SSV-h series
Model Product name Product number Remarks
1 Basic Operations
KWS6003BF3D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt 84G176741
KWS6003BP3D/5D/6D, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6203BF3D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt 84G176739B
KWS6203BP3D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6003BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt 84G123704F
KWS6003BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6203BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt 84G880590
KWS6203BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6205BF3D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt 84G176739D

KWS6206BF3D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt 84G176739E
KWS6411BF2E/3E/5E, Conveyor belt 84G176740F
KWS6411BP2E/3E/5E, (weigh conveyor section)
4 Maintenance

KWS6411BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, Drive belt 84G123704W
KWS6411BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G (weigh conveyor section)
5 Appendix
361
Consumables

KWS6412BF2E/3E/5E, Conveyor belt 84G176740G
1 Basic Operations

KWS6414BF2E/3E/5E, Conveyor belt 84G176740H

KWS6416BF4D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt 84G141349AN
KWS6416BF2E/4E/5E, Conveyor belt 84G176740K
KWS6416BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Drive belt 84G123908J

KWS6416BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, Drive belt 84G123704W
KWS6416BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6417BF2E/4E/5E, Conveyor belt 84G176740L
4 Maintenance

KWS6003BP2E/3E/4E, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6203BF2E/3E/4E, Conveyor belt 84G176739B
KWS6003BF2G/3G/4G, Drive belt 84G123704F
KWS6003BP2G/3G/4G, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6203BF2G/3G/4G, Drive belt 84G880590
KWS6203BP2G/3G/4G (weigh conveyor section)
5 Appendix
362
Consumables

KWS6205BF2E/3E/4E, Conveyor belt 84G176739D
1 Basic Operations
KWS6205BF2G/3G/4G, Drive belt 84G880590
KWS6205BP2G/3G/4G (weigh conveyor section)
Conveyor belt 84G176741H
(infeed conveyor section)
KWS6006BF2E/3E/4E, Conveyor belt 84G176739E
KWS6206BF2E/3E/4E, Drive belt 84G123704F
KWS6206BP2E/3E/4E (infeed conveyor section)
Drive belt 84G880590
(weigh conveyor section)

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
363
Consumables
■ SSV-i series
KWS5265BW3D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt 84G901061R
KWS6265BW3D/5D/6D, (infeed conveyor section)
1 Basic Operations
KWS5265BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Conveyor belt 84G901127

KWS6265BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5366BW2E/3E/5E, Conveyor belt 84G901127J
KWS6366BW2E/3E/5E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5366BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS5366BW2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS6366BW2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G
KWS5472BW2E/3E/5E, Conveyor belt 84G901127K
KWS5472BW2G/3G/4G/5G/5G/8G,
KWS5476BW4D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt 84G901061M

KWS5476BW2E/4E/5E, 84G901127D
KWS5577BW2E/4E/5E,
KWS5476BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Conveyor belt
KWS5577BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS5476BW2G/4G/6G/7G/8G,
KWS5577BW2G/4G/6G/7G/8G
KWS5265BW2E/3E/4E, Conveyor belt 84G901161AE
KWS6265BW2E/3E/4E, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5265BW2G/3G/4G, Conveyor belt 84G901127
4 Maintenance
KWS6265BW2G/3G/4G
5 Appendix
364
Consumables
■ SSV-f series
Conveyor belt 84G176741
1 Basic Operations
KWS5203BF3D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt 84G176739B
KWS5203BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5205BF3D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt
84G176739D
KWS5206BF3D/5D/6D, Conveyor belt 84G176739E

KWS5411BF2E/3E/5E, Conveyor belt 84G176740F
4 Maintenance
KWS5412BF2E/3E/5E, Conveyor belt 84G176740G
5 Appendix
365
Consumables

1 Basic Operations

KWS5416BF2E/4E/5E, Conveyor belt 84G176740K

KWS5417BF2E/4E/5E, Conveyor belt 84G176740L

KWS5522BF2E/4E/5E, Conveyor belt 84H127744L
KWS5522BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, Drive belt 84G145865S
4 Maintenance

KWS5524BF2E/4E/5E, Conveyor belt 84H127744M
KWS5524BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, Drive belt 84G145865S
5 Appendix
366
Consumables

KWS5203BF2E/3E/4E, Conveyor belt 84G176739B
1 Basic Operations
KWS5203BP2G/3G/4G (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5205BF2E/3E/4E, Conveyor belt 84G176739D
KWS5206BF2E/3E/4E, Conveyor belt 84G176739E

■ Common to SSV series

Product name Product number Remarks
Printer paper 84G134077 Optional
Backup lithium battery BR-2/3AC2P 84Z166631
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
367
Spare Parts
Spare Parts
■ SSV-h series
Drive roller 839H176806
1 Basic Operations

Driven roller 839H176807
KWS6003BF3D/5D/6D, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6003BP3D/5D/6D, Driven roller 839H176785
KWS6203BF3D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6203BP3D/5D/6D Motor 839H176755C
Motor 839H176750
Tension roller 833H151805
Drive roller 839H176780C
KWS6005BP3D/5D/6D, Driven roller 839H176807
KWS6006BP3D/5D/6D, Driven roller 839H176785C

KWS6205BP3D/5D/6D, Motor 839H176755C
KWS6206BP3D/5D/6D Motor 839H176750
4 Maintenance

KWS6411BF3D/5D/6D, Driven roller 839H176807
KWS6414BF3D/5D/6D, Motor 839H176755C
KWS6414BP3D/5D/6D (infeed conveyor section)
Motor 839H176755
5 Appendix
368
Spare Parts

KWS6416BF4D/5D/6D, Drive roller 839H149527F
KWS6417BF4D/5D/6D, Drive roller 839H176790E
1 Basic Operations
KWS6416BF2E/4E/5E, Driven roller 839H149530F
KWS6417BF2E/4E/5E, Driven roller 839H176795E
KWS6416BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Motor 83G901478
KWS6417BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Motor 839H176755
KWS6417BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6416BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, Tension roller 839H167733B
KWS6416BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6417BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, Gear head 83G901129
KWS6417BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6003BF2E/3E/4E, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6003BP2E/3E/4E, Driven roller 839H228311

KWS6203BF2E/3E/4E, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6003BF2G/3G/4G, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6003BP2G/3G/4G, Motor 839H176755D
KWS6203BF2G/3G/4G, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6203BP2G/3G/4G Motor 839H176750
Tension roller 833H151805F
KWS6005BF2E/3E/4E, Drive roller 839H228310
KWS6006BF2E/3E/4E,
4 Maintenance
KWS6205BF2E/3E/4E, Driven roller 839H228311
KWS6206BF2E/3E/4E, Driven roller 839H176785C
KWS6005BF2G/3G/4G, Motor 839H176755D
KWS6006BF2G/3G/4G, Motor 839H176750
KWS6006BP2G/3G/4G, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6205BF2G/3G/4G, Tension roller
5 Appendix
833H151805F
KWS6206BF2G/3G/4G,
KWS6206BP2G/3G/4G
369
Spare Parts

1 Basic Operations

KWS6414BF2E/3E/5E, Driven roller 839H176807
KWS6411BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Driven roller 839H176795
KWS6412BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Motor 839H176755D
KWS6414BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Motor 839H176755
KWS6411BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, Tension roller 833H151805

KWS6411BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6412BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G,
KWS6414BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G

KWS6003BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS6003BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Driven roller 839H176785
KWS6203BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6203BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R Motor 839H176755D
Motor 839H176750
4 Maintenance

5 Appendix
370
Spare Parts

1 Basic Operations
KWS6005BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R,
KWS6005BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Driven roller 839H176807
KWS6006BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Driven roller 839H176785C
KWS6205BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Motor 839H176755D
KWS6206BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R
Motor 839H176750

4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
371
Spare Parts
■ SSV-i series
Drive roller 839H185550D
1 Basic Operations
Drive roller 84Y185932

Driven roller 839H185555D
KWS5265BW3D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6265BW3D/5D/6D
Motor 839H185610B
Motor
839H185610
Tension roller 839H167675C
Disk 84Y170100B
Drive roller 84Y185932C

Driven roller 839H185545C
KWS5366BW3D/5D/6D, (weigh conveyor section)
KWS6366BW3D/5D/6D
Motor 839H185610B
Motor 839H185610
Disk 84Y170100B
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
372
Spare Parts

1 Basic Operations
KWS5472BW3D/5D/6D, Driven roller 839H185555C
KWS6472BW3D/5D/6D (weigh conveyor section)
Motor 839H185610C
(infeed/weigh conveyor
section)
Disk 84Y170100B
Drive roller 839H185550F
Drive roller 839H185550E
Driven roller 839H185555F
Driven roller 839H185555E

Motor 839H185610C
section)
Tension roller 839H167675B
Disk 84Y170100B
(weigh conveyor section) 4 Maintenance
Driven roller 839H185555F
Motor 839H185610D
section)
Disk 84Y170100B
5 Appendix
373
Spare Parts

Drive roller 839H279305H
1 Basic Operations

KWS5265BW2E/3E/4E,
KWS5265BW2G/3G/4G,
Motor 839H185610B
KWS6265BW2G/3G/4G (infeed conveyor section)
Motor 839H185610
Tension roller 839H167675E

Disk 84Y170100B
Drive roller 839H279305J
KWS5472BW2E/3E/5E, Driven roller 839H279306B
KWS5472BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Driven roller 839H185555C

KWS5472BW2G/3G/4G/5G/5G/8G, Motor 839H185610C
KWS6472BW2G/3G/4G/5G/5G/8G (infeed/weigh conveyor
section)
Disk 84Y170100B
Drive roller 84Y185932C
4 Maintenance

Driven roller 839H279306B
KWS6366BW2E/3E/5E,
Motor 839H185610B
KWS5366BW2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, (infeed conveyor section)
Motor 839H185610
5 Appendix

Disk 84Y170100B
374
Spare Parts

Drive roller 839H279305K
1 Basic Operations
KWS5476BW2E/4E/5E,
Motor 839H185610C
section)
Disk 84Y170100B
Drive roller 839H279305K
KWS5577BW2E/4E/5E,

Motor 839H185610D
section)
Disk 84Y170100B
4 Maintenance
Driven roller 839H279306B

KWS6265BW2R/3R/4R/5R/6R
Motor 839H185610B
Motor 839H185610
5 Appendix

Disk 84Y170100B
375
Spare Parts
■ SSV-f series
1 Basic Operations
Drive roller 839H176780B

KWS5203BF3D/5D/6D, Driven roller 839H176785B
KWS5203BP3D/5D/6D (weigh conveyor section)
Motor 839H176755C
Motor
839H176750B
KWS5205BP3D/5D/6D, Driven roller 839H176785D

KWS5206BP3D/5D/6D Motor 839H176755C
Motor 839H176750B
4 Maintenance

KWS5412BF3D/5D/6D, Driven roller 839H176795B
KWS5414BF3D/5D/6D, Motor 839H176755C
KWS5414BP3D/5D/6D (infeed conveyor section)
Motor 839H176755B
5 Appendix
376
Spare Parts

1 Basic Operations
KWS5416BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Motor 83G901478
KWS5417BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Motor 839H176755B
KWS5416BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, Tension roller 839H167733B
KWS5416BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5417BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, Gear head 83G901129
KWS5417BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5522BP4D/5D/6D, Drive roller 839H185880
KWS5524BP4D/5D/6D, Driven roller 839H149530F

KWS5524BP2E/4E/5E, Motor 83G901478
KWS5522BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Motor 83G176769
KWS5524BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Tension roller 839H167733B
KWS5522BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5522BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, Gear head 83G901129C
KWS5524BF2G/4G/6G/7G/8G, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5524BP2G/4G/6G/7G/8G
4 Maintenance
Gear head 83G176770
5 Appendix
377
Spare Parts

1 Basic Operations

KWS5203BP2E/3E/4E, Driven roller 839H176785B
KWS5203BP2G/3G/4G Motor 839H176755D
Motor 839H176750B

KWS5206BP2E/3E/4E, Driven roller 839H176785D

KWS5205BP2G/3G/4G, Motor 839H176755D
KWS5206BF2G/3G/4G, (infeed conveyor section)
KWS5206BP2G/3G/4G Motor 839H176750B
KWS5412BF2E/3E/5E, Drive roller 839H176790B
KWS5414BF2E/3E/5E,
4 Maintenance

KWS5411BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Driven roller 839H176795B
KWS5412BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Motor 839H176755D
KWS5414BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Motor 839H176755B
KWS5411BF2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, Tension roller 833H151805
KWS5411BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G, (infeed conveyor section)
5 Appendix
KWS5414BP2G/3G/4G/5G/7G/8G
378
Spare Parts

1 Basic Operations
KWS5203BF2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Driven roller 839H176785B
Motor 839H176755D
Motor 839H176750B

KWS5205BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R, Driven roller 839H176785D
KWS5206BP2R/3R/4R/5R/6R Motor 839H176755D
Motor 839H176750B
4 Maintenance
■ Common to SSV series

Product name Product number Remarks
USB memory 84Y204604C Optional
Sensor 84G901906
5 Appendix
379
Connecting the Terminal Block Connector and Push-Type Terminal Block
Connecting the Terminal Block Connector and Push-Type Terminal Block
When connecting the checkweigher to an external device or rejector, connect the cables
to the terminal block connector and push-type terminal block as described below.
■ Terminal Block Connector

1 Basic Operations
1 Remove the connector terminal block from

the unit.
Flat-bladed
2 Loosen the screws with a flat-bladed screwdriver
screwdriver and insert the cable.
Cable
3 Tighten the screws. *
*: For connection, remove the cable covering
4 Lightly pull the inserted cable to make sure material for the specified length.
it is secure.
5 Install the connector terminal block to the

unit.
■ Push-Type Terminal Block

Applicable
PT2.5-QUATTRO
terminal block
Single wire: 0.14 to 4 mm2 (AWG26 to AWG12)

Applicable Twisted wire: 0.14 to 2.5 mm2 (AWG26 to AWG14)
cable Remove 10 mm of the cable covering material when connecting to the
terminal block.
Terminal block
1 Press the tip of the square button of the
terminal block with the tip of a tool.
2 Insert the cable into the round hole while

holding down the square button.
4 Maintenance
Square button
3 Remove the tip of the tool from the square (for tool) Round hole
button. (for cable)
4 Lightly pull the inserted cable to make sure

Press the square
it is secure. button with the tip
of a tool.
When the cable cannot be inserted, press the *

AC power cable
square button firmly with a tool. for rejector
5 Appendix
*: A cable with rod terminal or twisted wire cable

(without rod terminal) can be connected.
When a twisted wire cable is used, remove the
cable covering material for the specified length.
380
External I/O Specifications
1. I/O Points
The checkweigher can use external I/O control.
Standard + KCU2504A expansion I/O
Standard
(optional)
1 Basic Operations
Input
2 10
terminal
Output
2 10
terminal
2. I/O Specifications
Applicable Terminal block connector (Phoenix Contact MSTBT 2,
connector 5/8-ST-5, 08)
Conductor cross-sectional area of 0.2 to 2.5 mm2
Applicable (AWG24 to 12)
cable Remove 7 mm of the cable covering material when
connecting to the terminal block connector.
For the procedure to connect to the X53 (terminal block connector), refer to "Connecting
the Terminal Block Connector and Push-Type Terminal Block".

 P. 380 Connecting the Terminal Block Connector and Push-Type Terminal Block
MPU2010 UNIT GPIO

X53
1 1
Output terminal
V63 2 2 OUT1 Relay contact ratings
3 3 250 Vac, 1A max.
30 Vdc, 1A max.
V64 4 4 OUT2
5 5 Power supply for Anritsu (for Warning lamp only)

+24 V
4 Maintenance
+24 V
V65
6 6
IN1
Input terminal
Use a contact with rated
V66 voltage of 30 Vdc and
7 7
IN 2 a rated load of 5 mA or
8 8 more.
IN-COMMON
G(S)
For the input part, using in the fail safe
side is recommended so that breaks can
5 Appendix
be detected.
381
■ Output (OUT1/OUT2) Diode

When used in a DC circuit
I1
1. Reference circuit Load
1 Basic Operations
2. Usage range V1
Voltage: V1  DC 5 to 30 V
Current: I1  0.01 to 1 A
3. Precautions Wiring must be 30 m or less

For a coil load, put a surge suppressor
diode in parallel with the load.
When used in an AC circuit Wiring must be 30 m or less

I2
1. Reference circuit
2. Usage range V2
Voltage: V2  AC250 V
Current: I2  1 A
Load
3. Precautions
For a coil load, put a CR (0.1 F, 1 kΩ) or
surge absorber in parallel with the load. CR (1 kΩ, 0.1μF)
■ Input (IN1/IN2)
Relay contact
X53
Photocoupler
+24V 5 mA Input switch
IN1 6
4 Maintenance
5 mA Input switch
IN2 7
G (S)
Wiring must be 30 m or less
MPU2010 UNIT
5 Appendix
382
NPN transistor connection (sink type)
X53
4.7 K
1 Basic Operations
Internal circuit
+24V
5 mA
6 or 7 NPN transistor
MPU2010 UNIT G (S)
NPN transistor output photocell (three-wire) connection
+24 V X53 Photocell

5
4.7 K
Internal circuit
Sensor main circuit

6 or 7 Control output

8
MPU2010 UNIT G (S)
PNP transistor connection (source type)

The input contact of the optional external I/O unit KCU2504A supports sink input
and source input. Use the KCU2504A for connection.
4 Maintenance
2. Precautions
Use the input switch and contact whose rated voltage is 30 VDC or higher and current
is 5 mA or more.
5 Appendix
383
■ Emergency Stop Connection Specifications

Input for emergency stop is installed.
Connection
MPU2010 UNIT X29
location
1 Basic Operations
Applicable Phoenix Contact MC1.5/5-ST-3.5(SK1-5)

connector No contact is required because it is a terminal block connector.
Conductor cross-sectional area of 0.14 to 1.5 mm2 (AWG28 to 16)
Applicable
Remove 7 mm of the cable covering material when connecting to the terminal
cable
block connector.
+24 V
EMEG.SW
X29
1
For emergency stop; normally short-circuited.
Internal 2 Cannot be used when CE marking is supported.
circuit
When used as emergency stop input, use 1b contact, a
contact rating of 30 VDC or more, and rated load of 0.1 A
3 or more.
Cannot be used when an emergency stop switch is
+24 V G(S) installed.
Only for Anritsu Infivis rejector

4
DO NOT use for other use.
Checkweigher
MPU2010 unit
Example of emergency stop switch connection

4 Maintenance
+24 V
EMEG.SW
X29
Internal 2
circuit
5 Appendix
384
RJ Output Specification
RJ Output Specification
It is used to connect to an Anritsu rejector with a 24VDC interface.
■ Output Specifications
Hirose Electric DF1B-20DS-2.5RC
1 Basic Operations
Applicable
connector (not provided with this checkweigher)
MPU2010 UNIT
RJ X45
RJ output
FET 3
V58 RJ1
4
V59 RJ2 FET contact rating
30 VDC,1 A or less
5
V61 RJ4
6
V62 RJ5
For Anritsu rejectors.
G(S)
Do not use for other
Photocoupler +5 V
7 purposes.
MOTOR ON Photocoupler
Emergency stop relay
contact rating
1
G(+24 V) +24 V
24 VC OUT
2

17 +24 VdC OUT
18
19
20
FG
G(S)
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
385
RJ-I/F Unit (Optional) RJ I/O Specifications
It is used to connect to an Anritsu rejector with a 100 VAC interface or a rejector of

another manufacturer.
■ Output Specifications
1 Basic Operations
Applicable WIELAND 25.640.1853.0 (terminal block connector)

connector Installed in the RJ-I/F unit.
Conductor cross-sectional area of 0.14-1.5 mm2 (AWG26-14)
Applicable
Remove 7 mm of the cable covering material when connecting to
cable
the terminal block connector.
MPU2010 RJ-I/F UNIT

UNIT
REJECTOR X2
RJ X45 X1 TO MPU
1
FG
1 1 Rejector output
Photo MOS relay
2 2 3
V2 RJ1 Photo MOS Relay
Contact
4 110 Vac, 0.7 A max.
V3 RJ5
30 Vdc, 0.7 A max.
16
V5 RJ2 Photo MOS Relay Contact
110 Vac, 0.7 A max.
17 30 Vdc, 0.7 A max.
V6 RJ4
for 5-way rejection option
*: Only the K4 and K5 sockets
are mounted.
Q1 5 COMMON
Circuit protector
6
Relay Contact Rating
7
MOTOR ON 110 Vac, 2.5 A max.
8 30 Vdc, 2.5 A max.
19 19
Emergency stop relay
4 Maintenance
20 20 9
+24V Only for Anritsu Infivis
10 rejector
11 DO NOT use for other
purposes.
G(S)
5 Appendix
386
1. RJ-I/F Unit Position

When the back cover is opened
RJ-I/F unit
1 Basic Operations
K4
K5
REJECTOR
X2
2. 100 VAC Output Specifications
■ Rejector output (RJ1 to RJ5)
2. Usage range Photo MOS Relay I1
Current: I1  0.7 A (peak 1 A) V1
3. Precautions Load
Install the CR for surge absorber. Checkweigher 1 kΩ 0.1 μF

Use a capacitor with the rating of 600 Vdc
max.
■ Mot. ON Output
2. Usage range I1
Current: I1  2.5 A 120 Ω Leak current
V1 IL is 5 mA or
0.1 μF
Leak current: IL  5 mA Load less
4 Maintenance
(AC100 V, 60 Hz) 1 kΩ 0.1 μF

Checkweigher
3. Precautions
Install the CR for surge absorber.
Use a capacitor with the rating of 600 Vdc
max.
5 Appendix
387
3. 24 VDC Output Specifications

■ Rejector output (RJ1 to RJ5)
1. Reference circuit Photo MOS Relay
1 Basic Operations
2. Usage range Load
Voltage: V1  DC30 V I1 V1
Current: I1  0.7 A (peak 1 A)
3. Precautions Checkweigher
Install the diode for surge absorber.
■ Mot. ON Output
2. Usage range Load
120 Ω
Voltage: V1  DC30 V I1 V1
0.1 μF
Current: I1  2.5 A
3. Precautions Checkweigher
Install the diode for surge absorber.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
388
Ethernet Connection
Ethernet Connection
The standard specifications for this checkweigher include Ethernet (LAN) connection to
QUICCA.
■ Communication Specifications
1 Basic Operations
Item Description
10BASE-T (IEEE 802.3)
Applicable standard
100BASE-TX (IEEE 802.3u)
10 Mbps/100 Mbps auto switching
Bit rate
(100 Mbps preferred)
Communication method Full duplex
Manchester code (10BASE-T)
Coding method
4B5B/MLT-3 (100BASE-TX)
Access method CSMA/CD
Applicable protocol TCP, IP, ICMP, ARP, RARP
Connector shape RJ-45 (8P8C)
Pin number Signal name Name
1 TXD+ Transmitted data (+)
2 TXD- Transmitted data ()

3 RXD+ Received data (+)
Pin assignment 4  Disable
5  Disable
6 RXD- Received data ()
7  Disable
8  Disable
Cable length Order number
15 m 84J204319
Recommended cable 30 m 84J204320
4 Maintenance
Category 5 LAN straight cable (UTP)
■ LAN Cable Wiring

When the back cover is opened
MPU2010 UNIT
Item Description
X23
LAN1 ON when connected to
V5
V5 (Link LED) the network successfully
LINK LAN cable and communicating
5 Appendix
V36
SPD
V36 (Speed ON (orange): 100 Mbps
LED) OFF: 10 Mbps
389
Ethernet Connection
■ Text Specifications
CD-ROM : Click on the link below to see.
 Text Specifications
Booklet : You are liable for cost. Please contact Anritsu Infivis or its distributor for
1 Basic Operations
service.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
390
Timing Chart
Timing Chart
Weight signal
1 Basic Operations
Detection signal
(Photocell)
T1 30～6500ms
(Measurement delay)
10ms
Photocell-off delay
T2 (Scale balance) 40～6500ms
T8
10～12500ms
(Dbl. Prod Timer)
Evaluation time
20ms
T3 1～9999ms
(Rejectingdelay)

T4
(Rejecting operation) 45～9999ms
Auto zero-setting
operation
T5
(Auto zero-setting 0～60000ms
prohibition)
4 Maintenance
MIN 50ms MIN 50ms
External NG input
(EXNG/EXNG2)
Evaluation output
(external IO control output) 0～9999ms
5 Appendix
391
Specifications
Specifications
■ SSV-h series
1 Basic Operations
KWS6003BF3D, KWS6003BF5D, KWS6003BF2E, KWS6003BF3E,

Model KWS6003BF6D, KWS6003BP3D, KWS6003BF4E, KWS6003BP2E,
KWS6003BP5D, KWS6003BP6D KWS6003BP3E, KWS6003BP4E
Weighing range 3 to 100 g
Scale interval 0.05 g
Maximum speed *1 155 products/min

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1 Meets OIML-R51 requirements
Display 8.5-inch color TFT LCD
Operation method Touch panel (Start, Stop, and Home are direct push buttons)
Indication range 100.45 g
Preset memory Maximum 200
Classification 2 or 3
Width W 20 to 100 mm
Product Length L 58 to 230 mm
size *2 3D: 5 to 80 mm 5D: 5 to 120 mm 2E: 5 to 50 mm 3E: 5 to 80 mm
Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 4E: 5 to 100 mm
Belt speed 15 to 92 m/min
4 Maintenance
3D: φ0.4 mm 5D: φ0.5 mm 2E: φ0.3 mm 3E: φ0.35 mm

Fe
Detection 6D: φ0.6 mm 4E: φ0.4 mm
sensitivity*3 3D: φ0.8 mm 5D: φ1.1 mm 2E: φ0.65 mm 3E: φ0.7 mm
SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 4E: φ0.8 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
single phase, 50/60 Hz, 200 VA, rush current 30 A (typ.) (20 ms or less)
Mass 3D: 98 kg 5D: 100 kg 6D: 101 kg 2E: 108 kg 3E: 108 kg 4E: 109 kg
0° to 40°C (variation not to exceed 5°C/h to maintain accuracy),
Environmental conditions
relative humidity 30% to 85%, non-condensing
Protection class IP30 compliance
Exterior F type: painted, P type: stainless steel (SUS304) (excluding some parts)
5 Appendix
Others The noise level of the Checkweighers does not exceed 70 dB(A).
392
Specifications
*1: The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2: The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
*3: It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and
1 Basic Operations
type of foreign matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content
and the shape). Note also that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated
values and test pieces may not actually be detected at these levels.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
393
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
KWS6003BF2R, KWS6003BF3R, KWS6003BF4R, KWS6003BF5R,

KWS6003BF6R
Model KWS6003BP2R, KWS6003BP3R, KWS6003BP4R, KWS6003BP5R,
KWS6003BP6R

size *2 2R: 5 to 50 mm 3R: 5 to 80 mm 4R: 5 to 120 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
Detection 5R: φ0.5 mm 6R: φ0.55 mm
sensitivity*3 2R: φ0.7 mm 3R: φ0.8 mm 4R: φ0.9 mm
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
Mass 2R: 109 kg 3R: 108 kg 4R: 111 kg 5R: 113 kg 6R: 114 kg
5 Appendix
394
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
and the shape).Note also that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values
and test pieces may not actually be detected at these levels.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
395
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
KWS6003BF2G, KWS6003BF3G, KWS6003BF4G

Model
KWS6003BP2G, KWS6003BP3G, KWS6003BP4G

Product
Length L 58 to 230 mm
size *2
Height H 2G:5 to 50 mm 3G:5 to 80 mm 4G:5 to 100 mm
Detection Fe 2G: φ0.3 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm
3
sensitivity* SUS304 2G: φ0.65 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm
4 Maintenance
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
Mass 2G:108 kg 3G:108 kg 4G:109 kg
5 Appendix
396
Specifications
*1 The speed and accuracy vary according to the products to be weighed and the rejector.
*2 The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a rejector.
*3 It is the maximum detection sensitivity in the test area and differs depending on the place and type of foreign
1 Basic Operations
matter and the physical property of the specimen (the temperature, the content and the shape). Note also
that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated values and test pieces may not
actually be detected at these levels.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
397
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 4E: 5 to 100 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 4E: φ0.8 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
398
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
399
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

KWS6005BF6R
KWS6005BP6R

Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
Mass 2R：109 kg 3R：108 kg 4R：111 kg 5R：113 kg 6R：114 kg
5 Appendix
400
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
401
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model

Product
size *2
3
4 Maintenance
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
Mass 2G:108 kg 3G:108 kg 4G:109 kg
5 Appendix
402
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
403
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 4E: 5 to 100 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

sensitivity*3 3D: φ0.8 mm 5D: φ1.1 mm 2E: φ0.65 mm 3E:φ0.7 mm
SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 4E: φ0.8 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
404
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
405
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
KWS6006BF2R，KWS6006BF3R，KWS6006BF4R，KWS6006BF5R，
KWS6006BF6R
Model KWS6006BP2R，KWS6006BP3R，KWS6006BP4R，KWS6006BP5R，
KWS6006BP6R

Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
406
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
407
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model

Product
size *2
3
4 Maintenance
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
Mass 2G:108 kg 3G:108 kg 4G:109 kg
5 Appendix
408
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
409
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Scale interval *1 0.1 g

Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 4E: 5 to 100 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 4E: φ0.8 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
410
Specifications
*1: When multi-range function is used.

*3: The size of products to be weighed depends on the rejector; select a checkweigher together with a
rejector. Consult us about semi-transparent and transparent products.
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
411
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

KWS6203BF6R
KWS6203BP6R

Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
412
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
413
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model
Scale interval 0.1 g

Product
size *2
3
4 Maintenance
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
Mass 2G:108 kg 3G:108 kg 4G:109 kg
5 Appendix
414
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
415
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 4E: 5 to 100 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 4E: φ0.8 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
416
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
417
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

KWS6205BF6R
KWS6205BP6R

Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
418
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
419
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model

Product
size *2
3
4 Maintenance
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
Mass 2G:108 kg 3G:108 kg 4G:109 kg
5 Appendix
420
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
421
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 4E: 5 to 100 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 4E: φ0.8 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
422
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
423
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

KWS6206BF6R
KWS6206BP6R

Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
424
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
425
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model

Product
size *2
3
4 Maintenance
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
Mass 2G:108 kg 3G:108 kg 4G:109 kg
5 Appendix
426
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
427
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 5E: 5 to 120 mm
3D: φ0.4 mm 5D: φ0.5 mm 2E: φ0.35mm 3E: φ0.4 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
428
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
429
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

KWS6411BF6R
KWS6411BP6R

Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
430
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
431
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
KWS6411BF2G, KWS6411BF3G, KWS6411BF4G, KWS6411BF5G,

KWS6411BF7G, KWS6411BF8G
Model KWS6411BP2G, KWS6411BP3G, KWS6411BP4G, KWS6411BP5G,
KWS6411BP7G, KWS6411BP8G

size *2 2G:5 to 50 mm 3G:5 to 80 mm 4G:5 to 100 mm 5G:5 to 120 mm
Height H 7G:5 to 150 mm 8G:5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance
2G: φ0.35 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm

Fe 5G: φ0.45 mm 7G: φ0.45 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
Detection
sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.7 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm
SUS304 5G: φ0.8 mm 7G: φ0.85 mm 8G: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
Mass 2G:115 kg 3G:115 kg 4G:116 kg 5G:117 kg 7G:119kg 8G:120 kg
5 Appendix
432
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
433
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 5E: 5 to 120 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
434
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
435
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

KWS6412BF6R
KWS6412BP6R

Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
436
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
437
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


4 Maintenance
2G: φ0.35 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm

Fe 5G: φ0.45 mm 7G: φ0.45 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
Detection
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
438
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
439
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 5E: 5 to 120 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
440
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
and the shape).。Note also that some of the indicated detection sensitivities are based on calculated
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
441
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

KWS6414BF6R
KWS6414BP6R

Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
442
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
443
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


4 Maintenance
2G: φ0.35 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm

Fe 5G: φ0.45 mm 7G: φ0.45 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
Detection
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
444
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
445
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 5E: 5 to 130 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
6D: φ1.2 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
446
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
447
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

KWS6416BF6R
KWS6416BP6R

Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.45 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
448
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
449
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

KWS6416BF8G
KWS6416BP8G

size *2 2G:5 to 50 mm 4G:5 to 100 mm 6G:5 to 130 mm
4 Maintenance
2G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm 6G: φ0.45 mm

Fe 7G: φ0.5 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
Detection
SUS304 7G: φ0.9 mm 8G: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
Mass 2G:146 kg 4G:148 kg 6G:152 kg 7G:154 kg 8G:156 kg
5 Appendix
450
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
451
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 5E: 5 to 130 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
6D: φ1.2 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
452
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
453
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

KWS6417BF6R
KWS6417BP6R

Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.45 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
454
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
455
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

KWS6417BF8G
KWS6417BP8G

4 Maintenance
2G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm 6G: φ0.45 mm

Fe 7G: φ0.5 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
Detection
SUS304 7G: φ0.9 mm 8G: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
Mass 2G:150 kg 4G:152 kg 6G:156 kg 7G:158 kg 8G:160 kg
5 Appendix
456
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
457
Specifications
■ SSV-i series
1 Basic Operations
KWS6265BW3D, KWS6265BW5D, KWS6265BW2E, KWS6265BW3E,

Model
KWS6265BW6D KWS6265BW4E

Height H
6D: 5 to 175 mm 4E: 5 to 95 mm
4 Maintenance
Fe
SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 4E: φ0.8 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
Exterior Stainless steel (SUS304)
5 Appendix
458
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
459
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
KWS6265BW2R, KWS6265BW3R, KWS6265BW4R, KWS6265BW5R,

Model
KWS6265BW6R

Height H
5R: 5 to 145 mm 6R: 5 to 175 mm
2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
460
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
461
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
Model KWS6265BW2G, KWS6265BW3G, KWS6265BW4G

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1
Meets OIML-R51 requirements

Product
size *2
Detection Fe 2G: φ0.3 mm 3G: φ0.35mm 4G: φ0.4 mm
3
4 Maintenance
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
Mass 2G:116 kg 3G:116 kg 4G:117 kg
5 Appendix
462
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
463
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model

Height H
6D: 5 to 175 mm 5E: 5 to 115 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
464
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
465
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model
KWS6366BW6R

Height H
5R: 5 to 145 mm 6R: 5 to 175 mm
2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
466
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
467
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
KWS6366BW2G, KWS6366BW3G, KWS6366BW4G, KWS6366BW5G,

Model
KWS6366BW7G, KWS6366BW8G

2G: φ0.35 mm 3G: φ0.35mm 4G: φ0.4 mm
Fe 5G: φ0.45 mm 7G: φ0.45 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
4 Maintenance
Detection
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
Mass 2G:121 kg 3G:121 kg 4G:122 kg 5G:123 kg 7G:125 kg 8G:126 kg
5 Appendix
468
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
469
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model
5
Weighing range 15 to 3000 g [15 to 1200 g] *
Maximum speed *2 160 [220] products/min *5

Height H
6D: 5 to 175 mm 5E: 5 to 115 mm
Belt speed 7 to 60 [9 to 82] m/min *5
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
470
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
*5: [ ] are optional. The maximum weighing range varies according to the operating environment.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
471
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model
KWS6472BW6R
Weighing range 15 to 3000 g [15 to 1200 g] *5

size *3 3 R: 5 to 45 mm 3R: 5 to 75 mm 4R: 5 to 115 mm
Height H
5R: 5 to 145 mm 6R: 5 to 175 mm
2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
472
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
473
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model
Weighing range 15 to 3000 g [15 to 1200 g] * 4
Maximum speed *1 160 [220] products/min * 4

Indication range 3004.5 g [1201.8 g] * 4
Belt speed 7 to 60 [9 to 82] m/min * 4
2G: φ0.35 mm 3G: φ0.35mm 4G: φ0.4 mm
Fe 5G: φ0.45 mm 7G: φ0.45 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
4 Maintenance
Detection
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
Mass 2G:122 kg 3G:122 kg 4G:123 kg 5G:124 kg 7G:126 kg 8G:127 kg
5 Appendix
474
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
*4 [ ] are optional. The maximum weighing range varies according to the operating environment.
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
475
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model

Height H
6D: 5 to 175 mm 4E: 5 to 95 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 4E: φ0.8 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
476
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
477
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model
KWS5265BW6R

Height H
5R: 5 to 145 mm 6R: 5 to 175 mm
2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
478
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
479
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
Model KWS5265BW2G, KWS5265BW3G, KWS5265BW4G

Maximum accuracy (3σ) *1
Meets OIML-R51 requirements

Product
size *2
Height H 2G: 5 to 45 mm 3G: 5 to 75 mm 4G: 5 to 95 mm
3
4 Maintenance
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
Mass 2G: 115kg 3G: 115 kg 4G: 116 kg
5 Appendix
480
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
481
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model

Height H
6D: 5 to 175 mm 5E: 5 to 115 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
482
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
483
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model
KWS5366BW6R

Height H
5R: 5 to 145 mm 6R: 5 to 175 mm
2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
484
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
485
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model

size *2 2G: 5 to 45 mm 3G: 5 to 75 mm 4G: 5 to 95 mm
2G: φ0.35 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance
Detection 5G: φ0.45 mm 7G: φ0.45 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm

100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
Mass 2G: 120 kg 3G: 120 kg 4G: 121 kg 5G: 122 kg 7G: 124 kg 8G: 125 kg
5 Appendix
486
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
487
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model
5

Indication range 3009 g
Height H
6D: 5 to 175 mm 5E: 5 to 115 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
488
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
489
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model
KWS5472BW6R

Height H
5R: 5 to 145 mm 6R: 5 to 175 mm
2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
490
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
491
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model

Indication range 3009 g [1204.5 g] *4
2G: φ0.35 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm
Fe 5G: φ0.45 mm 7G: φ0.45 mm 7G: φ0.5 mm
4 Maintenance
Detection
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
492
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
493
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model
5

Height H
6D: 5 to 175 mm 5E: 5 to 125 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
6D: φ1.2 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
494
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
495
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model
KWS5476BW6R

Height H
5R: 5 to 145 mm 6R: 5 to 175 mm
2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.45 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
496
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
497
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model
KWS5476BW8G

Indication range 3009 g [1204.5 g] *4
Height H 7G: 5 to 145 mm 8G: 5 to 175 mm
2G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm 6G: φ0.45 mm
Fe 7G: φ0.5 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
4 Maintenance
Detection
SUS304 7G: φ0.9 mm 8G: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
Mass 2G: 153 kg 4G: 155 kg 6G: 159 kg 7G: 161 kg 8G: 163 kg
5 Appendix
498
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
499
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model
Scale interval 2g

Height H
6D: 5 to 175 mm 5E: 5 to 125 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
6D: φ1.2 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
500
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
501
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model
KWS5577BW6R
Scale interval 2g

Height H
5R: 5 to 145 mm 6R: 5 to 175 mm
2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.45 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
502
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
503
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model
KWS5577BW8G
Scale interval 2g

2G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm 6G: φ0.45 mm
Fe 7G: φ0.5 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
4 Maintenance
Detection
SUS304 7G: φ0.9 mm 8G: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
504
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
505
Specifications
■ SSV-f series
1 Basic Operations


Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 4E: 5 to 100 mm
4 Maintenance

Fe
SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 4E: φ0.8 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
506
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
507
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

KWS5203BF6R
KWS5203BP6R

Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
508
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
509
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model

Product
size *2
3
4 Maintenance
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
Mass 2G: 108 kg 3G: 108 kg 4G: 109 kg
5 Appendix
510
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
511
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 4E: 5 to 100 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 4E: φ0.8 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
512
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
513
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

KWS5205BF6R
KWS5205BP6R

Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
514
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
515
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model

Product
size *2
3
4 Maintenance
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
Mass 2G: 108 kg 3G: 108 kg 4G: 109 kg
5 Appendix
516
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
517
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 4E: 5 to 100 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 4E: φ0.8 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
518
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
519
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

KWS5206BF6R
KWS5206BP6R

Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
520
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
521
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Model

Product
size *2
3
4 Maintenance
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
Mass 2G: 108 kg 3G: 108 kg 4G: 109 kg
5 Appendix
522
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
523
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 5E: 5 to 120 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
524
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
525
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

KWS5411BF6R
KWS5411BP6R

Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
526
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
527
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


size *2 2G: 5 to 50 mm 3G: 5 to 80 mm 4G: 5 to 100 mm 5G: 5 to 120 mm
4 Maintenance
2G: φ0.35 mm 3G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm 5G: φ0.45 mm

Fe 7G: φ0.0.45 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
Detection
sensitivity*3 2G: φ0.7 mm 3G: φ0.7 mm 4G: φ0.8 mm 5G: φ0.8 mm
SUS304 7G: φ0.85 mm 8G: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
528
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
529
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 5E: 5 to 120 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
530
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
531
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

KWS5412BF6R
KWS5412BP6R

Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
532
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
533
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


4 Maintenance

Fe 7G: φ0.45 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
Detection
SUS304 7G: φ0.85 mm 8G: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
534
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
535
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 5E: 5 to 120 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
6D: φ1.1 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
536
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
537
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

KWS5414BF6R
KWS5414BP6R

size *3 2R：5 to 50 mm 3R：5 to 80 mm 4R：5 to 120 mm
Height H
5R：5 to 150 mm 6R：5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.4 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
538
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
539
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


4 Maintenance

Fe 7G: φ0.45 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
Detection
SUS304 7G: φ0.85 mm 8G: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
540
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
541
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 5E: 5 to 130 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
6D: φ1.2 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
542
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
543
Specifications
KWS5416BF□R H
KWS5416BP□R 50 KWS5416B △ 2R
100 KWS5416B △ 3R
345 Belt width
130 KWS5416B △ 4R
820
1 Basic Operations
350
150 KWS5416B △ 5R
180 KWS5416B △ 6R
1205
Tower Light (Option)
Printer
(Option)
185
300 153
Indicator
236
Metal Detector
400
Flow direction
670
30 dia. Weigh conveyor
900
Roller
25 dia.
1370 to 1520
Roller
H
Line heights
700 to 850
405
M20
Leg spacing
60 dia. 645 50
685
280 820 105
Leg spacing
Units: mm
WS5416BF2R, KWS5416BF3R, KWS5416BF4R, KWS5416BF5R,

KWS5416BF6R
KWS5416BP6R

Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.45 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
544
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
545
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

KWS5416BF8G
KWS5416BP8G

4 Maintenance
2G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm 6G: φ0.45 mm

Fe 7G: φ0.5 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
Detection
SUS304 7G: φ0.9 mm 8G: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
546
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
547
Specifications
1 Basic Operations


Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 5E: 5 to 130 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
6D: φ1.2 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
548
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
549
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

KWS5417BF6R
KWS5417BP6R

Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.45 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
Mass 2R：144 kg 3R：145 kg 4R：146 kg 5R：148 kg 6R：149 kg
5 Appendix
550
Specifications

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
551
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

KWS5417BF8G
KWS5417BP8G

4 Maintenance
2G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm 6G: φ0.45 mm

Fe 7G: φ0.5 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
Detection
SUS304 7G: φ0.9 mm 8G: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
552
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
553
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Scale interval 2g

Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 5E: 5 to 130 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
6D: φ1.2 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
554
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
555
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

KWS5522BF6R
KWS5522BP6R
Scale interval 2g
Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.45 mm 4R:φ 0.5 mm
Fe
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
556
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
557
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

KWS5522BF8G
KWS5522BP8G
Scale interval 2g
size *2 2G: 5 to 50 mm6 4G: 5 to 100 mm 6G: 5 to 130 mm
Height H 7G: 5 to 150 mm6 8G: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance
2G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm 6G: φ0.45 mm

Fe 7G: φ0.5 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
Detection
SUS304 7G: φ0.9 mm 8G: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
558
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
559
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

Scale interval 2g

Height H
6D: 5 to 180 mm 5E: 5 to 130 mm
Fe
4 Maintenance

SUS304
6D: φ1.2 mm 5E: φ0.9 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
560
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
561
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

KWS5524BF6R
KWS5524BP6R
Scale interval 2g
Height H
5R: 5 to 150 mm 6R: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance

2R: φ0.4 mm 3R: φ0.45 mm 4R: φ0.5 mm
Fe
SUS304
5R: φ0.95 mm 6R: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
562
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
563
Specifications
1 Basic Operations

KWS5524BF8G
KWS5524BP8G
Scale interval 2g
size *2 2G: 5 to 50 mm6 4G: 5 to 100 mm 6G: 5 to 130 mm
Height H 7G: 5 to 150 mm6 8G: 5 to 180 mm
4 Maintenance
2G: φ0.35 mm 4G: φ0.4 mm 6G: φ0.45 mm

Fe 7G: φ0.5 mm 8G: φ0.5 mm
Detection
SUS304 7G: φ0.9 mm 8G: φ1.0 mm
100 to 120 Vac +10% –15% or 200 to 240 Vac +10% –15%,
Power requirements
5 Appendix
564
Specifications
1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
565
Copyright, etc.
Copyright, etc.
iWnn © OMRON SOFTWARE Co., Ltd. 2008-2011 All Right Reserved.

1 Basic Operations
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
566
CE Conformity Marking
The CE conformity marking is affixed to Anritsu Infivis products to indicate that they
conform to the MD, LVD, and EMC directives of the European Union (EU).
1 Basic Operations
CE marking
Check the following to see whether your equipment meets the Council Directive or not.
- The CE conformity marking on the product
- Attached ‘CE Declaration of Conformity’
The following directives are applied:
Directive 2006/42/EC Machinery Directive (MD)
Directive 2006/95/EC Low Voltage Directive (LVD)
Directive 2004/108/EC EMC Directive (EMC)
The following standards are applied:

EN 60204-1: 2006 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines -

Part 1: General requirements
EN 61000-6-4: 2007 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 6-4: Generic
standards - Emission Standards for industrial environments
EN 61000-6-2: 2005 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 6-2: Generic
standards - Immunity for industrial environments
4 Maintenance
5 Appendix
567
Document No.:
84W246219-09
November 2019 10th Edition
Inner Pages Printed on Recycled Paper.
Printed in Japan
Operation Manual Checkweigher SSV Series B Type For Type Approval with Metal Detector

Checkweigher SSV Series B Type For Type Approval With Metal Detector

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Checkweigher SSV Series B Type For Type Approval With Metal Detector

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation Manual

This manual covers the software versions V5.02 or later.

(1) Structure of the operation manual

Manager: Personnel who supervises and manages the operators.

 Indicates another page for reference.

Indicates supplementary notes and related information.

Indicates the items for KWSXXXXBXXR（M5 series).

Indicates the items for KWSXXXXBXXG (M6-h type metal detector).

Indicates the type of spanner for the work

Phillips head screwdriver

Hammer and punch

Indicates the type of hex key for the work

Indicates the works that use a precision screwdriver.

■ Introduction ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 4 ● Timing Adjustment ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ100

■ Contents ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 6 ● Adjusting the RJ timingꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ101

■ Safety Symbolsꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 8 ● Auto Settings

■ SSV Series Checkweighers (Readjusting registered products) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ102

■ Names and Functions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ11 ● Setting External I/O Signals ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ127

■ Description of Operation Screen ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 16 ● Adjusting I/O Timing ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ153

● Connecting Ethernet (LAN) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ154

1 Basic Operations ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 28 ■ Other Settings and Adjustments ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 160

■ Basic Usage ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 32 ● Adjusting Touch Screen ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ160

● Turning On/Off Power ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 32 ● Checking Version Info ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ161

● Warming Up ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 32 ● Changing and Initializing Password ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ161

● Changing Access Levelꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 33 ● Setting the Date and Time ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ164

● Operating and Stopping ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 35 ● Setting the Language ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ165

● Registering a New Product ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 36 ● Changing the Display Language ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ165

● Checking Operations ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 52 ● Setting Conveyor Speed ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ168

● Adjusting Registered Products ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 57 ● Statistics Control ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ169

● Handling Errors and Alarms ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 73 ● Setting Weighcell ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ171

● If NG frequently occurs ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 75 ● Security and Rules ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ173

● Investigating the cause of ● Specifying the installation check settings ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ177

incorrect detections ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 76 ● Other Functions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ178

■ Daily Operation Procedure ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 80 ● User Information ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ186

● Setting Screen Brightness and

2 Advanced Operations ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 86 Key Touch Operation ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ186

■ Screen Hierarchy ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 87 ● Entering Device Information ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ187

● Basic display ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 90 ● Setting Signal Tower and Buzzer ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ188

● Statistics ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 91 ● Using Smart Measurement Function (SMF) ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ204

● X-bar R/s ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 92 ■ Other Useful Functions ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 211

● Enlarged barꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 93 ● Using Smart Guide ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 211

● Zoom Weight Disp. ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 94 ● Displaying Product List ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ215

● Custom Disp. ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 94 ● Copying and Deleting Registered Product ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ216

● Individual Disp. ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 95 ● Clearing Statistics ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ217

■ Calibrating/Adjusting Equipment ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 96 ● Setting All Products ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ218

● Sensitivity Correctionꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 96 ● Customizing the Items Displayed in Submenu ꞏꞏꞏ 219

● Viewing History ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 224 ● Removing the Weigh Conveyor Unitꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ287

Method ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 230 ● Removing the Conveyor Belt/Roller ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ295

■ Check Items for Failureꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 309

3 Installation and Connection

● SSV-i Series ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 274

● SSV-i Series ꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏꞏ 283

Safety Symbols Used in Manual

This indicates a hazardous procedure or danger that could result in light-to-severe

Safety Symbols Used on Equipment and/or in Manual

This indicates a prohibited operation. The prohibited operation is indicated in or

This indicates an obligatory safety precaution. The obligatory operation is

This indicates a note. The contents are described in the box.

These indicate that the marked part should be recycled, or be disposed in

Checkweighers are automated weighing devices commonly used

The SSV series checkweigher with metal detector has the

A high-speed and high-accuracy weighing system

Operator panel with color LCD touch screen

Network (QUICCA)1 USB memory2 Screen (Code reader)*3

Press the [ 转变 ] (Convert) button to